Category: Volume 16 – Number 3 – May 2006

  • The Politics of Ontology

    John Garrison

    JohnSF@gmail.com

     

    Review of: Judith Butler, Undoing Gender. New York: Routledge, 2004.

     

    Judith Butler’s Undoing Gender offers her latest thinking on a variety of issues related both to gender and also to the larger idea of becoming “undone.” In this volume, Butler goes beyond her earlier examinations of gender performativity to explore what defines humanness. Butler’s consideration of that defining process offers new insights into issues pertinent to both feminist and queer theorists. More importantly, however, the essays in this volume have practical implications for social movements; make new connections between discourse and knowledge; and offer an important re-consideration of the current state of the study of philosophy.

     

    The book collects eleven essays, many of which are revised versions of papers that have appeared in journals and anthologies during the past few years. The diverse contexts from which these papers are drawn make for lively and evocative reading. Indeed, this volume opens a variety of new lines of inquiry into the broader applications of Butler’s thinking for both scholars and activists. Undoing Gender comes at a time when Butler’s work is widely read outside of Gender Studies disciplines and is beginning to pursue a wider breadth of philosophical investigation. During the past ten years, Butler, the Maxine Eliot Professor of Rhetoric, Comparative Literature, and Women’s Studies at the University of California, Berkeley, has come to be a prolific writer and speaker, with a much more visible position within academia than at the time she wrote what is perhaps her most well-known book, Gender Trouble.

     

    What is exciting about Undoing Gender‘s central analysis of gender is that it directly addresses civil rights issues actively at stake within the larger culture. Several essays focus on the relationship between an array of social movements–intersex, transgender, transsexual, feminism, queer studies–and explore their differing positions around notions of sexuality and personal identity. In these sections, Butler’s analysis yields new insights into how sexual difference is politicized and policed. Early in the volume, Butler notes that these issues are not simply relevant to “the New Gender Politics” (11), but will speak to even larger issues, as

     

    the question of who and what is considered real and true is apparently a question of knowledge. But it is also, as Michel Foucault makes plain, a question of power. (27)

     

    Importantly, Butler’s analysis disaggregates the variety of movements too often grouped under the broad rubric “queer rights,” focusing on the often-overlooked transgender and intersex communities. In doing so, Butler demonstrates the degree to which these different movements and communities are driven by competing priorities and ontological claims. For example, she cites the intersex community’s opposition to coercive surgery on infants or children with hermaphroditic anatomy as a point at which a social movement is calling into question generally held ontological concepts. That is, this community’s opposition to surgery can be interpreted as a resistance to sexual dimorphism and offers a “critical perspective on the version of ‘human’ that requires ideal morphologies and the constraining of bodily norms” (4). By contrast, the transsexual movement seeks to legitimize elective surgery to change from one gender to another. Both movements, operating from different epistemological frameworks, seek to “undo” normative concepts of fixed, binary gender identities within our culture.

     

    To some readers, this may sound like familiar territory for Butler: seeking to better delineate the terms by which gender is defined against the backdrop of cultural production. However, the book represents a deeper engagement for Butler with the practical politics and current issues in feminist and queer movements today. In part, this may be in answer to critics who have expressed concern that academic feminists have begun to split into two camps: those who are actively involved in practical social struggles and those who have retreated into isolated academic positions. This latter group has been characterized perhaps most famously by Martha Nussbaum in her essay “The Professor of Parody” which appeared in The New Republic. Nussbaum suggests that these feminist theorists are interested only in the “verbal and symbolic politics” of feminism and engage in little discussion around the status of women outside of the United States. In that same essay, Nussbaum characterizes Butler as the “American feminist [who] has shaped these developments more than any other.”

     

    Undoing Gender, however, strikes new–and more pragmatic–critical ground for Butler by its emphasis on the rules by which the policing of gender operates. The book’s analysis focuses on the specific working functions of various regulatory efforts–from the narrowing definition of gender norms found in DSM-IV’s Gender Identity Disorder diagnosis to the allowable definition of “woman” in the United Nations Non-Governmental Organizations (NGO) platform on the status of women. One essay, “Bodily Confessions,” focuses on the nature of psychotherapeutic discourse and was originally presented as a paper at the 1999 American Psychological Division Meetings in San Francisco. The presence of this paper on that convening’s agenda suggests new opportunities for high theory to intersect with practice in the very arenas where legal and institutional change can take place.

     

    In her discussion of DSM-IV, Butler illuminates the interplay between the rhetoric of the medical institution and personal declarations of gender normalcy. For example, it is necessary for one to declare oneself as suffering from a diagnosable disorder in order to receive insurance reimbursement for a sex-change operation and hormonal treatment as a “medically necessary” procedure. Thus, a transgendered person must subscribe to the idea that their identity is a psychological disease in order to be “treated.” In this and other cogent examples, Butler makes clear the larger operations inherent in the self-reinforcing mechanisms by which regulatory systems operate and the profound realness those mechanisms provide to the Law. This reality effect is perhaps best described by Foucault, for whom

     

    all [transgression] ends up doing is reinforcing the law in its weakness . . . The law is that shadow toward which every gesture necessarily advances; it is itself the shadow of the advancing gesture. (35)

     

    Butler goes on to discuss the Vatican’s objection to including “gender” in the United Nations Non-Governmental Organizations (NGO) platform on the status of women due to a concern that it was a coded word for “homosexuality.” In her analysis, Butler agrees to some extent with the Vatican’s reference to “the possible inclusion of lesbian rights as ‘anti-human’,” as Butler argues that to admit “the lesbian into the realm of the universal might undo the human” and expand conventional notions of what it means to live a normative life (190).

     

    Much of Butler’s broader analysis focuses on how one is deemed to be an acceptable identity category–human, citizen, normal–and the relationship between this phenomena and social justice. She begins with the assertion that when a class of citizens’ normalcy is called into question, the result is often denial of civil rights and an increased frequency of violence. In thinking about the kind of resulting loss that members of disenfranchised communities often face, she looks at how problematizing these people’s normativity calls into question the degree to which they are living a “grievable life” (18). Here, she cites the fact that many people and institutions desensitize themselves to the catastrophic AIDS deaths in Africa or violence against sexual minorities by categorizing the victims of such tragedies as the Other. This desensitization operates by undoing a given population’s right to full personhood. This very “experience of becoming undone” (1) is the thread that connects the essays in this volume and offers a new entry point to consider international human rights issues.

     

    Butler’s discussions often turn to language as the point at which the issues of identity and social power converge. The essay “Bodily Confessions” looks specifically at the nature of discourse in both confession and psychoanalysis. Butler interrogates Foucault’s claim in The History of Sexuality: Volume I that psychoanalysis is a natural inheritor of the “pastoral power” inherent in confession, and thereby creates an environment designed to manifest power and control. Though Foucault later recanted this assertion, Butler uses this claim as a means to examine the nature of analytic speech and to explore the relationship between the words spoken in the therapy environment and the need to confess. These discussions touch upon the links between language and the body, thereby tying Undoing Gender to another of Butler’s earlier works, Bodies That Matter. In that volume, she offered an in-depth exploration the relationship between speech acts and the body.

     

    Throughout the book, Butler raises Derridean questions of authorship and the extent to which we lose control of the meaning of what we say once it is uttered. Butler shows that declarations of identity (whether gendered, racial, or otherwise) inevitably belong in part to the public sphere that hears our spoken claims and gives them meanings beyond our control. In order to examine more closely issues related to discourse, she looks at a range of examples from contemporary politics. Both the DSM-IV and Vatican examples support Butler’s argument that civil rights are directly related to whether or not someone is recognized as normal or human. And this recognition in the political sphere often occurs at the level of discourse. Invoking again the idea of becoming undone, Butler argues that

     

    if the schemes of recognition that are available to us are those that “undo” the person by conferring recognition, or “undo” the person by withholding recognition, then recognition becomes a site of power by which the human is differentially produced. (2)

     

    Undoing an individual’s right to full personhood can be achieved either by identifying them to be excluded or ignoring them to render them invisible.

     

    Undoing Gender‘s interrogation of the complex relationship between exclusion, discrimination, and identity places it squarely among the work of other contemporary queer theorists. Didier Eribon’s recent Insult and the Making of the Gay Self, for example, looks at the ways in which queer identities are in part formed by the societal discourse that gays adopt in order to define themselves. Eribon explores “the power of name-giving, the role of shame” as a shaper of personal identity, to which end he focuses his analysis on early depictions of gays in literature. He situates representations of gay people in Marcel Proust, André Gide, and Oscar Wilde in relation to theoretical frameworks presented by both Michel Foucault and Hannah Arendt in order to shed new light on the intermingled evolution of gay identity and social power. Butler’s book lacks the strong sense of historicity found in Eribon’s and therefore at times feels less grounded. However, Undoing Gender‘s consideration of social movements does make the book feel more relevant. Gayatri Gopinath’s Impossible Desires offers another useful counterpoint to Undoing Gender. Gopinath identifies and analyzes queer female subjectivities within a broad array of South Asian diasporic literature, film, and music to demonstrate the destabilizing power of these perspectives often rendered invisible by the logic of blood, authenticity, and patrilineal descent. Impossible Desires goes on to discuss events within the larger culture that signify a lack of tolerance for sexual difference within both the national and diasporic states of India. Gopinath’s book reflects the growing number of scholars in contemporary queer studies discussing the intersection between homophobia, racism, transnationalism, and globalization. Butler’s book touches only briefly on the intersection of these issues, and some readers may find themselves wanting more.

     

    Still, Undoing Gender is a natural companion to both Insult and the Making of the Gay Self and Impossible Desires. All three texts look at ways in which negative discourse–or the absence of discourse–around sexual minorities marginalizes them and contributes not only to societal misperceptions, but also to how minorities understand themselves.

     

    While Undoing Gender does move beyond Butler’s earlier thinking on gender and sexuality, it also includes a reconsideration of her ideas regarding gender performativity outlined in Gender Trouble. In this earlier volume, Butler sought to expose the heterosexism present in feminist theory and to explore the extent to which gender identities are largely socially constructed from a series of gestures, speech acts, and other theatrically produced reality effects. In Undoing Gender, she directly answers critics and others who have commented on Gender Trouble, responding to their concerns and better articulating some of the book’s finer points. Here, she addresses arguments raised by formalist Lacanians such as Joan Copjec, Charles Shepherdson, and Slavoj Zizek, as well as critic Carol Anne Tyler and theorist Rosi Braidotti. Tyler, for instance, asserts that it will always be different for a woman to transgress gender norms than for a man, due to predefined, differing positions of social power. In response, Butler states her “worry that the frameworks we commit ourselves to because they describe patriarchal domination well and may well recommit us to seeing that very domination as inevitable or as primary” (213). Here, Butler reaffirms the radicalism that makes her philosophical work so important and also underscores the necessity for the writing of Undoing Gender: the need to destabilize the very regulatory functions and frameworks that police culturally produced gender identities described in her earlier work.

     

    The final essay in this volume, “Can the ‘Other’ Philosophy Speak?” helps us learn more about Butler’s personal history and understand how she came to study philosophy, feminism, and gender issues. We see her early encounters with Spinoza when in the family basement, “hiding out from painful family dynamics” (235). We hover alongside her in Paul de Man’s classes at Yale as she finds herself “compelled and repelled” by the scholar’s discussions of Nietzsche’s Beyond Good and Evil (238). Like Derrida’s The Work of Mourning, these sections of the book examine Butler’s own lineage of thinkers and texts that have shaped who she is. This effort at personal criticism (which also appears, in a more limited way, in Eribon’s book) follows the recent trend among scholars to offer a window into their own experiences and to suggest their own relationship to the material they study. Butler’s choice to include personal criticism here underscores a way that academics involved in high theory can more deeply engage with readers and connect to the cultural contexts which their exegeses examine. For Butler, her personal disclosure naturally segues into a discussion of how one seeks out philosophy, and whether philosophy can have practical implications for our lives.

     

    Interestingly, Butler invokes this very question of the relationship of one’s life and influential texts in her recent essay eulogizing Derrida’s life in the London Review of Books. In that essay, Butler recalls sharing a stage with Derrida in 1993 and asking him “whether he had many debts to pay.” Derrida has difficulty understanding her, and believes she is asking him about his “death,” rather than “debts.” Butler recalls,

     

    at this point I could see that there was a link between the two . . . but it was not until I read his later work that I came to understand how important that link really was.

     

    The final section of Undoing Gender invokes this same sentiment. That is, it feels as if Butler is offering an homage to those works, thinkers, and experiences that have profoundly influenced her. Readers familiar with her earlier work may feel, as Butler describes feeling in the quote above, that such linkages and influences become clearer as one reads Undoing Gender in the context of Butler’s other books and essays.

     

    This same essay contemplates how philosophy, or at least the modes of philosophical critique, has begun to appear in English, comparative literature, and other academic departments. Butler explores how philosophy has unintentionally produced a “spectral double of itself” (241) and engendered a broader understanding of who can be said to practice philosophy, including interdisciplinary thinkers from Walter Benjamin to Cornel West. Here Butler also discusses the trend among graduate students and young scholars outside traditional philosophy departments to seek out thinkers–such as Derrida, Irigaray, and Cixous–to pursue new methods of critique falling under the broad name of “theory.” This essay may both galvanize philosophy departments to consider how to re-position themselves as relevant to graduate students today and may also encourage more universities to explore adopting interdisciplinary programs such as U.C. Berkeley’s Rhetoric Department on whose faculty Butler sits or Stanford University’s Modern Thought and Literature program. “Can the ‘Other’ Philosophy Speak?” is the liveliest of the book’s essays, the kind that helps the reader better define their own position in relation to a lineage of thinkers and within the larger scholarly community.

     

    Some critics may argue that, with this book, Butler does not break the same radical ground that she did with Gender Trouble. However, what is refreshing about Undoing Gender is its frank openness, its willingness to introduce new lines of inquiry and leave many questions unanswered. Butler herself suggests that “we make no decision on what sexual difference is but leave that question open, troubling, unresolved, propitious” (192). At this and other points, Undoing Gender takes important steps–both for Butler as a critic and for queer theory as a discipline–toward new opportunities to expand frontiers, make boundaries more porous, and build new coalitions between both social movements and schools of thought.

     

    Works Cited

     

    • Butler, Judith. Bodies That Matter: On the Discursive Limits of “Sex”. New York: Routledge, 1993.
    • —. Gender Trouble: Feminism and the Subversion of Identity. London: Routledge 1990.
    • —. “Jacques Derrida.” London Review of Books 26.21 (4 Nov. 2004): 32.
    • Derrida, Jacques. The Work of Mourning. Trans. Pascale-Anne Brault. Chicago: U of Chicago P, 2001.
    • Eribon, Didier. Insult and the Making of the Gay Self. Trans. Michael Lucey. Durham: Duke UP, 2004.
    • Foucault, Michel. “Maurice Blanchot: The Thought from the Outside.” Foucault/Blanchot. Michel Foucault and Maurice Blanchot. Trans. Jeffrey Mehlman and Brian Massumi. New York: Zone, 1990. 7-58.
    • Gopinath, Gayatri. Impossible Desires: Queer Diasporas and South Asian Public Cultures. Durham: Duke UP, 2005.
    • Nussbaum, Martha C. “The Professor of Parody: The Hip Defeatism of Judith Butler.” Review. The New Republic 220 (22 Feb. 1999): 37.

     

  • The Hamartia of Light and Shadow: Susan Sontag in the Digital Age

    Manisha Basu

    English Department
    University of Pittsburgh
    mab79@pitt.edu

     

    Review of: Susan Sontag. Regarding the Pain of Others. New York: Picador, 2003.

     

    In the first of the six essays in On Photography (1977), Susan Sontag had claimed that after repeated exposure, photographs of atrocity became less real for their audience, and therefore less able to evoke sympathy. In her final book Regarding the Pain of Others, Susan Sontag moves, self-admittedly, in a different direction from her earlier argument: she stops to ask whether indeed our contemporary culture of digitization and image-glut actually shrivels the ethical force of photographs of atrocity, or whether in an age in which spectacle has usurped the place of reality, photographic images still have the power to evoke shock and sentiment. Responding in a different way to our contemporary politico-cultural occasion, Judith Butler in an essay entitled “Photography, War, Outrage,” elaborates the nature of the photographic frame and its relation with interpretive practices, and in doing so, positions hers own argument in opposition to Sontag’s. According to Butler, Sontag understands interpretation itself to be quintessentially narrative in nature, and since without accompanying captions and analyses, photographs cannot tell a story, or even generate a complete understanding of the situation they are expressing, they are neither narratives, nor therefore, interpretations. In fact, left to themselves, photographs are the fragmentary emanations of reality, the punctual and discrete renderings of truth, rather than the uniform grammar of a consistently unfolding tale. In short, they are not ‘writing’ and thus relay and transmit diffuse assemblages of affect, without necessarily appealing to the coherent, narrative understanding of an interpretive, rational consciousness.

     

    In commenting on the phenomenon of embedded reporting vis-à-vis images of atrocity from Abu Ghraib, Butler arrives at a different notion of the photographic frame and its relation with interpretive practices. Butler’s view is that the phenomenon of embedded reporting is a way of interpreting in advance what will and will not be included in a field of perception, and thus even before the viewer is confronted with the image, interpretation is always already in play. Defined as a situation in which journalists agree to report only from the points of view already established by military and governmental authorities, embedded reporting was first employed in the coverage of the British campaign in the Falkland Islands in 1982. After that time, the phenomenon reappeared during the two Iraq wars, particularly in the limitations that the U.S. Department of Defense imposed on journalists reporting on the second Iraq War. Butler’s argument thus notes that restricting how any of us may see–regardless of whether the reception of photographic images urges interpretive practices or not–is in contemporary politics becoming an increasingly significant way of effecting mass interpretation. Butler argues–and she suggests that this argument is different from Sontag’s–that, even outside of the specific practices involved in embedded reporting, the photographic frame “is not just a visual image awaiting its interpretation; it is itself interpreting, actively, even forcibly” (823). However, there is at least one glaring problem here with Butler’s reading of Sontag. Indeed, Sontag by no means suggests that photographs are images that merely await interpretations, even though there can be no doubt that she does make a sharp distinction between the interpretive practices associated with photography and those associated with prose or painting for instance. In fact Sontag most famously writes that where “narratives make us understand: photographs do something else. They haunt us” (89).

     

    While in Butler’s mind, this declaration expresses something of a decisive fracture for Sontag between the momentary effects of photography and the enduring ethical pathos generated by prose, my view of Regarding the Pain of Others is different. Especially in her last book, Sontag neither attempts to distinguish photography from prose, and come to the repetitive and therefore fatigued conclusion that without the narrative coherence of prose, photographs do not qualify as interpretations at all; nor does she, as Butler puts it, fault photography for not being writing. Instead Sontag finds herself to be endlessly intrigued by precisely that haunting quality of the visual image that marks its distinction from the written word. In an age in which she herself says “to remember is more and more not to recall a story but to be able to call up a picture,” (89) Sontag is not really concerned with forcing photographs into the narrative mold of prose. Indeed, given the sheer sweep of the visual image in contemporary culture and politics, she struggles to come to terms with the nature of national memorialization effected by photographs, the kind of affect relayed by photographic images as the discrete and punctual fragments of reality, and the semiological universe that may be called into being by such dissociated transmissions of affectivity. For Butler, however, such concerns do not come to the forefront because she is responding to the very specific issue of embedded reporting and how embedded reporting constitutes us as unthinking consumers of visual culture. She must therefore, indeed almost irresistibly, emphasize that “to learn to see the frame that blinds us to what we see is no easy matter” (826). Again, she must overlook the fact that in Regarding the Pain of Others, Sontag, while acknowledging that framing is in itself interpreting, is more interested in engaging a world where it is claimed that “reality has abdicated” in favor of representations (109).

     

    Regarding the Pain of Others begins quite appropriately with an invocation of Virginia Woolf’s Three Guineas, for if the latter was Woolf’s “brave unwelcomed reflections on the roots of war” in face of the rising fascist insurrection in Spain, then the former is occasioned by Sontag’s fearless interventions in the media coverage of the second war in Iraq (3). The basic impetus of Three Guineas is expertly laid out in the first few pages of Sontag’s work, emphasizing that Woolf suffers from a naïve illusion that war is universally abhorrent to all, and that photographic representations of war will no doubt generate universal consensus against it. Woolf had couched her book as a response to a letter she had received from a London lawyer asking, “how in your opinion are we to prevent war?” Woolf immediately challenges the very grounds of this spectral lawyer’s question and proposes that although the lawyer and she may belong to the same privileged and educated class, men and women cannot, and do not, have the same responses to war. Inviting the lawyer to look together with her at a particularly gruesome set of war photographs depicting bodies maimed and mutilated beyond any viewer’s recognition of them as human, Woolf discovers with a great deal of rhetorical èlan that both she and the lawyer–despite their differences–think the photographs disgusting, horrific, barbarous, and abominable. From this point, Woolf hurtles off to a conclusion that according to Sontag unthinkingly collapses the very distinction she had begun with. In other words, despite being “separated by the age-old affinities of feeling and practice of their respective sexes,” Woolf’s claim is that that both the lawyer and she respond in the same way to photographic representations of war, and that, given this happy coincidence of emotions, they will in unison be able to call for a stop to the abomination of mindless death and destruction (6). Thus despite having attacked her interlocutor for his presumption of a consensual “we” in asking the initial question, Woolf herself, Sontag notes, slips into the same danger of proposing that there is any kind of consensus at all in the repudiation of war.

     

    In light of our own political occasion, as images of the butchering of noncombatants begin to seep out of Iraq, it is difficult by any stretch of the imagination to argue that such representations immediately evoke a repudiation of war–in fact, as Sontag asks, do they not in fact, often enough, inspire greater militancy? Can there indeed be a universal “we” when the issue in question involves looking at other people’s pain? Of course, Sontag’s posing of such rhetorical questions becomes in itself a form of challenge to Woolf’s assertion of a liberal consensus that draws its sustenance from the magnanimity and goodwill of educated democratic agreements. Yet, what the former does not take care to note when attacking Woolf on this ground is precisely the affect generated by the earlier writer’s own text. Is Virginia Woolf indeed naïve enough so easily to let go of her intellectual position distinguishing between, on the one hand, bellicose men who are seduced to battle by the torrid allure of sacrifice and its promise of glorious patriotism, and, on the other, Lysistrata-inspired women who at every juncture must be distinguished from their war-like male counterparts? Would it not be more critically challenging for us to investigate the effects that an author of Woolf’s intellectual affiliations might have generated in drawing all her critical distinctions together, violently crushing them bit by bit into one vast crucible of mass feeling, and then proposing that they manifest a well-united front, free of opposition and difference? Indeed, in misreading Woolf’s own reliance on transitive affectivity is Sontag not betraying her own failure to engage the very term she has set out to investigate?

     

    Sontag writes that Woolf’s sweeping generalization about humanity’s universal repudiation of war rests on two uncritical assumptions: one that assumes that violence is by and large condemned by all Kantian citizens of goodwill, and another that dogmatically believes in the transparency of the photographic image and its ability to convey an undiluted truth. It is of course fairly easy for the author of Regarding the Pain of Others to convince her readers that the question of violence is a much contested one, and indeed she does not waste much time on this self-evident issue, except to say that the history of war has shown that violence is often entitled “just” or at least “necessary” in the face of a threatening enemy. What is of greater interest in this context is Sontag’s attack on Woolf’s faith that photographs have the ability to reflect an undistorted real. And indeed it is here that Butler’s claim about Sontag arguing that the photograph cannot by itself provide an interpretation totters on the brink of a misreading. Weaving in and out of the history of photographic images, Sontag argues that the photograph, like all other texts, is indeed interpretative; it has an author whose point of view we see, a frame that excludes and includes objects of cognition, a career of meaning that moves away from the sovereignty of the author’s clutches, a life of circulation and dissemination that may or may not make it the plaything of different interest groups struggling for legitimation and authority, and what Edward Said would call a worldliness that institutes it as a part of numerous heterogeneous realities that come together to form the great discontinuous network of human existence. In short, the photograph, like all representations and texts, is flawed in being intimately tied up with power, position, and interests, whether it was a victim in their struggle or not. Strangely enough however, having argued in this manner about the representational quality of the photographic image, Sontag is unable to decode Woolf’s text within her own paradigm of thought. In other words, if as Sontag proposes, photographic images, despite their “truth” or “untruth” do have rhetorical and polemic effects, then why is it that Woolf’s text or her “image of thought,” as it were, is allowed to slither out of such a complex domain and stand on its own, as the supreme expression of authorial sovereignty? Why is Woolf’s writing released and liberated not only from a consideration of the author’s own rhetorical invention but also from the historicality of the effects it might have produced in conjunction with the different knottings and strands, that, dependent on a myriad of circumstances, came together to question, trouble, upset, and reformulate notions of liberal democracy in the wake of Europe’s second great war?

     

    The 1930s were a critical juncture in the life of liberal democracy in both Europe and North America, and intellectuals in these continents were already looking toward the margins of intellectual history for ideas that would transform and revitalize the landscape of politics. Indeed, many critics believe that the quest had made itself known even earlier, and that if the last decades of the nineteenth century could be seen as grand zenith of liberalism in the West, then the Great War marked its grotesque nadir.1 Despite the fact that Virginia Woolf’s work is a part of this intellectual milieu, Sontag is unable, or perhaps unwilling, to investigate what might have been the intriguing effects of Three Guineas within such a trajectory of thought. More surprising perhaps is the fact that while shying away from thinking the historicality of Woolf’s text, Regarding the Pain of Others is almost seductively alluring in its historicization of the photographic image. The writing not only displays a breathtaking array of scholarship in a lucidly elegant style that rarely appears pedantic, but also entices readers with the promise of a heuristic about how war is waged, understood, and represented in our own time. Particularly exciting is the chapter of the book that undertakes an excursion into the long and illustrious pedigree of the iconography of suffering. Beginning with the writhing statue of Laocoön and his sons, moving niftily through the cadaverous sweetness of depictions of hell in the Christian tradition, and finally briefly touching on the inexhaustible catalogue of cruelties in pagan myths, Sontag’s range of examples culminates in the claim that the practice of representing suffering came to be considered deplorable only with changing historical-political conditions:

     

    The practice of representing atrocious suffering as something to be deplored, and if possible stopped enters the history of images with a specific subject: the sufferings endured by civilian populations at the hands of a victorious army on the rampage. It is a quintessentially secular subject, which emerges in the seventeenth century, when contemporary realignments of power become material for artists. (42-43)

     

    Sontag’s argument reaches its critical acme with the above quote, in which the universal condemnation of the slaughter of civilians is neatly plucked out of the comfort of its naturalized setting and violently defamiliarized. This claim is of course also the point of entry for Sontag’s attack on Woolf’s notion that photographs of war are universally lamentable. It is thus from this intellectual platform that we expect Sontag to launch her foray into the contemporary landscape of politics. However, our author’s quite skillful reading of the deplorable nature of suffering as a historically specific moment rather than an eternally true human reaction to atrocity does not seem to translate into a corresponding intellectual dexterity with representations of human suffering in an occasion very different from that of the seventeenth century.

     

    Confronted, in the late twentieth and early twenty-first centuries, with a sheer discordance of pixilated images and their inexhaustible generation of other images, and therefore the culture of ‘image-glut’, Regarding the Pain of Others finds itself inundated. In the final section of the essay, Sontag’s prose loses its patient elegance to become instead a harried and in fact beleaguered document that is little more than a frustrated rant against the inhuman multiplication not just of images, but of the sacrilegious settings in which we see them. In fact, in my view, Sontag’s apparent frustration with the fact that “photographs cannot produce ethical pathos in us” (which Butler reads as her distrust of the interpretive force of the punctual and momentary nature of the photographic image) is a result of this besieged intellection (“Photography, War, Outrage” 824). Harrowing photographs of blood-spattered men, women, and children, ruined monuments of flesh and stone, twisted and maimed beyond recognition, faceless bodies, and amputated limbs are flanked today, Sontag writes, by advertisements for SUVs, pain relievers, and emollients, in much the same manner that the unbridgeable difference between the editorial and advertising sections of leading news dailies is blurred to the point of indistinction, and photographs of the Spanish Civil War unabashedly adorn walls of an Agnes B. boutique. In other words, if the nature of understanding conjured by photographic images was in the first place distinct from the “coherent reason” called into being by prose, then the contemporary landscape that Sontag lays out seems to question the very validity of categories which used to describe a humane response to images of atrocity. Can “reason,” “conscience,” and “sympathy” or even “desire,” “delight,” and “curiosity” meet the challenge of an irreverent blasphemy of contiguities between distinct images? What nature of curiosity, for instance, might be sparked by the pressures of witnessing an advertisement for Benetton in conjunction with its deployment of the blood-stained shirt of a dead Croatian solider, and what quality of sympathy by the violent yoking together of the concentration camp photographs from 1945 and the Hôtel de Sully in Paris?

     

    Tragically, Regarding the Pain of Others turns back decidedly from answering any such questions in much the same way as it had foreclosed its own engagement with the rhetorical affect generated by the style of Three Guineas. Indeed, it is here that we can locate the hamartia of the work–the tragic shortcoming, not of the hero, but of the text–whereby it cannot bring to fruition its own implicit struggle in coming to terms with the nature of the affect transmitted by photographs, the increasingly aphoristic quality of the image, the place of the image in an era of information-overload, and the capacity of the image in such a landscape to infinitely, and perhaps “irrationally,” multiply its significations in relation to continuously mobile variations. Instead, Sontag looks for reprieve to the hundreds of millions of television watchers whose viewing habits are radically different from those of a small educated population living in the rich part of the world, and to those areas of the globe where news has not yet been converted into entertainment. She seems to suggest that for such people and others who do not have the luxury of patronizing reality, photographs of atrocity at least provide an initial spark for humane thought, for engaging with the sheer range of depravity and human wickedness, and for practicing what may be called the ethical act of remembrance. Indeed, benumbed and inured to tormented and twisted masses of flesh, we in the metropolitan center may be able to do absolutely nothing with the residual feelings of compassion that such images evoke, we may argue endlessly, and in Sontag’s opinion, unproductively about the indistinguishable boundaries between representation and reality, and draped in the armour of the postmodern critic, we may grandiloquently propose that the effects of images exceed the photographer’s intentions, yet, there is, a “real,” Sontag tells us, that is untouched by, and uninterested in, the trace it leaves on film. “The dead,” Sontag writes are “supremely uninterested in the living,” in fact they thwart our gaze and thus tell us that they do not care that we see. This snub to our habits of visual consumption is for Sontag the ethical force of “the real,” it is the haunting quality of the photographic image, which according to her has a close relationship with mortality. Yet how exactly, from amidst a massification of pixilated images, we should engage this “real” and whether indeed the “haunting effect” lies buried, irretrievably, in a sheer volume of images, remains largely unclear in Sontag’s final book.

     

    Regarding the Pain of Others is not, as Judith Butler argues, caught up in a fruitless endeavour to argue the value of the written word over photographic images, or even the value of narrative coherence and understanding over all other forms of understanding. It does not by any means deny that the frame is in itself an interpretive device–indeed Sontag states in no uncertain terms that photographs have an “author . . . [they] represent the view of someone” (31), just as she points out that “to photograph is to frame and to frame is to exclude” (46). Regarding the Pain of Others labors to understand why and how the transmission of affectivity conjured by photographs is distinct from the narrative understanding engendered by prose, and it strives to uncover a contemporary political occasion in which such diffuse relays of pixilated affect have not only massified to an inhuman scope, but also have increasingly become the norm for constructions of national and patriotic memory. In that sense, Butler’s and Sontag’s projects are not very different. Butler believes that it is the frame of embedded reportage that is increasingly being called upon to constitute a national and patriotic population, which is inured to the suffering of others, for, as in the case of the Abu Ghraib photographs, there is a “clear belief that those who deliver this torture, along with those who commemorate the deed are doing justice the American way.” “Photography, War, Outrage” thus emphasizes that it is the frame that is constitutive, even at the expense of, and perhaps tragically missing the mark of Sontag’s distinct concerns with how to preserve the ethical force of the image given the inhuman accelerations of a changing economy of visibilities.

     

    Sontag too, like Butler, is concerned with mobilizations of nationalism and patriotism. Unlike Butler however, she understands the contemporary face of nationalism not through the particular phenomena of embedded reporting, but broadly, through the defeat of humanism–through the new order of representations that has little room for modern humans and their reliance on the rational ordering of syllogistic propositions. Sontag’s is an endeavour to come to terms with digitization as a chaotic deluge, in which a sheer volume of information bombards the citizen every day, and image variables with varying degrees of frequency come into close proximity in brutally contradictory settings and with no necessary rational thread. Left to narrativize such a messy surfeit with little resort to what used to be the cultural-pedagogical institutions of the welfare state, the citizen uses images available in a pragmatic way, inserting and situating them in a patchwork of connections that indeed draws attention to an emergent style of thinking not necessarily bound by the sovereign reason of modern anthropos. Despite being such a powerfully historical text–one that reveals that the very abhorrence of representations of atrocity is a relatively modern phenomenon–Sontag’s Regarding the Pain of Others tragically misses the mark in so far as it fails to encounter the historicality of anthropos and indeed of humanism as a mode of thinking (and the inability to encounter the historicity of Woolf’s Three Guineas is an aspect of this failure). Yet, is this flaw not in itself a testament to the fact that the changing contours of the human are still emergent, and that we are even now living the passing of an older political form and its attendant categories of organization? After all, are not intellectuals the world over laboring to grasp fundamental transformations in the way humans and citizens affiliate themselves with modes of political aggregation? Is not much of their work belated in relation to the emergent changes it seeks to track?

     

    Notes

     

    1. See Waters.

     

    Works Cited

     

    • Butler, Judith. “Photography, War, Outrage.” PMLA 120.3 (May 2005): 822-27.
    • De Man, Paul. Critical Writings, 1953-1978. Minneapolis: U of Minnesota P, 1989.
    • Sontag, Susan. Regarding the Pain of Others. New York: Picador, 2003.
    • Waters, Lindsay. Paul de Man: Critical Writings, 1953-1978. Minneapolis: U of Minnesota P, 1989.

     

  • Mystics of a Materialist Age

    Justus Nieland

    Department of English
    Michigan State University
    nieland@msu.edu

     

    Review of: Marcus Boon, The Road of Excess: A History of Writers on Drugs.Cambridge: Harvard UP, 2002.

     

    Marcus Boon’s ambitious, lucid, and far-ranging cultural history of the connection between literature and drugs eschews a “single chronological history of drugs” and seeks instead “to reveal more subtle, micropolitical histories of everyday interactions between human beings and particular psychoactive substances to find out whether these histories had left their traces in literature” (9). The answer, as any reader of De Quincey, Coleridge, or Burroughs knows, is that they have. And how. More pointedly, Boon’s impressive study asks–and takes a valiant stab at answering–“how it came to be that aesthetics and transgression, and the literary genres associated with them, came to be associated with drug use” (5).

     

    This is a bigger question, and a tricky one to tackle in one book, even one as sprawling and learned as Boon’s. Any convincing answer would have to address not only the dynamic interrelationship between writing and the history of pharmacological science–something Boon does well, and with often breathtaking range–but also the co-evolution of drug writing with both theories of the aesthetic and the variety of genres, anti-genres, and subversive literary gestures that could be called transgressive. Boon’s catholic style of historicism would seem well-suited to this task, since it is cultural studies written “the way an ethnographer would,” and sees literature in sublunary fashion, as just “one out of many forms of human activity” (5). Yet for all of Boon’s anecdotal connoisseurship and dazzling intellectual roaming–especially across the domains of the literary-historical and the scientific–his study has surprisingly little to say about the literary, or about new (or old) ways of talking about literary transgression. Theories of the avant-garde, or conventional critical stories about modernism’s formal subversions and its forays into the interior and the transcendent, or indeed any sustained discussion of how drug use spawned challenges to mainstream aesthetics or bourgeois expressive forms like the novel–all of this is conspicuously absent in Boon’s study. So, while Boon claims that literature and drugs are two “dynamically developing domains of human activity,” the literary is often the unsexy, occasionally inert partner in Boon’s narrative, waiting passively to receive the traces of its psychoactive counterpart (5). Boon’s writers are on drugs, but his approach to literary history and theory is often way too square.

     

    Perhaps this is a consequence of Boon’s decision to forego a “particular conceptual framework beyond that of a set names of substances around which stories, texts, practices have clustered, and that of chronology,” used for convenience (9). Boon allows himself a single, but effective, dose of theory in his introduction, drawing on Bruno Latour’s provocative argument about the transcendental in We Have Never Been Modern (1993). Recall that in Latour’s anatomy of the modern constitution, modernity works by erecting a divide between nature and culture, one designed to liberate man from the superstitious mana and murk of the premodern but one that effectively produces a modern society “permeated by the very hybrids of nature-culture that it officially claims it has eradicated” (11). Drugs, Boon argues, are hybrid in the Latourian sense–“material and at the same time constructed,” Trojan horses of the modern transcendental impulse (11). In a world without God, drugs fuse soma and spirit, allowing the moderns to have their otherwordly hashcake and eat it too. Latour thus helps Boon “to affirm an inclusive polyvalent movement around the boundaries that modernity has built for itself that would integrate transcendental experience within the realm of the possible” (12).

     

    While Boon confesses that he has “no particular version of the transcendental to push,” he is sympathetic to “our legitimate desire to be high” (12, 13). What’s more, though he works to disabuse us of the myth that drug use is a modern phenomenon, he believes the desire for transcendence–and for drugs, its material agents–was forced into a crisis of acuity in the shadow of Enlightenment modernity, and shortly thereafter achieved its first full flowering in early German Romanticism. In this fashion, Boon hopes, on the one hand, to call into question the “Romantic vision of drugs as an aesthetic experience” independent of history, scientific practices, and market forces and, on the other, to challenge the classical notion of literature as “drug free” (5).

     

    However laudable Boon’s desire to embed the Romantic attitude towards drugs in “a more complicated matrix of historical, cultural, and scientific developments” (6), who, truth be told, believes otherwise anymore? Literary scholars peddling non-ironic, ahistorical, or non-materialist versions of Romanticism, or its modernist and postmodernist strains, are in short supply. Even rarer are those making claims for writing “as a kind of pure activity of consciousness or tradition” (5). The strength of Boon’s study is not to be found in its revisionist notes, which sometimes ring hollow, but instead in the discursive breadth and synthetic power of his synoptic approach. As Boon himself notes, “the whole weight of my argument consists in separating drugs from each other, showing how each has quite specific historically emergent discourses attached to it, and avoiding theoretical generalizations on the subject” (14). Here, Boon proves especially instructive. He is able to trace a series of specific discursive tropes entangled in each drug category with sufficient consistency so as to reveal in each chapter what we might call, following Matei Calinescu, the five stoned faces of modernity: narcotics, anesthetics, cannabis, stimulants, and psychedelics.

     

    The narcotic modernity of his first chapter is one set in darkness and marked by the force of a relentless negativity, of revolt against the profane world of science, industry, and reason. Boon observes that “the evolution of opium in nineteenth-century European culture follows a series of displacements,” shifts he traces nimbly in the chapter from the fields of “medicine to philosophy, philosophy to literature, literature to social mythology, and mythology to politics,” where the drug “rejoins a radically transformed medicine at the end of the century in the Decadent movement and the theory of degeneration” (32). Boon explains how the “specifically literary use of opium” begins with the influence of eighteenth-century physicians Erasmus Darwin and John Brown first on neoclassical poetic discourse, then on the Jena Romantics, Novalis, and Coleridge, whom Darwin introduced to opium through Thomas Wedgwood (23). Brown understood illness to be caused by a lack of stimulation, one that could be cured by wine or opium. Brunonian science thus allowed the Romantics to “broker a compromise between the Newtonian mechanism they detested and a vitalism that was otherwise dismissed as superstitious or unscientific” (27). For Novalis, opium became a “technology of the self,” a mode of producing sickness as, paradoxically, an “unnatural state of health–of revolt against the limits of the animal body” (30).

     

    It is also Novalis, for Boon, who helps originate a modern Gnostic approach to drugs, which sees the material world as fallen and corrupt, to be abandoned for a space of transcendental authenticity. And it is this Gnostic dimension of narcotics that Boon explores in Coleridge’s enthusiasm for Spinoza and laudanum; in the evident proximity, in De Quincey and elsewhere, between the narcotic abyss and the Romantic sublime; in Baudelaire’s critique of modernity’s paradis artificiels; in the nihilism of Cocteau and Artaud; in certain surrealists’ quest for the chemical trigger of the marvelous; and in the post-WWII figure of Beat junkie as both Gnostic and saint. This brief list testifies to the often-stunning erudition of Boon’s study, whose scope, even in this chapter, is capacious enough consider the role of poppy in Chaucer’s “A Knight’s Tale,” the discursive links between opium and orientalism, the cult of morphine in fin-de-siècle Europe and America, the legalization of narcotics use and the rise of the detoxification diary and addiction memoir following the Great War, and the post-WWII literary connection between rebellious youth the new psychopathology of the addict.

     

    If narcotics are discursively enmeshed in the poetic night of Romantic negation and gnosis, anesthetics, “with their ability to shut down the body and mind in a single swift movement,” are particularly apt doubles of the transcendent (91). Yet anesthetic literature, as Boon’s second chapter demonstrates, is decidedly less poetic than opium-infused reveries, encouraging a clinical, philosophical attitude that is, surprisingly, Idealist. In fact, anesthetics, for Boon “remain an anomaly in the history of drug use: the only drugs for which the major cultural reference points are Hegel and transcendental philosophy” (119). And Boon earns this provocative claim by observing, for example, the specter of Kant presiding over the experiments with nitrous oxide performed in 1799 by British chemist Humphry Davy (a friend of Coleridge), and later, the influence of American chemist James Paul Blood, the “chief proponent of the philosophical use of ether,” on William James, for whom anesthetics and Hegel alike “offered a false version of the infinite that remained entirely in the realm of thought, without ever actually engaging the phenomenal world” (111).

     

    Surprisingly enough, it is his chapter on the cannabis user that allows Boon to engage most directly with the question of modern sociality–its disjointed contours and possible reimaginings. Potheads are poets of the social, since the cannabis user “is not content to rest in the transcendental state” of anesthesia, or to fall into the asocial swoon of the opiate user, but rather experiences more modest shifts of consciousness that allow him to exist on the boundary of transcendental and social subjectivity, on the profane cusp of modernity’s dreamworld, poised for illumination (127). Intoxicated by hashish, one “wants to and is capable of introducing esoteric secrets into the domain of the social” (127). For this reason, hashish literature is particularly given to the “utopian musings on the transformation of the world” that one finds in Rabelais, Rimbaud, and the hashish writings of Walter Benjamin, and to the “fractal social spaces” joining the medieval Islamic Assassins to their modern, bohemian variants in the Parisian Club des Hachichins, the cultic world of the jazzman, and the North African Beat scene presided over by Paul and Jane Bowles (166, 167).

     

    Boon’s writing and conceptualization are at their tightest and most productive in his chapter on stimulants. Where the privileged hybrid tropes of first three chapters slowly coalesce to unveil modernities of poppied decadence and imaginative retreat, Idealist transcendence, and utopian transformations, respectively, the fourth chapter speaks breathlessly to the coked-up modernity of intensification, speed, and cyberpunks; of man-machinism, Sartre’s speed habit, and the existential force of will. This is the prosthetic modernity that would find a home for Italian Futurist F.T. Marinetti, famously dubbed “the caffeine of Europe” even though, as Boon notes, Marinetti disapproved of drugs and got sufficiently high on dreams of war and violence. This is, finally, modernity as technique: “the stimulants,” Boon notes, “which appear to offer us an almost mechanical increase in productivity . . . pose the problem of technology at a more fundamental level” since they are McLuhanesque “‘extensions of man,’ extensions of our capabilities” (174).

     

    Following this tour de force, the final chapter, “Imaginal Realms: Psychedelics and Literature,” comes as something of a downer, and contains some of book’s more underwhelming thinking about the literary and its relationship to psychoactive substances. As in the other chapters, Boon’s wide swath verges on the disorienting–from the premodern drugs of Milton’s Comus to the non-literary happenings of sixties psychedelia, from European encounters with Native American and Siberian shamanism to postmodern returns to shamanistic ethnography in work of Michael Taussig and Terence McKenna, with stops in Wonderland, the mescaline experiments of Sartre, Heidegger, Jünger, and Artaud, and the broader post-WWII interest in the virtual, microscopic, or extraplanetary spaces accessed by drugs. The chapter aims “to show how the history of what we now call the psychedelics is intimately linked to the evolution of literature in the West, insofar as literature provided a set of maps or blueprints for the imaginary, and a place to situate and explore the imaginal realms, when this was impossible elsewhere” (222). Let’s set aside the chapter’s impossible ambition, and consider the substance of this claim about substances: Drugs are like literature because they provide space for the faculty of the imagination, harboring humans’ transcendental aspirations in a disenchanted modernity. Boon makes similar analogical claims throughout the book. What, then, do psychedelics teach us about literature or the mind? Answer: “Psychedelics point out in a very direct and dramatic way that radical, rapid shifts in consciousness are possible” (273). No argument there. Or: “Psychedelics offer a perspective on the process of symbol formation, revealing the way that the creative flux of the imagination is frozen into particular forms, concepts, words. Literature . . . is necessarily a method of capturing the flux of the mind” (274). That is, to be sure, one way of thinking about literature, but is it Boon’s? Apparently so: “The important thing to understand here is creativity, its source and its power. Literature and psychedelic experience are both fundamentally acts of poiesis–poiesis not as representation but as creation itself” (275). These are rather airy claims about the literary that, for this reader, become increasingly less compelling until they run aground on romantic or belletristic clichés about the imagination. When the lesson learned from Huxley on acid is the same as Bloom on the Bard, the reputations of drug writing and old-school literary humanism suffer equally. In moments like these, Boon is furthest from his stated goal to explain the association between aesthetics, transgression, and drug use.

     

    Boon is abstemious when it comes to theory, but his book might have benefited from more of it, since his book is in silent dialogue with a recent explosion of relevant scholarly work in modernity studies–work on the concept of experience (Krzysztof Ziarek’s The Historicity of Experience, Martin Jay’s recent Songs of Experience); on theories of affect, boredom, and expressivity (Charles Altieri’s The Particulars of Rapture, Sianne Ngai’s Ugly Feelings, Patricia Meyer Spacks’s Boredom, or Elizabeth Goodstein’s Experience without Qualities); on attempts to materialize aesthetic modernity and uncover the everydayness of the modern (Miriam Hansen’s influential work on “vernacular modernisms”); and especially work on modernity’s host of related transcendent outsides: spiritualism, anthropological magic, secular (and technological) enchantments, etc. I’m thinking here of Helen Sword’s Ghostwriting Modernism, Michael Taussig’s Mimesis and Alterity (Taussig does make brief appearance in the final chapter), Birgit Meyer and Peter Pels’s Magic and Modernity, or Simon During’s Modern Enchantments. Finally, given Boon’s sympathy for the quintessentially modern desire for transcendence, and his explicit “call for a proliferation of alternative methods of obtaining gnosis,” more attention might have been paid to the specific political horizons that have historically given rise to and constrained the moderns various attempts to imagine its transcendent outsides (86). How might the position of drugs and other transcendent “hybrids” on the map of Latour’s modern constitution be shifting in our post-9/11 climate; put another way, who needs opium when you’ve got Jesus or Allah? If never quite intoxicating, Boon’s important, lively, and well-researched study is consistently stimulating. In fact, the book proves that the best cultural histories–and The Road of Excess is surely that–are rather like stimulants, charging their users with renewed energy and clarity, and later leaving them with the sense that, after the rush and the inevitable letdown, there is still more work to be done.

     

  • Counter-Networks in a Network Society: Leslie Marmon Silko’s Almanac of the Dead

    Laura Shackelford

    Department of English
    Indiana University, Bloomington
    lshackel@indiana.edu

     

    The proliferation of critical work on the networking logics that underwrite capitalism’s global restructuring suggests, quite mistakenly, that capitalism’s rearticulation of the spaces of the world to suit it is something new. Working immediately prior to these shifts, Henri Lefebvre, in The Production of Space, had already developed his account of capitalism’s “social space” as a dynamic “matrix of social action” that, in addition to providing an infrastructure or backdrop for social relations, is itself the medium of material practices within which social relationships are realized (Brenner 141). While not completely novel, these dramatic spatial transformations have led to a “general revivial of interest in geographical knowledges” in social theory because, as David Harvey suggests, “from such a perspective, in which history and dynamics cannot be evaded, geographical knowledges turn out not to be so banal as they seem” (299, 300). This critical turn to render the “dead spatiality” of geographical knowledges dynamic, as “active aspects or ‘moments’ in social processes,” though, is just the beginning of serious inquiry into “geographical praxis” as “a vital aspect of power and an object of political and social struggle” (Harvey, “Cosmopolitanism” 299, 300, 296). Thinking through the social production of space, and the power of social space in turn, to shape social relations, theorists grappling with these shifts typically differentiate global capitalist social spaces and their dynamic, flexible, deterritorializing logics from the preexisting, territorial, place-based social spaces that paved the way for industrial capitalism and its modern socio-spatial configurations. The network serves as the privileged sign of this difference. Yet the very visibility of capitalism’s restructuring, the ubiquity and apparent novelty of the spatial logic of its information networks, hides remarkable continuities between emergent, networking logics and these divergent, though co-implicated social spaces. In reading the spatial logic of networks as a sign of postmodernity’s difference from modernity, as the distinguishing feature of a post-Fordist as opposed to a Fordist economy, theorists such as sociologist Manuel Castells, Lefebvre’s one-time student, establish a set of rigid oppositions between the spatial logic of networks and the spatial logics structuring modernity, leading them to overlook and underestimate continuities, even collaboration, in their functioning.1

     

    This essay redirects Castells’s exacting account of the networking logics informing the global information economy, opening up a line of inquiry into the present co-articulation and co-implication of the emergent spatial logic of networks and existing modern spatial formations such as the nation-state. This reading reveals, in particular, their shared implication in colonialist, neo-colonialist, and imperialist spatial practices, and it also identifies significant differences between these social spaces and discrepancies in their spatial logics that enable a thoroughgoing, strategic rethinking of these socio-spatial practices and the Euro-American epistemologies they further. Most remarkably, global capitalist networks’ emphasis on simultaneous global spatial connections has led to the breakdown of the three worlds system and its temporal differentiation of the spaces of the world. Although this shift signals an increasingly fine segmentation and differentiation of the “markets” of the world, in undermining this crucial support for the colonial difference and acknowledging the presence of a variety of subalterns in the progressive present of modernity, global capitalist social spaces unwittingly provide new opportunities for resistance. These emergent social spaces facilitate critical rearticulations of hegemonic discourses and socio-spatial formations from the perspective of people in subaltern positions, what Walter D. Mignolo describes as “border thinking.”

     

    Leslie Marmon Silko’s Almanac of the Dead (1991) rethinks the reciprocity of social and spatial formations to develop a transformative politics of counter-networks. Almanac of the Dead exploits the discontinuities between the deterritorializing logic of global capitalist networks and modernity’s territorially bounded political and economic forms to interrogate the historically specific spatiality of social relations. Reasserting both the spatial and temporal dimensions to social space in its spatio-temporal mapping of the Americas, Almanac of the Dead critiques global capitalism’s “networking logic,” a logic that privileges the spatial dimension of social relations with its synchronous, “timeless time.”2 It situates and implicates these networks within a five hundred year system of colonial and imperial expansion. Subjecting global capitalist networks to its own networking logic, the novel attempts to reverse the former’s suppression of historical time. It does so symbolically, on the level of its representational space, while also developing an analogous model of transnational, subaltern political resistance that links this rethinking of the spatial and temporal dimensions of social practices to more material modes of resistance. The novel’s rethinking of networks, at both levels, exploits the reciprocity between social and spatial formations, their “intercontingency,” underscoring the fact that the spatiality of social relations is “simultaneously contingent and conditioning,” both “an outcome and a medium for the making of history,” as Edward Soja writes (58). Highlighting the inextricability of the material and symbolic dimensions of both social relations and spatial formations, Almanac of the Dead also insists that as material practices these social relations are limited and refigured by the spatial formations they help to realize. The latter claim is the basis of the strategy of resistance offered by the novel. This transnational, subaltern model of resistance adeptly circumnavigates both a nationalist, essentialized conception of identity as grounded in place and a liberal multicultural identity politics whose wholly commodified, aestheticized identities are generated by global capitalist markets that want precisely the local “style” they eradicate.3

     

    Despite the novel’s concerted rethinking of social space and politics in the age of global capital, it is frequently (mis)read as a reactionary assertion of an ethnonationalist, place-bound, identitarian politics unaware of the workings of global capital (and the latter’s part in generating precisely such strains of localism). Such readings, a byproduct of strict adherence to the theoretical opposition between the space of modern political forms and global capitalism’s networking logics, forestall much-needed inquiry into divergent, competing geographical practices that might redescribe and redeploy these social spaces, as Almanac of the Dead attempts to do, to craft a genuinely transformative politics of networks.

     

    Refiguring the Network

     

    In The Rise of the Network Society, the first of a three volume work on The Information Age: Economy, Society, and Culture, sociologist Manuel Castells connects the global restructuring of capitalism in the late 1970s and early 1980s to new informational technologies that provide the “material, technological basis of economic activity and social organization” (Network 14). Castells proposes that the interdependence of economies throughout the world has introduced “a new form of relationship between economy, state, and society, in a system of variable geometry” (1). He attributes these reconfigurations to the “informational” mode of development enabled by new technologies, which is transforming the material basis of our experience and reforming it according to the spatial logic of its information networks. Castells characterizes the present moment in terms of a series of interdependencies and confrontations between this emergent spatial logic–the “space of flows”–and the existing spatial logic of territorially bounded political and cultural forms–the “space of places.” Importantly, the “space of flows” is defined as a social space, as “the material organization of time-sharing social practices that work through flows,” not simply as an abstract logic or a solely physical space (442). The “space of places,” likewise, describes material organization of social practices though it designates social practices whose “form, function, and meaning are self-contained within the boundaries of physical contiguity,” historically rooted to a particular, meaningful locale (453).

     

    Castells explains that the dominant spatial logic, the “space of flows,” supercedes the “space of places” by disembedding and reintegrating historically specific territories and social actors into a functional network. As the figure of the network suggests, the “space of flows” establishes dynamic relations between these places, places that are abstracted from their former, historical and geographical meaning and redefined in terms of their position and function within this instrumental network. By deterritorializing places and reterritorializing them according to its own functional logic, the “space of flows” ensures its flexibility and adaptability. It exploits the specific resources of any one node or site and simultaneously renders that node, in its very specificity, secondary to the network’s organization; any specific site can be replaced by another equally capable of fulfilling this function. For this reason, the “space of flows is not placeless, although its structural logic is” (443). Due to the flexibility of its networks, which depend on the heightened mobility of new communications technologies, the “space of flows” surpasses previous limits imposed by geographic distance. It surpasses territorial limits in another, more important respect in that its networks supercede “territorially-based institutions of society,” the mechanisms of social control that might impede its circulation of capital, information, and technologies (“Informational City” 349).

     

    Castells argues that these flows of capital, information, technology, images, sounds, and symbols are “the expression of processes dominating our economic, political, and symbolic life” (Network 442). Yet he must acknowledge that while the “space of flows” expresses the dominant spatial logic of a global economy, this economy “does not embrace all economic processes in the planet, it does not include all territories, and it does not include all people in its workings, although it does affect directly or indirectly the livelihood of all humankind” (132). All economic and social processes are influenced by, and relate to, the “structurally dominant logic of such an economy,” but the globalization realized through the “space of flows” has been highly selective not only in its strategic inclusion and exclusion of places, but also in the very nature of its engagement of these places (135). Those places lucky enough to be worth exploiting, as Castells describes their double-edged status, suffer the consequences of a loss of their “cultural, historical, geographic meaning” as they are reintegrated into global, functional networks (406). The economic system’s “highly dynamic, highly selective, highly exclusionary” incorporation of certain localities reinforces a “fundamental asymmetry” between developed and developing countries, allowing its key sites and an elite managerial class to reap the benefits and share the mobility of its information, capital, and other resources at the expense of those excluded from its networks (134-35). According to Castells, it is the “structural schizophrenia” between these opposing spatial logics that must be addressed (“Informational City” 352). He advocates reconstructing “an alternative space of flows on the basis of the space of places,” which might “avoid the deconstruction of . . . locales by the placeless logic of flows-based organizations” and, thereby, reverse the social, cultural, and political polarization resulting from these opposing spatial logics (“Informational City” 352-53).

     

    It is possible to read Castells’s work against the grain of its explicit aim, one of establishing and reckoning with the difference between the “space of flows” and the “space of places.” Taking into account the efficacy of the “space of flows” in extending and elaborating on existing patterns of domination and forms of dependency, the discontinuities between these spatial logics and the novelty of the networks that sustain the “space of flows” are quickly diminished. Their “variable geometry” enables a heightened sensitivity in the processes they use to differentiate the world’s economies, resources, and labor, which means that the apparent flexibility, fluidity, and open-ended mutability of these networks functions in the service of increasing segmentation and differentiation. As Castells notes:

     

    on the one hand, valuable segments of territories and people are linked in the global networks of value making and wealth appropriation. On the other hand, everything, and everyone, which does not have value, according to what is valued in the networks, or ceases to have value, is switched off the networks, and ultimately discarded. (134)

     

    If, as he suggests, their “variable geometry” exacerbates and extends existing logics and practices of economic segmentation, endowing them with unprecedented flexibility, then under closer scrutiny the continuities between the social spaces of the “space of places” and the “space of flows” may very well outweigh the discontinuities.

     

    Castells’s acknowledgement of, and engagement with, the interrelations between these spatial logics is valuable, though frequently overshadowed by his emphasis on their differences. It counters accounts of globalization that focus on global capitalism’s deterritorializing, abstracting, and homogenizing tendencies and that credit the latter’s networks with the wholesale destruction of territorial forms such as the nation-state. Arguing that the deterritorialized relations realized within the “space of flows” may supercede the “space of places,” but that their proliferation does not mark the end of territorially based relations within the “space of places,” Castells’s work is motivated and informed by the partiality of, and by numerous inconsistencies surrounding, the purported break between these spatio-temporal logics. Castells notes, for instance, that “most production, employment, and firms are, and will remain, local and regional,” and there is much evidence to suggest that global capitalism profits from precisely such a discrepancy between increasingly global flows of capital and unskilled labor forces that are “restricted by national barriers” (Network 101, 131). Such interdependencies point to the possibility that the discontinuities between the spatial logic of the “space of places” and the “space of flows” may be integral to the functioning of global capitalist networks.

     

    An End to the Modern World System?

     

    The “complex interaction” between increasingly global economic circuits and territorially based, historically rooted political institutions is evident in the shifting relation between global capitalism and the nation-state. Nation-states have proven their resilience and reconfigurability in adapting to global capitalism’s flow-based spatial logic without relinquishing their territorial frame. The problematic refiguration of social and political forms familiar to the “space of places” in relation to global capitalism’s “space of flows,” such as the G.W. Bush administration’s reimagining and repurposing of a nationalist model of territorially-based political claims in the United States since the September 11th attacks, complicate and compromise easy opposition between these social spaces. The “increasing disjunction between a triumphant, global capitalism and all systems of governance including those that had supported globalization,” which Mohammed A. Bamyeh attributes to a decoupling of the economic and the political in his essay on “The New Imperialism: Six Theses,” has not interrupted the functioning of nation-states (11).4 Bamyeh stresses that rather than signaling the “end of politics,” the result has been “a political field increasingly typified by symbolic posturing, since the state is no longer expected to offer its constituents any tangible benefits” (16).

     

    This shift has had consequences for the meaning of nation-states, however. As Bamyeh stresses,

     

    in an age of complex global networks through which “interests” of all kinds are exchanged, the idea of solidarity has no natural reference point in territoriality. And it is fundamentally territoriality that has provided the existential basis for the modern expression of nationality and, subsequently, for its embodiment in statehood. More importantly, however, the internal decline of the ability of the state to shield all of its constituents from the impact of global forces becomes a ground for the rediscovery that in any complex society, the state can only be either a battleground of various special interests, if it were to be truly pluralist, or little more than a representative of one of those interests against the others, if not. (11-12)

     

    These discrepancies between nation-states’ political rhetoric and their economic practices have not gone unnoticed even if the United States and other nation-states continue to invoke various forms of symbolic and territorial sovereignty.

     

    One of the key differences between the current global economy and a world economy that has been in place since the sixteenth century is that the former’s “core components have the institutional, organizational, and technological capacity to work as a unit in real time, or in chosen time, on a planetary scale” (Network 102). “Globally integrated financial markets working in real time for the first time in history” are, Castells stresses, “the backbone of the new global economy” (102, 106). Although this is just one manifestation of the social space global capitalist networks realize, it foregrounds the challenge this spatial logic poses to a modern world system that has organized languages, peoples, and cultures in a “chronological hierarchy,” as Mignolo argues (“Globalization” 35). The modern world system projected time onto space, arranging “cultural differences in a time frame having the European idea of civilization and Western Europe as a point of arrival” (36). By temporalizing difference, these geopolitical mappings of the world established the colonial difference that served to legitimate modernity and, in particular, the economic expansion carried out under the thin cover of its “civilizing” mission.

     

    One of the most conspicuous effects of global capitalism has been the dismantling of the latest geopolitical attempt to project time onto space–the Bretton Woods treaties’ division of the world into first, second, and third worlds at the end of World War II, a temporal differentiation of the spaces of the world that located much of the planet in a social space anterior to modernity. Whereas the end of the Cold War and the “triumph” of capitalism unmoored the ideological underpinnings of this tripartite division, capitalism’s restructuring has “imploded the Three Worlds into one another,” collapsing them into “an increasingly smooth and planar world-space of accumulation” (Dyer-Witheford 134). The collapse of the three-worlds system has dire consequences, as chronicled by Nick Dyer-Witheford in Cyber-Marx: Cycles and Circuits of Struggle in High-Technology Capitalism. Frequently described as the “Third-Worlding of the First World” and the “First-Worlding of the Third World,” this shift signals global capitalism’s dismantling of the economic and geopolitical distinctions between the three worlds in favor of more precise and more variable networks of economic exploitation. It introduces “into the metropolis levels of insecurity and destitution previously relegated to the peripheries of capitalist world economy” and simultaneously exploits the “immiserated labor of the periphery” in order to create “various growth sites [among] the newly industrializing countries and other development zones” (134).5 “Affluence or abysmal misery . . . can be visited on any point in the planet according to the movement of corporate investment” (134).

     

    The collapse of the three-worlds system, thus, reveals a supercession of temporal distinctions between national spaces in favor of a more precise and exacting segmentation of the world’s economies and populations. It also, though, brings those societies formerly situated outside the progressive time of modernity into the present. Reading this shift as a critical opportunity, Mignolo suggests that by “creating the conditions to think spatially rather than chronologically,” globalization “brings to the foreground the fact that there are no people in the present living in the past,” and unintentionally facilitates “the intellectual task of denying the ‘denial of coevalness’ . . . in the conceptualization of the civilizing process as one to which the entire humanity contributed and is contributing” (“Globalization” 37). In his view, the dismantling of the modern world system and the collapse of its temporal distinctions between spaces facilitates confrontations between different epistemologies. This “border thinking” involves a “recognition and transformation of the hegemonic imaginary from the perspectives of people in subaltern positions” (Mignolo, “Many Faces of Cosmo-polis” 736-37).

     

    Reconceptualizing Geopolitical Space

     

    Leslie Marmon Silko’s Almanac of the Dead practices a strain of “border thinking” in its strategic rereading of global capitalist networks. Foregrounding the continuities between colonialist and imperialist practices of spatial and cultural de- and rearticulation furthered by the “space of places” and “the space of flows,” Almanac of the Dead exploits global capitalism’s recent transformation of social spaces. It develops new modes of critique and resistance that circumvent the former’s highly variable and flexible means of reconsolidating familiar structural inequities. Taking advantage of the challenges global capitalism poses to the social, political, and territorial form of the nation-state, the novel rethinks the relations between social and spatial formations. Its scrutiny of social space refuses both the ideological link between people and places consolidated in relation to the nation-state (which functions to naturalize systems of economic and political hegemony in the modern world system) and global capitalism’s abstraction of social relations. The novel’s counter-logic of networks, instead, practices what Ranajit Guha of the Subaltern Studies Group describes as a “writing in reverse” that is “inscribed in elite discourse” (Elementary Aspects 333). By inverting hegemonic knowledges, or “writing in reverse,” John Beverley stresses, “the subaltern represents the dominant subject to itself, and thus unsettles that subject in the form of a negation or displacement” (26). This is a practice that is interested, as is subaltern studies, in both “retrieving the presence of a subaltern subject and deconstructing the discourses that constitute the subaltern as such” (Beverley 135). Understood as a “writing in reverse,” the novel’s rereading of hegemonic discourses and rearticulation of hegemonic socio-spatial formations gains visibility as both a demand for economic, political, and social recognition and an ingenious critique of the very social, political, and economic terms within which that recognition and the rights that accompany it are imagined and, historically, withheld. The latter critique allows Almanac of the Dead to anatomize and navigate the global capitalist dynamics that, otherwise, fuel wholly reactionary assertion of local, place-based identities, what Samir Amin decries as “culturalist” social movements based on essentialized, transhistorical cultural and/or ethnic identities (165).

     

    Almanac of the Dead seizes the increasingly visible discrepancies between geopolitical spaces and social formations in the Americas as an opportunity to discover the historical erasures the modern world system requires when it understands the social as isomorphic with, and grounded in, the territorial space of the nation-state. Global capitalist networks unwittingly acknowledge these erasures due to their dismantling of the formerly naturalized relation between the social and territorial space of the nation-state. In the novel, “El Grupo Gun Club,” a conglomerate of politicians, judges, governors, military and ex-military, a former ambassador, friends of the CIA, and police chiefs on both sides of the U.S./Mexico border give evidence of the flow-based logic of global capitalist networks. In their limitless search for profit, they disregard the territorial and political distinctions between nation-states. Considering themselves to be “chief executives of the future,” these representatives of the state circulate money and cocaine North into Tucson where they invest in real estate and exchange the drugs for arms and military aircraft (292). The latter are used to stifle “political unrest” that might interfere with their business interests throughout the Americas (292). Menardo, whose company, Universal Insurance, amasses a private security force that is placed at the disposal of the group’s business interests acknowledges that “politics had no place in their common cause, which was survival, whatever their minor political differences” (329).

     

    The corruption of these figures of the state flags the inextricability of national political interests and economic interests, locating both within a longstanding tradition of U.S. imperialism. Global capitalist flows may striate the geopolitical space of the nation-state, the novel suggests, but such processes of segmentation actually perpetuate, rather than pose a challenge to, the privilege accorded to these figures of the state. El Grupo Gun Club’s members are, in several important respects, no different from the “speculators, confidence men, embezzlers, lawyers, judges, police and other criminals as well as addicts and pushers” that have made Tucson their home since the “1880’s and the Apache Wars” (Almanac 15). The activities of “El Grupo Gun Club” also, though, mark the discrepancies between the socio-economic relations furthered by global capitalist networks and the geopolitical space of the nation-state. Like global capitalism’s transnational networks, the activities of “El Grupo Gun Club” highlight the formative power of social relations to de- and rearticulate the spaces of the world in terms that facilitate these exchanges. These social networks are, therefore, the basis of the novel’s interrogation of the production of social spaces and of the role these socio-spatial formations, and the understandings of space they rely on, play in consolidating hegemonic social and economic relations.

     

    Almanac of the Dead‘s table of contents provides the first evidence of its strategic rethinking of the geopolitical space of the Americas as a means of challenging the social relations that these hegemonic spatial formations secure. The titles of the first four of six sections refer to geopolitical spaces–The United States of America, Mexico, Africa, and the Americas–that, rather than serving as the setting or backdrop for the narrative’s temporal development, as section titles, assume the status of the narrative’s content, instead. Deploying place names as section and book titles, taking these places as its subject, rather than taking them for granted as its setting, the novel foregrounds its engagement with geopolitical spaces as one designed to grapple with the production of these spaces, questioning the transparency they assume when considered to be stable and, therefore, innocuous territorial designations.6 The abstraction of space from time has functioned to secure the geopolitical distinctions of the modern world system, to mask the ongoing production of this geopolitical system in and over time. The view of space as stasis, as “fixed and unproblematic in its identity,” which Doreen Massey thoroughly critiques in her groundbreaking work, Space, Place, and Gender, enabled the modern world system to project its own temporal distinctions, with Europe as the point of arrival or present, on the world and, subsequently, to disavow the productive work this mapping entailed (5). The seeming transparency of geopolitical spaces such as the United States, their apparent innocence in designating a geographic territory that preexists that denotation, is revealed to be a product of this and other nation-states’ ability to impose and enforce, to materially and symbolically instantiate, this decidedly social space.

     

    Almanac of the Dead counters this view of space as stasis by providing a spatio-temporal mapping of the Americas. The “Almanac of the Dead Five Hundred Year Map,” which precedes the narrative, foregrounds the novel’s intervention into the opposition between space and time on which this view of space as stasis relies (see Figure 1). Placing Tucson, Arizona at its center, the map superimposes its own mapping of the movements of the characters in the novel and the movements of commodities such as cocaine and military arms on top of the political border between the U.S. and Mexico.7 On the map and within the novel, the movements of characters comprise a mapping of these spaces, materializing a network of social relations that cross-cuts and, in other respects, undermines the primacy of the latter. Far from existing outside the social or existing as a mere backdrop to the social, outside time, these geopolitical spaces are, the map suggests, inextricably tied to the social relations that inform and transform these spaces. The section titles do not correspond to the geographical location of the events figured in them nor do the place names serve to denote a preexisting, geographic space. Instead, these place names introduce sections that chart the movements of characters–their sometimes overlapping trajectories and mutual participation in several key events. These movements call into question the homogeneity, integrity, and coherence of national space and enact an alternative cartography based on competing understandings and complex renegotiations of what the novel reinterprets as social spaces.

     

    Figure 1
    Figure 1: Endpaper Map from Almanac of the Dead by Leslie Marmon Silko
    © 1991 by Leslie Marmon Silko
    Reprinted with the permission of Simon and Schuster Adult Publishing Group
    Click image for larger version.

     

    The “Five Hundred Year Map” recognizes the contributions of social actors in the past as well as the present–of the communities and cultural identities that agents of colonization attempted to erase, but never wholly succeeded in “razing,” to use Mary Pat Brady’s term (13). It attempts to acknowledge and to intervene in the processes of spatial de- and rearticulation, processes of disarticulating communities and cultural identities that Brady identifies in Extinct Lands, Temporal Geographies as the source and target of interrogations into space within much Chicana literature. Arizona, for instance, “began as a mistake. The United States government used a mistake on a map to take what is now southern Arizona from Sonora, Mexico, to abscond with it,” as Brady describes the “willful (mis)recognition” that was strategically deployed to extend the amount of territory ceded to the United States in the Gadsden Purchase of 1856 (13).

     

    Almanac of the Dead‘s “Five Hundred Year Map” turns such a gesture of “willful (mis)recognition” back on itself in order to highlight the productive power of mapping, which it then exploits to reveal the erasures required to produce the United States. The “Five Hundred Year Map” includes references to the Maya, Azteca, and Inca cultures that had “already built great cities and vast networks of roads” before the arrival of the Europeans and the “sixty million Native Americans [who] died between 1500 and 1600” whose “defiance and resistance to all things European continue[s] unabated” (Almanac 14-15). Far from disappearing or surviving as ineffectual legacies, the map suggests that these historical conflicts and contestations continue to inform the present topography of the United States and the social relations that reciprocally (re)construct that topography. The “Five Hundred Year Map” tracks the production of the hegemonic social space of the United States, revealing its apparent closure, integrity, and homogeneity to be the effect of an active disarticulation. Almanac of the Dead, by acknowledging the integral role the histories, places, and people already inhabiting the “new world” have played and still play in the production of the social space of the United States, reviews and reverses the erasures that allow the colonial difference to consolidate the space of the nation-state.

     

    Cutting Off the Power to the Five Hundred Year System and its “Supraterritorial” Flows

     

    Almanac of the Dead, then, foregrounds the productive power of hegemonic social practices by underscoring the erasures necessary to produce the United States. This disrupts the naturalization of these socio-spatial formations by reference to a geographic territory outside time. Its documentation of these erasures also marks the limits to the productive power of global capitalist networks, which are frequently understood to function supraterritorially, to wholly rearticulate the spaces of the world in accordance with their placeless, “variable geometry” (Castells, Network 1).[8] Global capitalism replaces the modern world system’s temporal perspective, which projected a single, progressive temporal continuum on the spaces of the world, with a spatial perspective that privileges space and the instantaneous connections between things at one moment within a single plane of accumulation.[9] It thereby attempts to ground its networks in a social space wholly abstracted from the historical time of the “space of places.” Global capitalism’s spatial view of social relations nevertheless continues to rely, like the modern world system, on an opposition between time and space even if it privileges the latter rather than the former term in this dualism. Almanac of the Dead‘s “Five Hundred Year Map,” which insists, to the contrary, on the inextricability of spatial and temporal dimensions, troubles this spatial view of social relations by insisting that these simultaneous social relations are, in fact, a slice in time within a five hundred year system. Intervening in the dualism between space and time, the novel reveals that, to use Doreen Massey’s apt formulation, “the simultaneity that makes a particular view [emphasis added] of social relations spatial is absolutely not stasis . . . when spatial interconnections are constituted temporally, as well, they can be seen as “a moment in the intersection of configured social relations” (265).

     

    Located within a five hundred year system, global capitalism’s “space of flows” is read as the latest manifestation of a Eurocentric, rational management of the world-system. Tracing the emergence of this five hundred year system to the “discovery, conquest, colonization and integration (subsumption) of Amerindia,” which gave “to Europe, center of the world-system, the definitive comparative advantage with respect to the Muslim, Indian, and Chinese worlds,” as Enrique Dussel does, Almanac of the Dead contests the Eurocentric view that “Europe had exceptional internal characteristics that allowed it to supercede, through its rationality, all other cultures” (5, 3). The novel develops a “planetary” description of modernity that conceptualizes modernity as “the culture of the center of the ‘world system’” rather than as the product of an independent Europe (as in the standard Eurocentric description of modernity) (Dussel 9). This global description foregrounds the economic advantages resulting from (neo)colonial, imperial, and other systematic economic and environmental exploitation, which (continue to) enable global capitalist networks to impose their simplifying abstractions on the world.

     

    This rereading of modernity as informed by, if not wholly reliant on, colonialist and imperialist networks that are global, not simply European, in scope, counters the five hundred year system’s claims to transcend material complexity through a simplifying rationalization of the world.[10] The processes of abstraction that exemplify this five hundred year system, in the novel’s view, simplify and repress, not transcend, their reliance on material complexity. In doing so, they actively disregard and disavow the destructive effects of the five hundred year system’s instrumental logic on the world. Within Almanac of the Dead, this five hundred year system is known as “Reign of the Death-Eye Dog” and “Reign of the Fire-Eye Macaw” because “the sun had begun to burn with a deadly light, and the heat of this burning eye looking down on all the wretched humans and plants and animals had caused the earth to speed up too” (Almanac 258). The “burning eye” references the scientific objectivism at the heart of the Eurocentric management of the world system. Attributing the speeding up of the earth to this rationalizing logic, this passage suggests that the increasing speed of the earth, an effect of the circulation of commodities and people commodified as labor, is a product of the five hundred year system’s objectifying abstractions. These abstractions speed up circulation by reducing the world to a set of general equivalents. The apparent triumph of such processes of abstraction over material complexity, their ability to facilitate exchange and circulation through standardization, is only a triumph if one overlooks the simplification and reduction that the system’s wholly shortsighted, instrumental engagement with the world requires. Calabazas, a Yaqui Indian who operates a smuggling network through Tucson, insists that, in actual fact, the simplifying reductions that define this White, Euro-American epistemology represent “a sort of blindness to the world,” noting that to Europeans, “a ‘rock’ was just a ‘rock’ wherever they found it, despite obvious differences in shape, density, color, or the position of the rock relative to all things around it” (Almanac 225). The problem, in his view, is that “once whites had a name for a thing, they seemed unable ever again to recognize the thing itself” (224).[11]

     

    Calabazas’s critique draws attention to the material complexity that is suppressed and negated when the world is approached only in terms of its uses, uses that are specified in advance by an instrumental logic that, in the name of efficiency, substitutes an abstract value for the “thing itself.” He refuses the unidirectional, wholesale substitutions required by this logic in favor of acknowledging an ongoing, though necessarily selective, spatially and temporally contingent engagement with the “thing itself.” In his view, “there is no such thing” as “identical . . . Nowhere. At no time. All you have to do is stop and think. Stop and take a look” (201). His references to “nowhere” and “at no time” underscore the suppression of the contingencies of space and time required by a capitalist logic of standardization. Abstraction may facilitate a certain kind of circulation, such as that realized by the “space of flows,” but this is a circulation premised on stasis; within the novel, flows that function according to a logic of abstraction are equated with destruction and death, with a “worldwide network of Destroyers who fed off energy released by destruction” (336). Global capitalism’s “space of flows” is, from this vantage, far from new; it is the apogee and end point of the five hundred year system’s logic of abstraction.

     

    In the corner of the “Almanac of the Dead Five Hundred Year Map” there is a “prophecy” that the arrival of Europeans in the Americas was the beginning of a plague that would end in 500 years with “the disappearance of all things European.” The plot of the novel realizes this prophecy, concluding in 1991 (nearly five hundred years after Columbus “discovered” America), at which time the end to the system is imminent, but the outcome unclear. It tracks the movements of its large cast of characters to and from Tucson, movements that ultimately converge into an uprising led by a subaltern coalition of Native Americans and other indigenous peoples, African Americans, Mexicans, Mexican Americans, homeless men, Vietnam veterans, and a Korean American hacker, to “retake the land that has been stolen from them” (632). The subalterns that comprise this coalition, in spite of the specificity of their respective experiences, share the experience of colonization, what Eva Cherniavsky describes in an article that locates “Subaltern Studies in a U.S. Frame” as America’s “systematic displacement of indigenous peoples and non-white labor” (86). The colonial difference situates these subalterns outside the symbolic space of the United States while exploiting them as a source of cheap labor, disavowing their constitutive role in constructing, materially and symbolically, the spaces of the United States. To the extent that global capitalism resituates these subalterns, Almanac of the Dead suggests that this is equally to misrecognize them in that significant historical and epistemological differences survive these spatial transformations.

     

    It is by exploiting their misrecognition–a fortuitous product of White Euro-Americans’ “blindness to the world”–that the novel’s subalterns eventually confront the five hundred year system with the consequences of its repression of material complexity: “the ecological destruction of the planet,” “the destruction of humanity itself by poverty,” and “the impossibility of the subsumption of populations, economies, nations, and cultures that it has been attacking since its origin and has excluded from its horizon and cornered into poverty” (Dussel 19-21). Fully aware that “any attempt to stabilize a positional identity–of nationality, class, gender, race, or ethnicity–feeds into the logic of globalization itself, and that therefore resistance must take the form of a constant deconstruction of power relations,” the novel’s emphasis on the subalterns’ misrecognition cites and circumnavigates a liberal multicultural model of identity politics (Beverley 142). A thoroughly commodified “International Holistic Healers Convention” at which several characters conform to stereotypical roles as indigenous “healers” and “spiritualists” serves the subalterns as a source of revenue and a cover. The novel’s key protagonists all attend the convention, which provides commodified “tribal” wares to White, New Age yuppies. Lecha and Zeta, Yaqui Indian mixed blood twin sisters born in Sonora, Mexico and now living outside Phoenix redirect their revenues from these economic networks to support their own covert political project. On the sly, they develop a distinctly subaltern mode of resistance that, rather than asserting a single, stable, positive cultural or racial identity (which clearly falls prey to the convention’s politically defunct commodification of historical experience and aestheticization of identity) centers on the shared subordinate status of subjects from a variety of disenfranchised social groups. Linking multiple, divergent forms of disenfranchisement, the novel engages subalternity as a structural category to encompass “the general attribute of subordination . . . whether this is expressed in terms of class, age, gender, or office, or in any other way,” rather than as the basis for an identity politics (Guha, “Preface” 35). Its conception of “tribal subalternity” urges a reconsideration of “identificatory practices on the left and on the right,” as Cherniavsky stresses in her adept reading of the qualifications Almanac of the Dead makes to the current project(s) of whiteness studies (“Tribalism” 113).

     

    As the novel nears its conclusion, these tribal subalterns join forces with an “Army of the poor and homeless” and ecoterrorists to bomb a dam and, thereby, to cut off the supply of electrical power that sustains the economic and political infrastructure of the Southwestern United States (Almanac 424). In the words of Awa Gee, the Korean-American hacker who infiltrates the information networks to accomplish the shutdown, the government “had become deluded about their power. Because the giants were endlessly vulnerable, from their air traffic control systems to their interstate power-transmission lines. Turn off the lights and see what they’d do” (683). This act highlights the wholesale disavowal that allows the information economy’s networks to be described as supraterritorial.[12] It also marks Almanac of the Dead‘s rethinking of social and material networks as modes of channeling energy. This rethinking of networks intervenes in the logics made operational by global capitalist networks and their “space of flows” by juxtaposing and subjecting the former flows to a networking logic that, to the contrary, acknowledges and exploits the reciprocity between spatial and social formations instead of attempting to abstract social relations from particular places altogether. It also, more importantly, enlists the logic of networks in the service of developing new modes of political resistance that acknowledge and exploit the reciprocity between the social and the spatial, drawing on the social construction of the spatial and the spatial construction of the social in time as a resource for a transformative politics.

     

    Dead Spaces Revisited

     

    Insisting on the reciprocity between the social and the spatial, Almanac of the Dead enlists the spatial and, importantly, that which has been disarticulated through its alignment with the spatial in the service of transforming existing social relations. Reading global capitalist networks and the European epistemologies on which they rely as embodying a networking logic predicated on stasis or death, the novel rejects the logic of stasis to which the spatial has been assigned in order to contest the spatializations that have served to confine “premodern” Native American and other indigenous cultures and people, as well as the natural world, within the realm of the dead. These spatializations, in projecting indigenous subalterns into a space outside historical time, consign them to a similar status as material resource for, an object of, or static backdrop to, the progressive time of modernity. The sections titled “Tundra Spirits” and “Eskimo Television” focus on a group of Yupik townspeople in Bethel, Alaska who gather in “the village meeting hall where government experiments with satellites had brought the people old movies and broadcasts from the University of Alaska” (151). While marking the Yupik Eskimos’ positioning as an audience to, or object of, transmissions enabled by government experiments–weather broadcasts and programs such as “Love, American Style”–these sections introduce an old Yupik woman and her younger accomplice, Rose, who have “realized the possibilities in the white man’s gadgets” (155). As the television screen flashes “satellite weather maps one after another,” the old woman slides her finger across the glass, gathering

     

    great surges of energy out of the atmosphere, by summoning spirit beings through recitations of the stories that were also indictments of the greedy destroyers of the land. With the stories the old woman was able to assemble powerful forces flowing from the spirits of the ancestors. (156)

     

    Using “natural electricity. Fields of forces,” her “plane-crashing spell” scrambles the magnetic compasses on petroleum exploration companies’ planes and causes them to crash (155-6). Whereas “white people could fly circling objects in the sky that sent messages and images of nightmares and dreams . . . the old woman knew how to turn the destruction back on its senders” (156).

     

    Figuring a genuinely interactive television, “Eskimo Television” refuses the positioning of the Yupik Eskimos as a passive audience or object of these transmissions and the analogous objectification of the Alaskan tundra, which is described by an insurance adjuster working for the petroleum companies as “frozen wastes” with “no life,” “nothing of value except what might be under the crust of snow and earth”–“oil, gas, uranium, and gold” (159). The narrator’s reference to “circling objects in the sky” invokes the speculators’ planes, the communications satellites, the satellite weather maps, and, more poignantly, the deterritorializing logic of abstraction that works to instrumentalize the spaces of the world. The old Yupik woman’s “plane crashing spell” challenges this logic of abstraction by highlighting the “circling objects’” reliance on electromagnetic energy. This episode intimates playfully that satellite transmissions, as material flows, cannot be controlled, cancelled, or reduced to mere objects or means to an end. More seriously, it suggests that these material transmissions, always exceeding their instrumentalization, retain the power to transform the former instrumental networks, to reciprocally “turn the destruction back on its senders” with consequences unforeseen and unintended by the “subjects” wielding these technologies. Realizing that White Euro-Americans’ technologies of abstraction are not immaterial, and realizing possibilities in their materiality unrealized by these instrumental capitalist flows, the old Yupik woman can be understood to redirect the electromagnetic waves on which these abstracting technologies continue to rely. She remediates them according to an understanding of materiality that draws from the “tundra spirits,” from Yupik knowledges and historical experience, as well as from the socio-spatial relations they perpetuate. Although the precise medium in which the Yupik woman stages this epistemological, electromagnetic resistance remains ambiguous, at the core of this episode is a method, developed more fully elsewhere in the novel, that aligns the Yupik woman with the “emergent powers” of the spatial, which she exploits to cross-purposes (Massey 268).

     

    Reimagining global capitalist techno-economic networks as means of channeling energy, Almanac of the Dead focuses critical attention onto the reciprocity between social relations and spatial formations. Spatial formations are not mere “outcomes” or “the endpoint” of social relations with “no material effect” because the social is spatially constructed too, which means that spatial formations, as Massey argues, can have “unexpected consequences,” and “effects on subsequent events that alter the future course of the very histories which have produced” them (266, 268).

     

    Socio-Spatial Networks

     

    The political consequence of this insistence on the co-implication of the social and the spatial (and the related refusal to sever their shared, simultaneously symbolic and material, dimensions) is rendered more tangible by the “almanac of the dead” that the novel both doubles and figures. The “almanac of the dead” encapsulates and elaborates the logics informing the novel’s subaltern politics of networks. The “almanac of the dead” is a notebook of writings and glyphs containing the stories of all “the days and years” of the tribes of the Americas. Journeying North with four young Indian slaves fleeing European slavery, this “bundle of pages and scraps of paper with notes in Latin and Spanish” eventually makes its way to Lecha and Zeta’s grandmother, old Yoeme, who left it in their care (134). The circulation of the ancient almanac, its spatio-temporal movement, underscores its role in enacting a network of social relations. Importantly, the almanac’s journeying evidences a logic of flows or exchange that is premised on the mutual transformation of the almanac and the social relations it embeds rather than a circulation premised on the stability of the almanac. The almanac bears witness to its material and figurative transformation as a result of these spatio-temporal movements. It is torn, illegible in places, there are “notes scribbled on the sides,” and “whole sections had been stolen from other books and from the proliferation of ‘farmer’s almanacs’ published by patent drug companies” (570). Also, “there was evidence that substantial portions of the original manuscript had been lost or condensed into odd narratives which operated like codes” (569). The narratives act as codes that must be transcribed by Lecha and Zeta who are typing the pages of the almanac into a computer. This transcription is a process of transformation. Adding the first entry in English and a number of highly idiosyncratic personal notes, Lecha reinterprets the almanac from her own perspective and, thereby, transforms the almanac or, more precisely, resituates it in the present just as she rematerializes the almanac by typing it into the computer.

     

    This process of transcription is imagined as a means of channeling energy and explicitly likened to Lecha’s abilities as a psychic. Originally believing that the power she had to locate the bodies of the dead, abilities she exploits with great success on the television talk show circuit, is as an “intermediary,” Lecha soon realizes that “the concept of intermediary and messenger was too simple” (142). She cannot “cut off the channel” of the flows of energy that link her to the dead, yet she is not a mere medium, either (138). When a cable-television producer’s girlfriend enlists Lecha to exact revenge against her former lover, she begins

     

    to see patterns in the lives of the cinematographer and his immediate family. Their lives were ‘stories-in-progress,’ as Lecha saw them, and . . . she would realize possible deadly turns the lives of the cinematographer and his close relatives might naturally take. (143-34)

     

    Identifying patterns in their lives, like transcribing the “codes” in the almanac, connects Lecha to flows that precede her in a relation that allows, if not requires, that she reinterpret these symbolic and material energies, that she, like the old Yupik woman, realize the possibilities in them. Lecha notes that her grandmother, old Yoeme, and others believed that the almanac had a “living power within it, a power that would bring all the tribal people of the Americas together to retake the land” (569). The almanac is alive in that it relies on, draws from, and extends the networks of socio-spatial relations that it materially instantiates and also, therefore, refigures. “Those old almanacs,” Lecha insists, “don’t just tell you when to plant or harvest, they tell you about the days to come–drought or flood, plague, civil war or invasion . . . Once the notebooks are transcribed, I will figure out how to use the old almanac. Then we will foresee the months and years to come–everything” (137). The almanac serves as the basis of Lecha and Zeta’s interpretation of the past, which enables their construction of a future that is, as the Five Hundred Year Map suggests, “encoded in arcane symbols and old narratives” (14). Described as “an analogue for the actual experience, which no longer exists; a mosaic of memory and imagination,” narrative within Almanac of the Dead is conceptualized as a temporal network, as a means to actively instantiate a relationship between the past and the present. Once narrativized, the past is a combination of “imagination” and “memory” and is, therefore, alive (574).

     

    Imagined as an ongoing process of transcription in Almanac of the Dead, narrative is understood as a process of reinterpreting and re-embedding these stories, a spatial as well as temporal resituating that draws from an existing representational space, but also transforms that space and thus changes the stories. It is a process that is enabled as well as constrained by the materiality of the almanac. Reimagining narrative as a means of channeling energy spatio-temporally, as a socio-spatial network that produces an understanding of spaces and materially instantiates the epistemologies and spatial relations it figures on the level of its representational space, “the almanac of the dead” marks the “shaping force of narrative in the production of space” and the “spatiality of discourse,” the fact that representational spaces are key to the production of an understanding of space in that they evidence, embody, and enact materially the epistemologies and spatial relations they figure (Brady 8). The pages of the almanac are believed to hold “many forces within them, countless physical and spiritual properties to guide the people and make them strong” (252, emphasis added).[13] Modeled on three surviving Mayan codices, the almanac’s spatial form operationalizes its spatial and temporal dimensions equally. Described as “loose squares of the old manuscript” bundled together with pages of notes, the unbound pages of the almanac function as a multiplicity of spaces that are not subjugated to a single chronology or temporal progression. Acknowledging a multiplicity of spaces, the almanac’s spatial form does not subjugate the spatiality of the text to a universalized, abstract, figurative meaning. Yet its spatial form does not solidify these spaces as absolute locations and, thus, disavow their temporality, either. Conceptualized as fragments situated within a larger network of relations, rather than as self-contained spaces, each page’s meaning is a product of spatial relations that change as the almanac is transcribed and reinterpreted. The almanac’s “variable geometry” operates, in other words, according to a logic of recombination or transcription that is constrained and enabled by the existing spaces, by the material existence of the pages. Yoeme tells Lecha and Zeta that “nothing must be added [to the almanac] that was not already there. Only repairs are allowed” (129), which seems a blatant contradiction when we find out Yoeme included an account of her survival of the Influenza epidemic of 1918 within the almanac’s pages. Yet her insistence on “repairs only” foregrounds the almanac’s logic of transcription, which requires that one draw from, rather than simply add on to, the existing pages.

     

    As a process of transcription, the almanac’s transformation is predicated on a material and a figurative recombination, which extends and transforms the almanac’s networks spatially as well as temporally. Intervening in an instrumental logic of representation and linking this logic to a spatial politics that has been central to European hegemony, the almanac’s networking logic reimagines representational spaces in a dynamic, transformative relation to the social relations they reconceive and reconsolidate.[14] The transformative relation between the almanac’s figurative meaning and its spatial form recapitulates Lecha’s transformative relation to the almanac as a representational space and, most importantly, both of these relations parallel the novel’s transformative understanding of the relation between social spaces and the social relations these spaces inform and help to instantiate.

     

    A Transformative Politics of Networks

     

    Almanac of the Dead envisions social networks, like the ones resolidified by the circulation of the almanac of the dead, to be spatio-temporally situated and materially embedded, but not determined. Acknowledging a “simultaneous multiplicity of spaces: cross-cutting, intersecting, aligning with one another or existing in relations of paradox or antagonism,” Almanac of the Dead offers a view of social relations as participating within broader networks of socio-spatial formations rather than as being, either spatially or temporally, self-contained (Massey 4). Situated within a broader socio-spatial network, these social relations, like the pages of the almanac, are privy and subject to an ongoing process of recombination and rearticulation. The transformation of social relations is, therefore, envisioned as a process that draws from and reworks existing socio-spatial formations, as a process that is materially enabled and constrained, though not in any sense determined, by its history. This model for a transformative politics of socio-spatial networks refigures the essentialized understanding of the relation between social and spatial formations, people and place, proffered by the nationalist forms of the “space of places.” It also redescribes global capitalism’s attempts to reconstruct that spatiality wholesale in its “space of flows,” its devastating deconstruction of any necessary relation between people and place, which overlooks the constraints that the historicity of the spatial poses to the social. Engaging the “emergent powers” of the spatial, the subalterns in the novel develop a strategy of resistance that, instead, exploits the socio-spatial formations supporting global capitalist networks and their “space of flows” to divergent ends.

     

    The strategies and methods the novel outlines share key similarities with contemporary transnational networks of resistance, the “unexpected currents of opposition” emerging “from the transformed conditions created by transnationalization” (Dyer-Witheford 145). Dyer-Witheford notes that “capital’s very success in creating for itself a worldwide latitude of action is dissolving some of the barriers that separated oppositional movements geographically,” introducing “forms of work, dispossession, and struggle that were previously segregated (145). In addition to these far from desirable commonalities, “capital’s own diffusion of the means of communication has,” “in creating the pathways for its own transnational circuit . . . unintentionally opened the routes for a global contraflow of news, dialogue, controversy, and support between movements in different parts of the planet” (146). The most famous of these strategic redeployments is the Zapatista Army of National Liberation’s 1994 uprising against the Mexican government, which deployed communication s networks such as Peacenet and Usenet to denounce “capitalist globalization as the culmination of a centuries-long dispossession of the people of Chiapas” (158). Silko herself speaks to the connections between her 1991 novel and the Zapatista uprising in 1994, in the essay “An Expression of Profound Gratitude to the Maya Zapatistas, January 1, 1994,” in which she thanks the Zapatistas for realizing, within clear limits, the prophecies in her novel.

     

    In spite of its direct relevance to contemporary political movements, the novel’s transformative politics of networks is frequently misread as envisioning and asserting a reactionary, place-based ethnic identity that relies on a nationalist understanding of identity grounded in place rather than offering a politics of networks that, as I’ve argued, both responds to and renegotiates global capitalist spatial logics. This misreading completely elides the novel’s rethinking of the ongoing, reciprocal relations between social and spatial formations and, in particular, its wholesale refusal to ground social relations, as nationalisms do, by reference to a space outside time. In his most recent book, The Shape of the Signifier, Walter Benn Michaels, for example, reads Silko’s novel as offering a “more or less straightforward ethnonationalism” (24). Michaels’s characterization of Almanac of the Dead as “ethnonationalist” evidences a wholesale refusal to engage with the novel’s reconceptualization of the relation between the social and the spatial, which Almanac of the Dead stages, quite explicitly, in terms of epistemological, not ethnic difference. This move to read the novel and the subaltern political movements it figures back into the terms established by European national forms within the “space of places” enables its wholesale dismissal as an outmoded or reactionary response to the flow-based logics of global capitalism. This reading refuses to register, let alone engage with, the novel’s intervention in the “space of flows,” its rethinking of global capitalism’s networking logic, and the transnational, rather than national, social networks the novel envisions. These social networks are not only transnational, including members living within a variety of nations, they are multi-ethnic, multi-racial, and include members of several social classes as well. Joining forces with an army of the homeless, with Vietnam veterans, and with ecoterrorists, the Native American and other indigenous characters in the novel comprise key nodes in what is explicitly envisioned as a broader subaltern network of resistance to the structural inequities of global capitalism. Its engagement with and rethinking of global capitalism’s networking logic identifies possibilities for constructing “counternetworks [that], while drawing on the technologies and expertise diffused by the world market, reconstruct them into radically new configurations” (Dyer-Witheford 146). In this respect, Almanac of the Dead provides a prescient mapping of emergent modes of resistance within the “space of flows.”

     

    The failure to register the novel’s interrogations into the relation between social and spatial formations is, in large part, a product of a broader failure to question the opposition between the “space of places” and the “space of flows.” This very opposition forecloses a line of inquiry into socio-spatial relations by insisting that the “space of flows” prompts a simple choice between an essentialist, nationalist relation to space or a wholly deterritorialized abstraction of the social from any necessary relation to a particular, meaningful place. Closer inquiry into the complex interrelations between social and spatial formations, such as that offered by Almanac of the Dead, provides a means of recasting this choice so as to refuse global capitalism’s self-description, which, otherwise, functions in the service of its instrumental networks and the ongoing disavowal of their limits. This is absolutely necessary to conceiving, evaluating, and pursuing alternatives to existing nationalisms, to liberal multicultural identity politics, and to the transnationalisms so actively encouraged by global capitalism’s “space of flows.”

     

    Notes

     

    1. In designating global capitalist economic networks as post-Fordist, I am following David Harvey’s reading of contemporary global capitalist strategies of “flexible accumulation”–characterized by a decentralized, mobile spatial organization that endows labor processes, products, markets, and consumption with unprecedented flexibility–as a reaction against the rigidities of Fordism’s hierarchical fragmentation of the spaces of production.

     

    2. The phrase “timeless time” is borrowed from Manuel Castells, who uses it to describe the network society’s fracturing of linear, irreversible, measurable, predictable time through the use of technologies to manage time as a resource, which results in an emphasis on simultaneity and timelessness, an “ever-present” now.

     

    3. In this essay, I use “place” to designate a specific relation to space as a physical locale that is historically and culturally meaningful for its inhabitants due to its distinct physical and symbolic qualities. Within nationalism, an understanding of social space as “place” is often naturalized and the relation is understood to literally inhere in the geographic territory rather than in a socially, culturally, and historically specific relation to that locale. In the latter case, I would argue place and the identity it grounds are essentialized.

     

    4. Arguing in The New Imperialism that the logics of territory and the “open spatial dynamics of endless capital accumulation” can be coupled in a number of ways, resulting in historically unique forms of imperialism, David Harvey updates and extends the questions that Bamyeh raises with regard to the shifting relation between the political and the economic, drawing his own conclusions about the precise character and the consequences of this “new imperialism” (33).

     

    5. The latter tendency is rendered explicit by the World Bank’s redesignation of third world markets as “emerging markets” in 1985.

     

    6. The novel’s attention to the temporality and, thus, historicity of spatial formations foregrounds conflicting conceptions of space. Its rethinking of space in time draws on a tradition of Native Literature that locates itself within the conceptual space of a “fourth world,” as chronicled in Gordon Brotherston’s Book of the Fourth World: Reading the Native Americas through their Literature. The “fourth world” is commonly used to designate and acknowledge the indigenous peoples and cultures that are dearticulated and displaced by a nationalist model, yet the novel complicates this conception of a “fourth world” of Native Literature by articulating it in relation to global capitalism’s “space of flows,” which it designates as “The Fifth World.” In this regard, Almanac of the Dead not only challenges the “particular concept of space as bounded territory” that is naturalized by the “nationalist model dominant in the three-worlds theory,” but also co-implicates the “fourth world” and the “fifth world” in their status as “conceptual spaces,” which, as Tom Foster suggests in his reading of Guillermo Gómez-Peña’s “Five-Worlds Theory,” tend to rethink the boundaries of territorially defined, geopolitical space “in terms of motion, flux, and relationality” (46).

     

    7. The title page notes that Leslie Marmon Silko was residing in Tucson, Arizona at the time of publication. In choosing to locate Tucson at the center of the novel’s spatio-temporal mapping of the Americas, the novel imagines itself as a situated mapping or “local history” in Mignolo’s terms.

     

    8. This reference to global capitalism’s “supraterritorial” flows is intended to flag and to call into question, as this section of the essay does, an ongoing practice of reading global capitalism primarily in terms of an increasing “emancipation from land,” as Richard Rosencrance does, or solely in terms of processes of deterritorialization, as an increasing detachment of social relations from geographical territories.

     

    9. In describing this shift from a temporal to a spatial perspective, I am citing the “spatial turn” associated with global capitalism and postmodernism, which has been described in some detail by theorists such as Fredric Jameson, Edward Soja, David Harvey, and Manuel Castells, as a cultural dominant. I do not mean to suggest that it is either uncontested or unproblematic.

     

    10. References to “material complexity” refer to an inaccessible “outside” or environment to social systems that nevertheless serves as the basis for social systems’ operations, as the concept is theorized by Niklas Luhmann and in related, systems theoretical models. Material complexity is both the essential support for social systems and unapproachable, in its actual complexity, when unmediated by a particular social system’s self-description. Dussel draws on Luhmann’s systems theory in characterizing modernity as involving a “simplification of complexity” (“Beyond Eurocentrism” 13).

     

    11. Calabazas, and the novel more broadly, stage the difference between Euro-American and tribal knowledges as a confrontation between epistemologies rather than presenting tribal knowledges in an “unmediated relation to the world of natural objects” as this reference to the “thing itself” might appear to suggest. Calabazas’s comments point to the difference between material complexity and any social system’s description of or engagement with that material complexity.

     

    12. The electrical blackouts across the Eastern United States and Canada in August 2003, which left 60 million Americans without electricity after a tree fell on a power transmission line in Ohio provide a recent example of the vulnerability of the electrical power networks. The Internet, in spite of its decentralized structure of nodes, explicitly designed to protect the military’s communication infrastructure during a nuclear attack, is also susceptible to major shutdowns according to recent research.

     

    13. The materiality of the almanac is integral, not incidental, to its meaning and to the sustenance it provides, yet it delimits possibilities for an ongoing process of meaning-production rather than determining that meaning. This point is quite clear when the young slave fugitives journeying North with the almanac survive by eating pages of the almanac that are made out of pressed horse stomachs. They draw sustenance from the material form of the almanac, yet the possibility of eating the pages is most likely one not foreseen by the former keepers of the almanac.

     

    14. Involving and crediting the spatial dimensions of the text, equally, with the production of meaning, the almanac refuses to privilege the narrative’s temporal development at the expense of its material, spatial form. Almanac of the Dead thereby marks the imbrication of hegemonic understandings of narrative in an instrumental logic that abstracts the narrative’s temporal progression, read as its “meaning,” from its medium, its spatial instantiation. The subordination of the spatial aspects of texts to the narrative’s figurative meaning was the basis of a wholesale discrediting of the glyphs, colors, and pictographs that were central to the Mayan almanacs. This discrediting of Mayan representational forms was, furthermore, part and parcel of a broader subjugation of non-European cultures to the narratives as well as the narrative forms of Europe.

     

    Works Cited

     

    • Amin, Samir. Obsolescent Capitalism: Contemporary Politics and Global Disorder. London: Zed, 2003.
    • Bamyeh, Mohammed A. “The New Imperialism: Six Theses.” Social Text 18.1 (Spring 2000): 1-29.
    • Beverley, John. Subalternity and Representation: Arguments in Cultural Theory. Durham: Duke UP, 1999.
    • Brady, Mary Pat. Extinct Lands, Temporal Geographies: Chicana Literature and the Urgency of Space. Durham: Duke UP, 2002.
    • Brenner, Neil. “Global, Fragmented, Hierarchical: Henri Lefebvre’s Geographies of Globalization.” Public Culture 10.1 (1997): 135-67.
    • Brotherston, Gordon. Book of the Fourth World: Reading the Native Americas through Their Literature. Cambridge: Cambridge UP, 1992.
    • Castells, Manuel. The Informational City: Information Technology, Economic Restructuring, and the Urban-Regional Process. Cambridge: Blackwell, 1989.
    • —. The Rise of the Network Society. 2nd Ed. Oxford: Blackwell, 2000.
    • Cherniavsky, Eva. “Subaltern Studies in a U.S. Frame.” Boundary 2 23:2 (1996): 85-110.
    • —. “Tribalism, Globalism, and Eskimo Television in Leslie Marmon Silko’s Almanac of the Dead.” Angelaki: Journal of the Theoretical Humanities 6.1 (April 2001): 111-26.
    • Dussel, Enrique. “Beyond Eurocentrism: The World System and the Limits of Modernity.” The Cultures of Globalization. Eds. Fredric Jameson and Masao Miyoshi. Durham: Duke UP, 1998. 3-31.
    • Dyer-Witheford, Nick. Cyber-Marx: Cycles and Circuits of Struggle in High-Technology Capitalism. Urbana: U of Illinois P, 1999.
    • Foster, Tom. “Cyber-Aztecs and Cholo-Punks: Guillermo Gómez-Peña’s Five Worlds Theory.” PMLA 117.1 (2002): 43-67.
    • Guha, Ranajit. “Preface.” Elementary Aspects of Peasant Insurgency in Colonial India. Delhi: Oxford UP, 1983.
    • —. Selected Subaltern Studies. Ed. R. Guha and Gayatri Spivak. New York: Oxford UP, 1988.
    • Harvey, David. “Cosmopolitanism and the Banality of Geographical Evils.” Millenial Capitalism and the Culture of Neoliberalism. Eds. Jean Comaroff and John L. Comaroff. Durham: Duke UP, 2001. 271-309.
    • —. The New Imperialism. Oxford: Oxford UP, 2003.
    • Massey, Doreen. Space, Place, and Gender. Cambridge: Polity, 1994.
    • Michaels, Walter Benn. The Shape of the Signifier: American Writing from 1967 to the End of History. Princeton: Princeton UP, 2004.
    • Mignolo, Walter D. “Globalization, Civilization Processes, and the Relocation of Languages and Cultures.” The Cultures of Globalization. Ed. Fredric Jameson and Masao Miyoshi. Durham: Duke UP, 1998. 32-53.
    • —. “The Many Faces of Cosmo-polis: Border Thinking and Critical Cosmopolitanism.” Public Culture 12.3 (2000): 721-748. 28 Apr. 2003. <http://muse.jhu.edu/journals/public_culture/v012/12.3mignolo.html>
    • Rosencrance, Richard. The Rise of the Virtual State: Wealth and Power in the Coming Century. New York: Basic, 1999.
    • Silko, Leslie Marmon. Almanac of the Dead. New York: Penguin, 1991.
    • —. “An Expression of Profound Gratitude to the Maya Zapatistas, January 1, 1994.” Yellow Woman and A Beauty of the Spirit: Essays on Native American Life Today. New York: Simon & Schuster, 1996. 152-54.
    • Soja, Edward W. Postmodern Geographies: The Reassertion of Space in Critical Social Theory. London: Verso, 1989.

     

  • A Critique of Neo-Left Ontology

    Carsten Strathausen

    Department of German and Russian Studies
    University of Missouri-Columbia
    StrathausenC@missouri.edu

     

    The term “ontology” occupies an increasingly prominent place in current politico-philosophical discourse. “Political philosophy forces us to enter the terrain of ontology,” declare Michael Hardt and Antonio Negri (Empire (354). Ernesto Laclau recently said that he has “concentrated on the ontological dimension of social theory.” According to Laclau, his work should be judged at “the theoretical and philosophical level” (“A Reply” 321) because it “requires a new ontology” (304). Such investment in ontology is important in much recent self-avowedly leftist political theory. Giorgio Agamben’s critique of the state of exception and of today’s concentration camps is intimately tied to his ontological reflections regarding our potential existence beyond sovereign power: “Until a new and coherent ontology of potentiality” has been found, he argues, “a political theory freed from the aporias of sovereignty remains unthinkable” (Homo Sacer44). Likewise, Alain Badiou’s political writings are intertwined with his mathematical ontology of set-theory, and Slavoj Zizek’s exhortation to return to the legacy of Lenin in order to combat global capitalism remains inseparable from his ontological determination of capital as the real.

     

    An early call to re-invent a “first philosophy” was Jean-Luc Nancy’s seminal essay “Being Singular Plural,” first published in 1996. Here, Nancy says that we must think “an ontology of being-with-one-another” (53) as the basis for a new communal politics beyond sovereignty and domination: “there is no difference between the ethical and the ontological” (99), he declares, because “only ontology, in fact, may be ethical in a consistent manner” (21). In his view, only a radical recommencement of philosophical thought can move political theory beyond its current impasse caused by the liberal defense of the status quo. In particular, Nancy distinguishes his new ontology of “being-in-common” both from Heideggerianism and from Marxism. Heidegger, so Nancy, did not take his own analysis of “Mitsein” far enough, but instead remains committed to a thinking in hierarchies: “The analytic of Mitsein that appears within the existential analytic remains nothing more than a sketch; that is, even though Mitsein is coessential with Dasein, it remains in a subordinate position” (93). Against Marxism, Nancy’s ontology insists on dissolving the the various oppositions (between essence and appearance, base and superstructure) that sustain a dialectical (i.e. Hegelian) mode of critique: “Both the theory and the practice of critique demonstrate that, from now on, critique absolutely needs to rest on some principle other than that of the ontology of the Other and the Same: it needs an ontology of being-with-one-another” (53).

     

    In this essay, I use Nancy’s reflections as a starting point for examining the reasons for and the significance of the renewed interest in a “new ontology,” particularly among certain leftist political thinkers. I argue that ontology had become a shunned concept in traditional leftist discourse because it was tainted by Heidegger and his involvement in German fascism. Moreover, I demonstrate that Jameson’s recent attempt to revive ontology as a crucial concept for Marxist theory inevitably leads him back to embrace the same old (Hegelian) dialectics of self and other, form and content–that is, precisely the kind of dualist thinking that Nancy and other neo-left ontologists seek to leave behind. Contrary to the Marxist belief in the recuperative power of negativity, they conceive of political ontology as a paradoxical terrain that “‘contradiction,’ in its dialectical sense, is entirely unable to capture,” as Laclau argues (Populist Reason 84). “So forget Hegel” (148).1

     

    However, in spite of this rejection of traditional Marxism, these theorists acknowledge the necessity to base their political theory on explicit assumptions about the “nature” of social life and the world at large. It is this tension between being and becoming that gives rise to the paradoxical definitions of ontology as a “groundless presupposition” (Nancy) or “limiting horizon” (Laclau)–formulations that seek to describe or conceive of a de-essentialized ontology, an ontology that recognizes a given (social or natural) foundation as both structurally given and as historically changing. This, then, is the problem: how to move beyond Marxist dialectics without falling prey to an essentially conservative ontology (such as Leo Strauss’s firm belief in the natural superiority of philosophers and gentlemen or Carl Schmitt’s seminal distinction between friends and enemies as constitutive of the political). Can one choose something other than (Marxist) dialectics and (Heideggerian) Dasein?

     

    I believe one can, and this essay introduces some of the major theoretical positions that have developed in response to this question. I use the generic term “neo-left” to address them in unison. I choose “neo-left” primarily because it goes along with the other two terms that have become widely accepted today–“neo-conservative” and “neo-liberal.” Moreover, the prefix “neo” connotes some of the drastic changes in global capitalism and technology, that play an important part in contemporary politics, while the suffix “left” emphasizes the continuing commitment of these thinkers to issues of economic justice and social equality. Thus, the purpose of my essay is to compare the current use of and reference to “ontology” as a crucial concept in contemporary political philosophy. Needless to say, such a comparison can neither be comprehensive nor can it do justice to the full complexity of the particular works discussed. It must be satisfied instead with an outline of the major trends and their underlying assumptions.

     

    My overall thesis is that the current interest in ontology signifies a profound change within the leftist politico-philosophical tradition, namely the belief that thought has the intrinsic power to affect and alter (but not to control or govern) the “nature” of what it thinks: “A thought is an event,” claims Nancy; “what it thinks happens to it there, where it is not” (175). Only if Being and thinking are the same can the creative “reflection” on the “nature” of things be concomitant with their “change.” Put differently, thought neither represents objective materiality (as some orthodox Marxists would claim) nor does it reflect the autonomous “dis-appearing” of things (in the sense of Heidegger’s aletheia). Rather, thought partakes of reality; the two are consubstantial. This leads me to embrace what Stephen K. White has called a “weak ontology” as the basis for thinking leftist politics. Such an ontology registers the affective power of theory to influence politics above and beyond its rational content.

     

    Marxism, Heidegger, and Ontology

     

    As exemplified in Nancy’s text, Heidegger’s work often serves as a springboard for those envisioning a “new ontology,” because Heidegger was among the first to de-essentialize ontology in his effort to move beyond classical metaphysics.2 For example, this is how Agamben states the situation:

     

    The fact that must constitute the point of departure for any discourse on ethics is that there is no essence, no historical or spiritual vocation, no biological destiny that humans must enact or realize . . . . This does not mean, however, that humans are not, and do not have to be, something, that they are simply consigned to nothingness and therefore can freely decide whether to be or not to be, to adopt or not to adopt this or that destiny (nihilism and decisionism coincide at this point). There is in effect something that humans are and have to be, but this something is not an essence nor properly a thing: It is the simple fact of one's own existence as possibility or potentiality. (Coming Community 43)

     

     

    Here, the debt to Heidegger is as unmistakable as in the work of Derrida or Levinas. But there is also the deliberate attempt to move beyond Heidegger and to dissociate his de-essentialized ontology from the horrors of fascism. Agamben first emphasizes “that Nazism . . . has its condition of possibility in Western philosophy itself, and in Heideggerian ontology in particular.” But he soon finds “the point at which Nazism and Heidegger’s thought radically diverge,” because the latter allegedly resists the “biological and eugenic” drive that characterizes the former (Homo Sacer 152-53). Whether this distinction is ultimately convincing seems less relevant than Agamben’s overall effort to think with and beyond Heidegger as he searches for a new, non-foundational and non-relational ontology.3

     

    The recent interest in political ontology thus departs from the traditional leftist position to equate ontological thinking (via Heidegger) with German fascism. Since Heidegger and up until the mid-1980’s when a deconstructive version of Marxism emerged in the works of Laclau, Mouffe, Zizek, Badiou, a.o., ontology was synonymous with Heideggerianism: “Contemporary philosophical ‘ontology’ is entirely dominated by the name of Heidegger,” Alain Badiou correctly stated in 1988 (Being and Event 9). Badiou himself, of course, will break with this tradition; yet this general identification of ontology and Heidegger allowed most leftist intellectuals at the time to dismiss the entire ontological tradition as a dangerous aberration in Western thought. As a philosophical tradition, ontology is not only suspect among leftist intellectuals. It is part of an oppressive super-structure that affirms rather than challenges the existing status quo. “In all its mutually excluding and defaming versions, ontology is apologetic,” Adorno unequivocally states in 1966 (69).4 For Adorno, the basic fault of ontology in general, and of Heidegger’s “foundational ontology” in particular, is its essentialism, which seeks the eternal, self-identical truth underneath the flow of history. “Heidegger,” we read, “refuses to reflect [the difference between expression and thing]; he stops after only the first step of the language-philosophical dialectics” (117).

     

    Ontological argument is static, undialectical, and unhistorical. It apodictically posits a truth that, following Adorno, can only be thought in and through a continuous process of self-critical reflection. The truth about ontology, therefore, is its untruth and philosophical sterility. Ontology begets ideology, because it refuses to think through and beyond contradiction the way dialectics does. Instead, Heidegger allegedly praises the mere existence of paradox as if it were truth itself. In doing so, ontology succumbs to the apologetic “affirmation of power” (136), and Adorno spends numerous pages on Heidegger’s use of the predicate “is” to substantiate this claim.5 The brute fact that the world exists and that Being “is,” so Adorno, seduces Heidegger to abandon dialectical reflection in favor of mere tautologies that refuse to mediate between the constitutive poles of subject and object, Being and beings. Instead, ontology ultimately collapses the two into one. “The whole construction of [Heidegger’s] ontological difference is a Potemkin Village” (122), Adorno concludes, because this alleged difference only serves to advocate the self-identity and self-righteousness of the way things always already are in the beginning and will have been in the end. In Heidegger, “mediation [succumbs] to the unmediated identity of what mediates and what is being mediated” (Adorno 493).

     

    In contrast, the overall goal of critical reflection must be to “once again liquefy the reified movement of thought” that characterizes (Heidegger’s) ontology (104). The way to do this is to unveil its “objective,” that is, its “truthful” dimension, which consists of its socio-ideological function. Hence, Adorno reads Heideggerian “Fundamentalontologie” as a symptom for the fate human subjectivity suffers at the hands of capitalist society. Although, philosophically speaking, Heidegger’s fetishization of Being along with his renunciation of the subject’s power of critical reflection is “untrue” and “ideological,” it is, at the same time, “true” nonetheless in so far as it “registers” the “total functionality-complex” constitutive of modern society (74). (Heidegger’s) ontology is a false thought enabled and sustained by a false human practice. Only a fundamental change in the latter could prompt the necessary dissolution of the former.

     

    Like Adorno, many traditional Marxists are reluctant to use the term “ontology” at all because, in their view, this term is part of the speculative philosophical tradition that the pragmatic approach of some Marxist theory seeks to upturn from its head onto its feet. For what distinguishes nineteenth-century Marxism from eighteenth-century philosophical materialism is precisely this emphasis on the social-active potential of mankind as opposed to the mere description of its physical components. If there is something like a Marxist ontology, it is based on human practice, which renders a priori attempts to theorize it irrelevant at best and reactionary at worst. Once again, Heidegger proves an excellent case in point, as Pierre Bourdieu argues in his 1977 book The Political Ontology of Martin Heidegger. Although Bourdieu criticizes Adorno’s alleged one-dimensional denunciation of Heidegger, he pursues the same overall goal as does Adorno, namely to situate Heidegger’s ontology within the socio-political context of his time. Bourdieu’s own methodology consists of what he calls a “political and philosophical double-lecture of Heidegger” that recognizes the “relative autonomy” of both realms–the political and the philosophical–without, however, relinquishing the critical effort to mediate between them (German edition p. 11). Bourdieu, then, defines “Heidegger’s political ontology” as “a political stance that expresses itself exclusively in philosophical terms.” In other words, the objective of Bourdieu’s investigation is to reconstruct “the comprehensive structure of the field that governs philosophical productivity” (14-16).

     

    Given the prominence of Althusserian Marxism in France at the time of Bourdieu’s essay, his structuralist terminology (“relative autonomy”; “overdetermination”; “structure of the field of productivity”) and its proclaimed difference from the critical apparatus of the Frankfurt School should not be overrated. True, Bourdieu speaks of “habitus” while Adorno speaks of “ideology”; Bourdieu regards Heidegger as a “practical operator” (64) who mediates between politics and philosophy, whereas Adorno refers to him as a “reflection” [“Widerhall“] or “sign” (“Abdrücke” (73)] of the social in the realm of philosophy. But the crucial point remains that both Adorno and Bourdieu read Heidegger’s ontology as the unconscious expression of a dynamic social process whose dynamics it fails to reflect. This failure is constitutive of ontological discourse, whose preference for stasis over movement, ground over horizon, Being over becoming is but an expression of a human “desire” (69) caused by a world that, in reality, never stands still.

     

    In short: while most critics today read Heidegger’s philosophy as a deconstruction of Western metaphysics and essentialist ontology avant la lettre, this is precisely not how Bourdieu, Adorno, or several leading Marxists understood his work. For them, ontology is an inherently conservative, if not reactionary concept. Marxist theory, it follows, should dispense with ontology and turn toward this changing world instead.6 “Always historicize” is its motto, and the “persistence of the dialectic” (Fredric Jameson) testifies to the reflective nature of Marxist thought. It is an attempt literally to think after [“nach-denken“] the real, material events that define human experience and collective practice. Hence, Étienne Balibar and Fredric Jameson continue to argue that “there is no Marxist philosophy and there never will be” (1). Rather, Marxism should “be thought of as a problematic” (Jameson, “Actually” 175) that continues to develop and change along with the object of its inquiry, namely capitalism. Only the dialectical method is able to keep pace with history as it mediates between the constitutive poles of subject and object, Being and becoming.7 Thus, Marxists do “philosophy in a materialist way,” as Pierre Macherey puts it (8). The goal, after all, is not to interpret the world, but to change it.

     

    In order to further elucidate this crucial philosophical difference between traditional Marxist and contemporary ontological discourse, let me briefly discuss their contrary understanding of paradox and contradiction. Boris Groys argues that the “central law of dialectical materialism” consists in thinking simultaneously “the unity and conflict of oppositions,” which is to say to “think in paradoxes” (35; my translation). Marxists think in contradictions because the world itself is contradictory. To quote Lenin: “In essence, dialectics examines the contradictions at the heart of things themselves” (qtd. in Groys 47)–a maxim that recalls Hegel’s formulation that “all things are in themselves contradictory in precisely the sense that this sentence, contrary to all others, expresses the truth and the essence of things ” (286; my translation). Marxist philosophy destroys rather than sustains paradox: dialectics consists precisely in the temporalization or dissolution of paradox into process. The overall aim is to unleash the dynamic tension that sustains contradiction to achieve a clearly defined goal (Communism). In so doing, dialectics thinks through contradictions rather than paradoxes; it transforms the latter into the former.8 Paradox is a decayed form of dialectics, as Adorno puts it. Unlike a contradiction, paradox remains fixed, a well-defined constellation in thought, whereas contradiction operates temporally and seeks to liquefy thought in and through the dialectical method. To ponder a paradox is to be caught in a circular reflection that seems to lead nowhere–hence Adorno’s repeated charge against Heidegger of producing mere tautologies.

     

    On this point the ontological neo-left differs from traditional Marxism: it takes paradox seriously by refusing to temporalize it. Aporias abound in contemporary politico-philosophical discourse–epitomized in Laclau’s claim “that the condition of possibility of something is also its condition of impossibility” (Mouffe 48). Walter Benjamin’s notion of “dialectics at a standstill” (578) is an early attempt in this direction. For the mythically inclined Benjamin, dialectics did not describe a teleological process toward the end of history, but a sudden awareness that this end was always already included in the beginning. Most importantly, this awareness is not “rational” and cannot be predicted in advance. Benjamin posits the ontological paradox of a folded space whose “outside” belongs to and emerges within the “inside” only after the “lightning bolt of revelation” has struck. Unlike in traditional Marxism, there are no guarantees for Benjamin that anything will happen at all. Instead, it is our sudden insight that engenders what we falsely presume to have been there all along. For it is the mere inspiration to conceive of things differently that makes them so, however slight a change this may turn out to be. This emphasis on the power of inspiration, revelation, and shock puts Benjamin at odds with traditional Marxism. His Arcades Project promotes a spatial understanding of paradox that deemphasizes the developmental nature of dialectical thought, if not of history as such.9

     

    Benjamin’s paradoxical space of dialectical stand-still is also similar to what Derrida has called “the third type of aporia,” defined as “the impossible, the antinomy, or the contradiction.” This aporia “is a nonpassage because its elementary milieu does not allow for something that could be called passage, step, walk, gait, displacement, or replacement, a kinesis in general. There is no more path . . . . The impasse itself would be impossible” (Aporias 21). It is within this impassable and impossible space that the political must be thought, according to Derrida. What thus remains of ontology is the specter of a haunted place bewitched by its own non-existence–a “hauntology,” as Derrida calls it: “(H)auntology has theoretical priority” for Derrida, Simon Critchley contends, “for the claim is that it is from this spectral drive that something like thought is born” (Ethics 147). Yet, this also means that ontology will continue to disturb the thought of deconstruction. The latter can never completely shake this specter, because hauntology itself is haunted by ontology. I want to suggest, therefore, that in spite of Derrida’s critique of ontology, the question of (deconstructive or textual) space remains inseparable from ontological questions. Let me briefly recall that “Il n’y a pas d’hors de texte” means

     

    both that there are only contexts, that nothing exists outside context, as I have often said, but also that the limit of the frame or the border of the context always entails a clause of nonclosure. The outside penetrates and thus determines the inside. (Derrida, Aporias 152-53)

     

    This spatial paradox (“nothing exists outside context,” yet “the outside [of the context] penetrates . . . the inside”) between inside and outside lies at the center of deconstruction and connects it with the various post-Marxist ontologies discussed later on in this essay. In spite of–or, rather, precisely because of–Derrida’s explicit refusal to “re-ontologize” thought (“Marx & Sons” 257), he remains a major contributor to the current debate about the relationship between ontology and politics.

     

    The Topography of Paradox

     

    The philosophical consequences–and, I shall argue, the political consequences as well–of this shift from dialectics to paradox are far-reaching. First of all, it differentiates traditional Marxist from current neo-left discourse. For the paradoxical effort to think the outside as a constitutive part of the inside from which it emerges has been crucial to post-Marxist theory ever since the publication of Ernesto Laclau’s and Chantal Mouffe’s Hegemony and Socialist Strategy in 1985.10 Insisting on the possibility of historical change and hegemonic interventions, they refer to the social field as an ontological “horizon” rather than an ontological “ground.” Whereas ground is a foundationialist term that reintroduces the surface-depth (or inside-outside) distinction, horizon implies an ever receding, historically shifting borderline that remains internal to the social and defies the internal/external distinction:

     

    This irresoluble interiority/exteriority tension is the condition of any social practice: necessity only exists as a partial limitation of the field of contingency. It is in this terrain, where neither a total interiority nor a total exteriority is possible, that the social is constituted. (111)

     

    The terrain of the social thus constitutes a self-subversive totality that, although it can never become total, nonetheless confronts no limit outside itself. Still an advocate of post-Marxism in 1996, Zizek described this “undecidable alternative Inside/Outside” (“Introduction: The Spectre” 17) as a “paradoxical topology” in which surfaces absorb depth, the outside of discourse emerges on its inside, and ideology becomes “more real that reality itself” (30).

     

    Questions of topography and historical horizons emerge as core issues in “Contemporary Dialogues on the Left,” a series of discussions among Butler, Laclau, and Zizek published in 2000. In a bizarre dance of ever-shifting alliances, each of the participants accuses the others of advocating an “ahistorical” or “quasi-transcendental” theory that remains unable to account for historical change.11 The central question is this: if we acknowledge the existence of a structural (or quasi-transcendental) limit operating within the existing socio-political field, does this acknowledgment lead to political impotence (because we cannot change this limit and hence are condemned to operate within its structural borders), as Butler implies? Or is it exactly the opposite: does this limit not actually enable political action and radical change precisely because it is a purely structural void (an “empty signifier”) whose contours and location are determined by historical shifts within the entire field, as Laclau and Zizek argue?12

     

    Many ontological neo-left thinkers espouse this latter view. Nonetheless, Laclau’s unorthodox understanding of topological borders continues to irritate not only traditional Marxists, but also thinkers much more sympathetic to contemporary theory in general. Critics like Simon Critchley, Judith Butler, and Rodolphe Gasché continue to understand the relationship between the universal and the particular in terms of a form/content divide, according to which the universal functions as a transcendental, albeit empty, “form” that is filled by some historically contingent, particular “content.” Scrutinizing Laclau’s definition of the universal as an “empty signifier,” Gasché, for example, argues that the universal must, at the very least, possess a “form of sorts” that guarantees its self-identity and thus somewhat pre-determines which historical particular can actually occupy its place:

     

    Once the empty place is thought of as the place of the universal, does it not, as this very place, betoken a content of sorts distinct from whatever contents subsequently come to fill that place? . . . Is it not thanks to this form or structure that the empty signifier or place can become the surface of inscription for a diversity of universals? (Gasché 32-33)

     

    In response, Laclau explicitly distinguishes between emptiness and abstraction, arguing that the former does not imply the latter. In his view, the charge of abstraction that Hegel raised against Kant’s dualist philosophy does not apply to his own theory of hegemony. Universals are empty, Laclau contends, both because they have no predetermined content of their own and because they do not pre-exist the chains of particulars from which they emerge: “particularity and universality are not two ontological orders opposed to each other but possibilities internal to a discursive structure” (“A Reply” 282). Put differently, Laclau resists the separation between the epistemological and the ontological implicit in Gasché’s questions. Whereas Gasché conceives of universals as some kind of (ontologically present) entities that subsist as abstract forms devoid of any (epistemologically determinable) content, Laclau denies the universal any existence at all apart from the particulars that sustain its meaning: “What is the result of a historical construction is not the filling of a transcendentally established place, but the constant production and displacement of the place itself” (283). The effort to think this process “requires a new ontology,” Laclau concludes, because it considers the “kinds of relations between entities which cannot be grasped with the conceptual arsenal of classical ontology” (304).

     

    Likewise, Michael Hardt and Antonio Negri have argued that “political theory must deal with ontology” because “politics cannot be constructed from the outside” anymore (Empire 354): “In Empire . . . all places have been subsumed in a general ‘non-place’” of pure immanence (353). Like Laclau, Hardt and Negri insist that their notion of “ontology is not a theory of foundation” (Labour 287), for which reason they speak of the “ontological horizon of Empire” instead of its ground (Empire 355; emphasis added). Yet Hardt’s and Negri’s account of political ontology differs from Laclau’s in one crucial aspect: it is not based upon the (Lacanian) notion of structural lack, but on (Foucault’s and Deleuze’s) bio-political and life-philosophical belief in the fullness of life.13

     

    Rather than trying to expose the constitutive void at the center of global capitalism, Hardt and Negri emphasize the plentitude and enormous productivity of the current imperial Order. The latter is able to integrate everything that seeks to establish itself outside of that Order, because “transcendence is always a product of immanence,” as Deleuze put it (Pure Immanence 31). For Deleuze and Guattari (as well as for Hardt and Negri), “immanence is immanent only to itself and consequently captures everything, absorbs All-One, and leaves nothing remaining to which it could be immanent” (What is Philosophy? 45). Immanence has no limits, neither outside nor within itself. Since immanence is all there is, Negri concludes that “ontology has absorbed the political” so that “all that which is political is biopolitical” (234). Political philosophy today is no longer about contemplating “the good life,” as Leo Strauss and other conservatives would argue. Instead, it is about life as such, about “bare” or “naked life” itself and its relation to Being. It is about ontology, because “the ‘body’ is always already a biopolitical body” (Homo Sacer 187).

     

    The latter claims are central to Agamben’s work. Agamben, too, recognizes the increasing interdependence of political philosophy and ontology that determines the fate of what he calls “homo sacer.” A crucial notion in Agamben’s overall politico-philosophical project, homo sacer defines a life that may be killed but not sacrificed, a life that is neither secular nor divine and thus “exceeds the sphere both of law and of sacrifice” (86). Agamben’s most frequently used historical example is life in the German concentration camps (his examples include the German concentration camps, the Gulag, and Guantanamo Bay): the inhabitants of the camps are stripped of all civil protection and thus are the literal referent for–indeed the embodiment of–“human rights.” For what exactly are the “rights” of human life outside of any concrete juridical order? Situated at “the zone of indistinction” between the sacred and the profane, between the (unprotected) biological order of “bare life” (zoe) and the (protected) juridical order of “socio-political life” (bios), homo sacer defines the very “threshold” that both connects and separates the two spheres.

     

    Agamben contends that these human “objects” that have been reduced to bare life posit a basic ontological challenge to political philosophy. If the twentieth century has indeed witnessed the gradual ascension of the state of exception to the overall paradigm of Western government, as Agamben claims,14 then the very distinction between inside and outside can no longer be maintained. Instead of trying to reestablish these classical distinctions, one needs to think beyond categories and distinctions in general:

     

    Every attempt to rethink the political space of the West must begin with a clear awareness that we no longer know anything of the classical distinction between zoe and bios, between private life and political existence, between man as a simple living being at home in the house and man’s political existence in the city. This is why the restoration of classical political categories proposed by Leo Strauss . . . can have only a critical sense. There is no return from the camps to classical politics. In the camps, city and house became indistinguishable, and the possibility of differentiating between our biological body and our political body . . .was taken from us forever. (187-88)

     

    On the basis of this premise, Agamben calls for a new or “coming politics” that moves beyond the state of exception as the contemporary paradigm of governance. Such a new politics, however, can only emerge in the context of a new metaphysics and a new way of thinking that “return(s) thought to its practical calling” (5). Why? Because, in Agamben’s view, the current dilemma of a global state of exception is not a perversion of the classical Greek distinction between zoe and bios, but its logical conclusion. Only because political philosophy was, from its very beginning, based upon this life/politics distinction was it possible for the gradual erosion of the latter to lead to a crisis of the former.15 For once Greek philosophy had stipulated the separation between life and politics, it was merely a question of time before this entire scheme would come undone and self-de(con)struct. Today, the damage is done and there is no turning back. Instead, Agamben suggests that we seize upon the contemporary fusion of life and politics as an opportunity to think about community differently so as to move beyond its classical metaphysical framework. This task, however, “implies nothing less than thinking ontology and politics beyond every figure of relation” (47). Again and again, Agamben returns to this notion of a “non-relationship” and his effort “to think the politico-social factumno longer in the form of a relation” at all (60).

     

    New Ontological Horizons

     

    Our discussion so far has shown that the shift from dialectics to paradox inaugurates a new meaning of “ontology” in contemporary political discourse. Ontology no longer describes the ancient philosophical attempt to define the “essence” or “nature of being” in positive, non-paradoxical terms. Nor does it claim to provide an absolute perspective guided by pure thought that operates beyond the pale of history. Since this Archimedian viewpoint does not exist–or, more precisely, since such a perspective is always already located inside rather than outside the (social or “natural”) space it seeks to analyze–, ontology, instead, begins to function as a heuristic device for the historically contingent construction of a different “nature” from the one we presently inhabit. Ontology, in other words, is more than a mere historical construction; it is also constructive in the sense that it informs a particular political vision for change.

     

    Thus, we may speak of ontology as a ground only in so far as we understand this “ground” to be constantly shifting and evolving. One must not confuse this recognition of historical contingency with the Marxist emphasis on history. The major difference is not simply the teleological, eschatological nature of classical-orthodox Marxism, according to which history is a more or less pre-determined rather than contingent process. Rather, the difference lies in the fact that non-deconstructive versions of Marxism assume a structural correlation between philosophical statements and the sociopolitical field that allegedly generates them. Both Bourdieu and Adorno regard the emergence and success of Heidegger’s ontology as deeply significant in the sense that it carries an objective meaning pointing back to the realm of the social, to history and the real itself–such as it existed in the middle of the twentieth century, of course. Indeed, Marxists readily acknowledge that the real changes historically along with thoughts that reflect the real. But what does not change, according to traditional Marxism, is the necessary existence of a dependency between these changes, i.e., between the primary, economic changes and the secondary changes in thought as it reflects (upon) the first.

     

    Hence, from a Marxist perspective, the current renaissance of ontological thought must be significant: it must unveil an objective truth about the current state of global capitalism. To be sure, there may be some discussion as to what exactly this truth is. But it is precisely the assumption of an “objective” significance of a given (theoretical) event that current ontological discourse leaves behind. If the proclamation of a new ontology is both constructed and constructive, this can only mean that whatever sociopolitical significance this proclamation may attain over time is constructed as well. It is a mere potentiality. Hence, the seemingly “objective” claims of ontological neo-left discourse can only emerge as a retrospective projection from within the new reality potentially inaugurated by this discourse itself. Otherwise, this discourse becomes meaningless in the sense that it only serves as a blank screen for the projection of a pre-established interpretative scheme. It is reduced to a mere symptom whose meaning is pre-determined by the old context in which it is made to signify.

     

    Put differently, from this perspective, if a theory fails to affect the reality it ponders, it has no active meaning at all, objective or otherwise. A thought that fails to alter the non-discursive, material environment from which it emerges does not exist as thought. It is nothing but a description or a symptom. As such, it may be judged accurate or inaccurate. But a description is not a thought, because the latter emerges only retrospectively from within the reality it has managed to transform. I want to emphasize that this idea does not bespeak Heideggerianism and its effort to identify the nature of Being. It merely phrases a materialist insight in ontological idioms. Whereas Heidegger understood thinking as “Nach-denken,” the ontological neo-left focuses on “mit-denken” as a part of Being. Like all thought, this idea remains a construct. Whether or not this construction is “true” is as yet a meaningless question. Its future answer would depend on the ability of the construction to alter its own conditions of emergence such that it will have stepped into being and will have acquired meaning.

     

    I now turn to yet another important thinker in the Marxist tradition to elucidate this point. In his essay on “Ontology and Utopia,” first published in 1994 and reprinted in Archaeologies of the Future (2005), Fredric Jameson indeed refers to a “Marxian ontology” (240). One of its major concerns, he claims, is to account for the possibility that a different collectivity would emerge from within a given structure. How can something new emerge from the old? Jameson’s answer is to build “eventfulness into the structure itself” (246) and thus to fold the new (outside) back into the old (inside)–dialectically, of course: “For, once again, Marx is ontological in the way in which he grasps the collective forms as already latent in the capitalist present: they are not merely desirable (or ethical), nor even possible, but also and above all inevitable, provided we understand the bringing to emergence of that inevitability as a collective human task and project” (250; emphasis added).

     

    It is precisely this notion of “inevitability” that remains problematic for the ontological neo-left. If Marxist ontology consisted of nothing but this belief in immanence–according to which “what already is, or what is virtual, latent, at the level of fantasy or half-formed wish or inclination, is also the rockbed of the social structure itself” (Jameson, Archaeologies 252)–few would object. One might even grant Jameson’s persistent attempt to align “the great thought of immanence” with Hegel and Marx (251) or to transform Deleuze into a dialectical thinker.16 But Jameson ultimately wants to square this new version of dialectical immanence with the scientific aspirations of traditional Marxism, according to which the emergence of something new (such as the arrival of socialism) is objectively “inevitable.” Such a claim, however, is forced to disregard the temporal aporia that governs the relationship between event and structure. An event can only be judged inevitable once it has actually occurred and thereby altered the original situation from which it emerged. Put differently, we might say that an event will have been inevitable once we look back on it from a later point in time and space inaugurated by the event. But not before.

     

    Jameson comes close to this insight in his latest book when he, once again, ponders the relationship between base and superstructure: “Can culture be political, which is to say critical and even subversive, or is it necessarily reappropriated and coopted by the social system of which it is a part?” (xv). In a lengthy footnote that forms part of his response, Jameson elaborates that “from another standpoint, this discussion of the ambiguous reality of culture . . . is an ontological one” and has to do with the “amphibiousness of being and its temporality” (xv-xvii.). For culture (along with the “desire called utopia” that sustains Marxism as an ongoing problematic in global capitalism) is based on a “mixture of being and non-being”: on the one hand, cultural desire testifies to what lacks in the present such as it currently exists, while, on the other, it imagines a future that does not yet exist. Although Jameson characterizes this temporal paradox as “mildly scandalous for analytical reason,” he nonetheless calls for its integration into his “Marxian ontology” (xv-xvii).

     

    Here, it seems, we have moved away from the traditional leftist disdain for both ontological thinking and paradox, since Jameson explicitly acknowledges the aporetic structure of utopian desire (i.e., the desire for improvement) as a constitutive part of Marxist theory. The question remains what consequences he draws from this insight for the formulation of a leftist (Marxist) politics. As mentioned above, the ontological neo-left takes the constitutive paradox of Being as a starting point for reexamining the history and goals of political philosophy. But since Jameson still remains committed to traditional Marxist principles such as “the primacy of the economic” over “the political (and other) superstructures” (219), he considers Marxism’s “neglect of political theory . . . a happy consequence” that he refuses to dismantle. So instead of political theory, he discusses the nature of what he calls a “Utopian formalism” (xiii) that seeks to “illuminate its historical conditions of possibility: for it is certainly of the greatest interest for us today to understand why Utopias have flourished in one period and dried up in another” (xiv).

     

    Here we return to the kind of Marxist analysis of culture we encountered in Adorno and Bourdieu. For Jameson, looking into the future always leads one to gaze at the past–but not in order to recognize simply what happened (namely a contingent process that could have unfolded otherwise although it now appears to have been necessary), but in order to “objectively” determine the “inevitable” outcome of what allegedly had to happen. This skewed perspective allows him to connect the new to the old in a seamless, that is, dialectical fashion. Indeed, although Jameson explicitly welcomes disruption as a “new discursive strategy” to resist the current status quo, his strategy is ultimately little more than a formal exercise in dialectical thinking. For since “Utopia is the form such disruption necessarily takes,” Jameson insists that “the Utopian form proper . . . has its political role to play, and in fact becomes a new kind of content in its own right” (231). In the end, Utopian “form becomes content” (212). Thus we return to Hegel and the dialectical dissolve of paradox into contradiction.

     

    In contrast, the ontological neo-left stops dialectics, embraces paradox, and ruptures thought. Or, better, it inaugurates a different kind of thought because it thinks thought’s relation to Being differently. Its goal is to promote new ideas, and although these ideas need not add up to a particular political program, they confer upon thought greater independence and material relevance than even Jameson seems willing to grant it. More specifically, the ontological neo-left dispenses with the traditional Marxist idea of the “relative autonomy” of cultural politics (i.e., of thought) vis-à-vis the economy. Instead, it considers the potential productivity of thought to disrupt the given status quo, including its economic structure. This disruption can only occur if thought identifies substance rather than form. Thought must act as (a part of) substance rather than try to reflect it.

     

    Naming

     

    So far, I have argued that Marxist theory and contemporary political philosophy differ substantially with regard to their understanding of ontology. While traditional Marxists denounce ontology as an essentialist and ahistorical discourse, the neo-left conceives of ontology as a de-essentialized discursive formation that both reflects and informs political acts and historical events. They can do so only because they accept rather than dissolve the paradoxical nature of things. Put differently: for Marxists, there is only way to move beyond paradox, namely dialectics, with Hegel and Marx lighting the way. But if we accept that dialectics is only one among many ways to deal with our ontological paradox, it follows, first, that the way in which we conceive of this paradox deeply affects the kinds of actions we are likely to support, and second, that the future result of these actions remains contingent and unpredictable from our present position. Marxists cannot endorse either of these propositions.

     

    However, on the other side of this divide separating Marxist and contemporary discourse, there obviously remain vast and crucial differences among those who (explicitly or implicitly) call for a “new ontology.” Hence, it is hardly surprising to find a variety of names attached to different groups of thinkers engaged in political ontology today. Since the term “New Left” is already taken (it refers to the group of writers and activists around Herbert Marcuse in the late sixties and early seventies), most critics associate the current ontological turn with “post-Marxism” or with the movement toward “radical democracy.”17 These terms, however, are also problematic, because they are strongly linked to the works of Laclau and Mouffe, who originally promulgated them (and were supported in this, at least initially, by Zizek). Hence, “post-Marxism” and “radical democracy” are less apt to describe some of the other theorists who, albeit confronting the same questions, pursue a somewhat different route than do Laclau and Mouffe. Alain Badiou, and Bruno Bosteels, for example, reject what they call “speculative leftism,” that is, a form of “post-Marxist” theory that is severed from the original communist project.18 Bosteels in particular has criticized “radical democracy” for its actual “lack of politics.” What remains of the project in the end, he argues, is “an imitation, within philosophy, of the revolutionary act” rather than the real thing itself (“For Lack” 73).

     

    This problem of “naming” remains crucial to contemporary political philosophy. It is not just an academic but a political issue. Because if thought and discourse matter in the sense that they are politically effective, then the question of how to name the current strand of political ontology will itself have some influence on our current situation. This is why Badiou (as well as Jacques Rancière) has advanced the term “metapolitics,” which he opposes to traditional political philosophy. The former is concerned with “real instances of politics as thought,” whereas the latter believes that “since no such politics exists, it falls to philosophers to think ‘the’ political” (Metapolitics xxxix). Metapolitics describes “what a philosophy declares, with its own effects in mind, to be worthy of the name ‘politics.’ Or alternatively, what a thought declares to be a thought, and under whose condition it thinks what a thought is” (152). Following Badiou, Hallward has argued for what he calls a “politics of prescription.” The latter, he claims, can break more radically with the existing liberal-democratic system than those inspired by “radical democracy” or by “post-Marxism.”

     

    Obviously, there will not and there cannot be one name that fits all, and my own suggestion–the “neo-left”–is hardly an exception. But I want to insist on the political importance of what might otherwise appear to be an abstract theoretical debate about labels. The point is that non-essential ontologies undermine this very distinction between theory and practice, thought and action. The same is true for the monist philosophical tradition (leading from Spinoza to Bergson and Deleuze) that influences many neo-leftist thinkers. This tradition is based not on the separation, but on the connection of thought and movement. In a purely immanent universe, thinking is (a form of) action, and the creation of new philosophical concepts itself amounts to an intervention within the sociopolitical field.19

     

    Here we have arrived at a crucial junction in current ontological discourse. For we might distinguish between what Agamben calls a “line of immanence and a line of transcendence” (Potentialities 239) in order to delineate the two major camps. Under the latter, Agamben lists Kant, Husserl, Levinas and Derrida, whereas the former comprises Spinoza, Nietzsche, Deleuze and Foucault. Heidegger is situated in between the two lines–an appropriate position given Heidegger’s ambiguous status as one of the first philosophers to de-essentialize ontology. Since Agamben himself does not elaborate on this configuration in the context of political ontology, we might want to add that Deleuze, Hardt, Negri, and Agamben take their place along the line of immanence, while Laclau, Mouffe, Badiou, Zizek and Rancière belong to the line of transcendence.

     

    Moreover, Agamben’s distinction between immanence and transcendence remains intimately linked to the distinction between biological plentitude and structural lack. As Tønder and Thomassen argue in their excellent analysis of this distinction, an ontology of lack “emphasizes the hegemonic nature of politics,” whereas an ontology of abundance “cultivates a strategy of pluralization” in order to realize political demands (7). Put differently, the latter ontology focuses on emergent networks of life below–and thus independent from–representation, whereas the former focuses on the construction of identities through representation. According to this scheme, Deleuze, Hardt, Negri, and Agamben certainly belong to an ontology of abundance, while Laclau, Mouffe, Badiou, Zizek, and Rancière form part of an ontology of lack.

     

    It thus appears that the two lines of distinction–the one juxtaposing abundance and lack, the other contrasting immanence and transcendence–overlap and supplement each other perfectly. However, critics have rightly pointed out that this neat matrix does not withstand closer examination.20 Derrida refers to the “quasi-transcendence” (“Justice” 282) that sustains the practice of deconstructive reading, and his work cannot simply be assimilated to the history of transcendent philosophy. Likewise, Laclau’s and Mouffe’s as well as Badiou’s and Zizek’s models rely on what might be called a “negative” or “inverted” form of transcendence–Laclau names it a “failed transcendence” (Populist Reason 244)–since all of them locate the “realm beyond” as a void or empty place within rather than outside the social structure. If this were otherwise, these theorists would violate or abandon their central premise concerning the non-essentialist and unstable ground of political ontology. It also seems noteworthy that Laclau’s ontology is based on rhetoric (i.e., catachresis) while Badiou’s ontology is based on mathematics (i.e., set theory). The former insists on a linguistic model that the latter explicitly declares insufficient for ontological thinking. Finally, one might point out that Zizek, according to Laclau, pursues “two incompatible ontologies” at the same time (Populist Reason 235), while Rancière, according to Badiou, does not develop any ontology at all.21

     

    In spite of its great heuristic value, then, the distinction between abundance and lack also occludes a number of important differences within these groups. Let me briefly consider the question of historical change and how to bring it about. I have already discussed Badiou’s critique of Laclau’s notion of “radical democracy,” according to which it remains both too “speculative” and abstract on the one hand and too liberal or anti-revolutionary on the other. Those sympathetic to Badiou’s philosophical framework, like Peter Hallward and Bruno Bosteels, explicitly condone this critique. And although Zizek shares Laclau’s theoretical framework and both are influenced by Lacan,22 he too has charged Laclau with political quietude and a complete disregard for “a particular leftist political practice” (Ticklish 174). A proponent of radical, militant action, Zizek instead reiterates the Marxist-Leninist rhetoric of class struggle and socialist revolution. The overall goal for the “ethical, militant act,” Zizek claims, is to disrupt the seemingly homogeneous terrain of liberal democracy and global capitalism. Calling for an “ethics of the real” and a “crossing of the social fantasy,” he wants to force people to acknowledge their unconscious desire for ideological models of culpability (the Jew, the Other, etc.). In other words, the “ethical act” is meant to expose the hidden existence of those who are exploited by or excluded from the current social order. In concrete political terms, it is a question of exposing the structural void that underlies the neo-liberal fantasy of the universal order of global capitalism.

     

    Laclau, in contrast, has shown little patience with the revolutionary rhetoric of Zizek or of Badiou. For him, the only way to achieve particular political goals is to build “chains of equivalences” that operate within rather than outside the existing democratic system. From Laclau’s perspective, Zizek’s and Badiou’s exhortations to withdraw from rather than engage with the democratic system run the risk of relinquishing political power to the right. Given Zizek’s belief in the absolute priority of class struggle and anti-capitalism, Laclau concludes that “Zizek cannot provide any theory for the emancipatory subject” (Populist Reason 238). He even locates Zizek on the other side of the central divide between immanence and transcendence. Like Hardt and Negri, Zizek allegedly remains committed to a (Hegelian rather than Deleuzian) “form of immanence” (242) that is politically sterile. For Laclau, all forms of immanence necessarily lead to a “theoretical framework [in which] politics becomes unthinkable” (“Can Immanence” 4).

     

    Hardt and Negri have tried to respond to this and similar criticism by distinguishing between two different yet interrelated dimensions of their emancipatory subject, the “multitude.” They discern an ontological dimension that regards “the multitude from the standpoint of eternity” as that which “acts always in the present, a perpetual presence,” and a political or historical dimension that “will require a political project to bring it into being,” because it does not yet exist (Multitude 221). This “strange, double temporality” of the multitude as that which “always-already and not-yet” exists allows Hardt and Negri to deflect the charges of philosophical utopianism and of political vanguardism: “If the multitude were not already latent and implicit in our social being, we could not even imagine it as a political project; and, similarly, we can only hope to realize it today because it already exists as a real potential” (221-22). The multitude, in other words, is both present and future, real and imagined. It gradually steps into being as that which it always already was–an almost Hegelian conclusion that results directly from Hardt’s and Negri’s immanent ontology of abundance. In contrast, Laclau, Badiou, Rancière and Zizek argue that the subject emerges only in response to or in conjunction with the inevitable void that constitutes the social structure as a whole–a void that simply does not exist for Hardt and Negri. It follows that theorists of lack regard identities as inherently unstable and contingent. All identities need to be articulated (i.e., represented) politically; they do not simply unfold their always already inherent potential of being, as does Hardt’s and Negri’s multitude.

     

    Yet again, there exist important differences among theorists of lack in this regard as well, most notably in their respective reading of Lacan. Like Laclau, Badiou has acknowledged his indebtedness to Lacan, particularly in regard to their propensity for mathematical formulae.23 Yet Badiou has also insisted on a crucial difference between his and the Lacanian notion of the void. The latter relates to the subject, whereas Badiou’s relates to being: “Let us say that philosophy localizes the void as condition of truth on the side of being qua being, while psychoanalysis localizes the void in the Subject” (Infinite Thought 87). For Lacan, the subject figures a structural void within the symbolic order, Badiou argues. Thus, the Lacanian subject remains passive and severed from the emergence of an event that defies structural causality. Lacan’s structuralism, in Badiou’s view, does not allow for the possibility of a radically new beginning (i.e., a truth-event) taking place within a given Order or historical situation. To avoid this impasse, Badiou’s “evental” philosophy conceives of the subject not as void, but as the infinitely extended response to an event that exposes the void. This response, the decision of a “subject-to-be” that an event has taken place, initiates a truth-procedure that breaks through the reified state of the situation. According to Badiou, this account of subjectivity can overcome the legacy both of Lacan’s and of Althusser’s ahistorical structuralism. In Zizek’s words, both Badiou and Laclau try to resist what they perceive as the “Lacanian ontologization of the subject,” namely to identify the subject with “the constitutive void of the structure” (Ticklish 159). In contrast, Laclau and Badiou render the subject “consubstantial with a contingent act of decision” (159).

     

    But Zizek has also charged both Laclau and Badiou with misunderstanding and simplifying the temporal dynamism at work in Lacan’s structuralist version of subjectivity. According to Zizek, Lacan’s subject is not simply a structural void (as Badiou and Laclau claim), but emerges at this place only as the retrospective effect of its failed representation in language. Indeed, once this temporal paradox of Lacan’s “future anterior” is taken into consideration, Zizek argues, the very “opposition between the subject qua ontological foundation of the order of Being and the subject qua contingent particular emergence is [exposed as] . . . false: the subject is the contingent emergence/act that sustains the very universal order of Being” (160).

     

    Why should all this matter politically? It matters because if the subject indeed “sustains . . . the order of Being,” as Zizek maintains, then it can hardly go wrong with its actions, which is why Zizek affords a more militant rhetoric than others. For him, every authentic, militant act simultaneously alters the ethical categories by which it could it judged.24 Badiou is more careful at this point. Although he, too, argues for the interdependency of event and subject(ivity), the latter emerges in response to an event and not as its cause. The subject names the event and remains faithful to it, but it does not create the event as such. This opens up the possibility that a subject might misjudge and support an “event” that turns out to be catastrophic (for example totalitarianism).25 Most importantly, Badiou’s subject does not “sustain . . . the order of Being.” It sustains a particular state of the situation or supports its rupture, but it remains completely severed from Being qua Being, that is, from the ontological level of pure multiplicity that Badiou equates with mathematics. Laclau, finally, rarely refers to the “subject” at all–he prefers the term identity instead–nor does he speak of events or revolutionary change. For him, change always occurs within a given social structure through a different alignment of already existing political forces–hence his “reformist” theory as opposed to Badiou’s and Zizek’s “radicalism.” These differences about how to conceive of political subjectivity are most evident on the terminological level: while Zizek holds fast to the traditional Marxist notion of “class-struggle,” Rancière refers to the “proletariat . . . as the dissolution of all classes” (Disagreement 18)–and thus, in Laclau’s words, talks about class-struggle only “to add that it is the struggle of classes that are not classes” (Populist Reason 248)–whereas Laclau rejects any references to traditional class-struggle tout court.

     

    Concluding Remarks

     

    I have argued that the two major philosophical distinctions (immanence vs. transcendence, plentitude vs. lack) called upon to categorize the various proponents of a new political ontology are both important and insufficient. They are important because they help identify the overall goal of the ontological neo-left, which is political participation and collective inclusion in society. Their shared objective remains to overcome the inside/outside dialectic by means of a non-foundational ontology. But they are insufficient for two reasons: first, because they occlude other important similarities and distinctions that both sever and connect these theorists, as shown above. And second, because they are philosophical distinctions that claim to discern the political potential allegedly inherent in different ontologies. But we already know that there is no pre-determined path leading from philosophy to politics, from thought to action–unless we return to traditional metaphysics or orthodox Marxism. In Laclau’s and Mouffe’s terminology, we can say that there is no transparent or rational connection between the ontological and the ontic level. It is precisely this logical gap between philosophy and politics that enables or sustains the various efforts to build a bridge between the two. This gap also accounts for the recurrent charge against the ontological neo-left (and within the neo-left) of lacking a clear political program.

     

    But the existence of this logical gap does not mean that there is no connection at all between philosophy and politics, or that an innovative thought will not affect a given situation. It simply means that there is no rational or scientific proof for this eventuality, which, in the end, remains a matter of faith alone. As long as neo-left theorists embrace a non-essentialist ontology, questions about how best to achieve economic equality and social justice remain unanswerable–for if they could be answered, the ontology in question would no longer be “groundless” or unstable, but provide a dependable basis for how to change the world. For this reason alone, a non-essentialist ontology must always be “weak” in the sense that it remains “both fundamental and contestable,” as Stephen White has argued (2). Ontologies inspire and motivate political actors in fundamental ways, but they remain a matter of belief, not science. From this, White concludes that ontologies “are not simply cognitive in their constitution and effects, but also aesthetic-affective” (31)–this is precisely what makes them contestable in the first place. Ontologies literally live (i.e., they become embodied and practiced) by the credo of those who adhere to them, and this credo is not simply a matter of rational power or philosophical logic. There are other forces at work here, such as passion, unconscious beliefs and drives, aesthetics, and, above all, the way in which all of them are expressed, marketed, and “consumed.”

     

    I believe that the current discussion of political ontology would benefit from a stronger emphasis on this aesthetic-affective dimension of politics. There are some who are moving in this direction. Jacques Rancière, for one, fully acknowledges that “politics is a paradoxical form of action” and regards it as “first and foremost an intervention upon the visible and the sayable” (“Ten Theses” 34, 135). For Rancière, aesthetics is an irreducible part of both the political and of politics. Likewise, William Connolly argues that the best way to deal with the dispute between transcendence and immanence is to pursue an ethos of agonistic respect for each other:

     

    The pursuit of such an ethos is grounded in the assumption that residing between a fundamental image of the world as either created or uncreated and a specific ethico-political stance resides a sensibility that colors how that creed is expressed and portrayed to others . . . . An existing faith thus consists of a creed or philosophy plus the sensibility infused into it. (47-48)

     

    What mediates between philosophy and politics is an aesthetic sensibility or affect that cannot be rationalized without being lost. One of the reasons why the current philosophical discourse about ontology has become increasingly entrenched may be the disregard of its affective qualities. Hallward, for example, considers his politics of prescription “indifferent to the manipulations of passionate attachment.” Even though he acknowledges that “politics is always affective,” he nonetheless insists that “even the most affective prescription can be sustained only at a critical distance from the ‘passionate’ or ’emotional’” (“Politics” 785). And Laclau, too, considers affect “not something which exists on its own, independently of language; it constitutes itself only through the differential cathexes of a signifying chain” (Populist Reason 111). In other words, affect is the result of an equivalential logic; it is born of articulation instead of preceding it. In contrast, I believe it is crucial to maintain Brian Massumi’s distinction between affect and emotion: the latter refers to the linguistic representation of the raw, impersonal energy engendered by the former. After leaving behind traditional metaphysics and essentialist thinking, contemporary political ontology must now turn toward the affective realm of human existence as the new challenge for active thought.

     

    Notes

     

    1. For a different position arguing the renewed importance of Hegel in the context of neo-left ontology, see Nathan Widder, “Two Routes from Hegel,” in Tønder and Thomassen 32-49.

     

    2. This is also Oliver Marchart’s central point in “The Absence at the Heart of Presence: Radical Democracy and the ‘Ontology of Lack’,” in Tønder and Thomassen 17-31.

     

    3. Eva Geulen notes the strong ambivalence and hesitation that characterizes Agamben’s effort to dissociate Heidegger from Nazism. See Geulen 118-23.

     

    4. See also Adorno 73, as well as the subtitle of Adorno’s earlier essay on the “Jargon of Authenticity,” which explicitly categorizes Heidegger’s philosophy as a “German Ideology.”

     

    5. Cf. Adorno 104-25.

     

    6. In a brief review of Herbert Marcuse’s study of Hegel’s Ontology in 1932, Adorno praises Marcuse’s book precisely because it advocates this Marxist move away from “foundational ontology [Fundamentalontologie] toward the philosophy of history, from historicity to history” (Adorno 204). But he also criticizes Marcuse for holding fast to the ontological question at all: “one might wonder: why should the ontological question precede the interpretation of the real historical facts at all” (204)? Indeed, it should not, according to Marxist thought. For what trumps ontology are “real historical facts” and their critical reflection in the mind of the thinking subject.

     

    7. The emphasis here remains on the Marxist tradition as opposed to the actual writings of Marx, who uses the term “dialectics” only rarely and does not subscribe to the scientific Weltanschauung later proclaimed by orthodox Marxism. In fact, the term “dialectical materialism” is absent from the writings of Marx and Engels. Marx does not refer to the “laws” of history, but to mere “tendencies” inherent in historical developments. Nonetheless, dialectics is a crucial term for Engels, particularly for his attempted refutation of Kant’s transcendentalism in his Anti-Dühring (1878) and the later Dialectics of Nature (1883). And clearly dialectics does play a crucial role in twentieth-century Marxism, from Lenin and Stalin to Adorno, Althusser, and Jameson. My comments thus focus precisely on this “Persistence of the Dialectic,” as Jameson phrased it in 1990. See Jameson, Late Marxism.

     

    8. I realize that this distinction between contradiction and paradox is not customary in analytical philosophy, which focuses instead on that between “semantic” and “logical” paradoxes. According to Bunnin and Yu, “logical paradoxes . . . indicate that there must be something wrong with our logic and mathematics,” whereas semantic paradoxes “arise as a result of some peculiarity of semantic concepts such as truth, falsity, and definability” (632). From our own deconstructive perspective, of course, this analytical juxtaposition of “logic” and “semantics” is dubious at best, and Bunnin and Yu rightly note that this “distinction is not without controversy” (503). In contrast, my own distinction between contradiction and paradox seems more pertinent in our context. Indeed, Simon Blackburn defines contradiction with explicit reference to Hegel and Marx: “A contradiction may be a pair of features that together produce an unstable tension in a political or social system” (81; emphasis added). It is precisely this dualist understanding of contradiction that I want to distinguish from a single paradoxical proposition such as “This statement is false.”

     

    9. See also Adorno’s famous critique of Benjamin’s Arcades Project, according to which Benjamin’s study “is located at the crossroads of magic and positivism” because it lacks “mediation” and historical awareness (Schriften I/3 1096).

     

    10. For a detailed discussion of the term “constitutive outside” and its importance for radical democracy, see Thomassen.

     

    11. Butler opens the discussion with this question: “Can the ahistorical recourse to the Lacanian real be reconciled with the strategic question that hegemony poses, or does it stand as a quasi-transcendental limitation on all possible subject-formations and, hence, as indifferent to politics?” (Butler et al. 5). In response, both Zizek and Laclau never tire of dismissing this opposition as “a false one,” because, in Zizek’s words, “it is the very ‘ahistorical’ bar as the internal limit of the process of symbolization that sustains the space of historicity” (Butler et al. 214). Yet, Zizek also seeks to expose Laclau as a “closet-Kantian” (93), claiming that both Laclau and Butler “silently accept a set of premises” such as the capitalist market economy and the liberal-democratic political regime. It follows, for Zizek, that “all the changes they propose are changes within this economico-political regime” rather than moving beyond it (223). Laclau, in turn, recognizes “Zizek’s argument [as] a variation on Butler’s about transcendental limits and historicism . . . . while Butler’s charge was addressed to Zizek’s and my own work, Zizek is formulating the same objection against Butler and myself.” And although Laclau asserts that he “will refrain from joining the club and making the same criticism–this time against Butler and Zizek,” he proceeds to do precisely that in his final response (Butler et al., 200). See also Butler et al. 5, 34, 106, 183-85, 214, 289.

     

    12. I want to emphasize that in spite of Butler’s exasperated claim that Zizek’s and Laclau’s metaphorical vocabulary “unsettle(s) topography itself” (Butler et al. 141), she nonetheless shares their overall political goal, which is to facilitate political change. Butler disagrees with them about how best to conceptualize the political field such that this change becomes conceivable in the first place. Hence, as Laclau rightly notes, at issue in the debate is “the ontological constitution of the historical as such” (Laclau 2000, 183; emphasis added). Or, in Zizek’s words, “it is the problem . . . [of] how to historicize historicism itself” (Butler et al. 106).

     

    13. This is also the main distinction in Tønder’s and Thomassen’s excellent collection of essays on Radical Democracy.

     

    14. Most forcefully in Agamben, State of Exception,1-31 in particular.

     

    15. Although Agamben at times emphasizes the decisive role of modernity for the politicization of bare life, he also makes clear “that this transformation is made possible by the metaphysics of those very ancient categories [zoe and bios],” as Andrew Norris rightly observes (“Introduction” 2).

     

    16. Cf. Jameson’s “Marxism and Dualism in Deleuze,” 13-36.

     

    17. See Tønder and Thomassen, eds.

     

    18. As Bosteels puts it: “For Badiou, there emerges a speculative type of leftism whenever communism is disjoined, and nowadays supposedly set free, from the historicity intrinsic to the various stages of Marxism. The critique of speculative leftism in this sense is actually a constant throughout Badiou’s work” (“Speculative” 754).

     

    19. Paul Patton, for example, emphasizes the illocutionary power that Deleuze and Guattari attribute to language. In their view, Patton argues, “language use is not primarily the communication of information but a matter of acting in or upon the world” (4). Similarly Jean-Luc Nancy claims that, for Deleuze, “to create a concept is not to draw the empirical under a category: but to construct a universe of its own, an autonomous universe” (“Deleuzian Fold” 110). The connections to Derrida’s understanding of the political dimension of deconstruction are also relevant in this context.

     

    20. See Tønder and Thomassen, “Introduction” 8. In their own words: “life is what infuses and dominates all production. In fact, the value of labor and production is determined deep within the viscera of life” (Empire 365). Smith, for example, points to a lack of “extensive comments on specific debates about rights” (119) and mentions that Laclau in particular “embrace[s] an increasingly formal conception of hegemony in his recent work” (177) that all too often “does not offer any historically specific reference to a particular movement’s discourse” (190). Similarly, Torfing says that post-Marxist theory “has no ambition of furnishing a detailed and fully operationalized framework for the study of all kinds of social, cultural and political relations” (291).

     

    21. Cf. Badiou, Metapolitics 116. In contrast, Jean-Philippe Deranty refers to Rancière’s “paradoxical ontology” as an “anti-ontology.”

     

    22. Zizek was among the first to forge a connection between Laclau and Mouffe’s claim about the “impossibility” of the social and Lacanian terminology (“Beyond” 254). Since then, Laclau has explicitly acknowledged that his understanding of (an empty) universality is closely tied to Lacan’s notion of the Real and of the “petit object a” (cf. Laclau, New Reflections 235; Laclau, Emancipations 66-83; Butler et al. 64-73).

     

    23. See, for example, Badiou in Hallward, “Appendix” 121.

     

    24. I have discussed Zizek’s position at length in “Facing Zizek.”

     

    25. Badiou’s Ethics deals precisely with this problem.

     

    Works Cited

     

    • Adorno, Theodor W. Negative Dialektik. Jargon der Eigentlichkeit. Gesammelte Schriften. Ed. Rolf Tiedemann. Vol. 6. Frankfurt: Suhrkamp, 1973.
    • Agamben, Giorgio. The Coming Community. Trans. Michael Hardt. Minneapolis: U of Minnesota P, 1999.
    • —. Homo Sacer: Sovereign Power and Bare Life. Trans. Daniel Heller-Roazen. Stanford: Stanford UP, 1998.
    • —. Potentialities: Collected Essays in Philosophy. Ed. and trans. Daniel Heller-Roazen. Stanford: Stanford UP, 1999.
    • —. State of Exception. Trans. Kevin Attell. Chicago: U of Chicago P, 2005.
    • Badiou, Alain. Being and Event. Trans. Oliver Feltham. London: Continuum, 2005.
    • —. Ethics: An Essay on the Understanding of Evil. Trans. Peter Hallward. New York: Verso, 2001.
    • —. Infinite Thought: Truth and the Return to Philosophy. Trans. and ed. Oliver Feltham and Justin Clemens. London: Continuum, 2003.
    • Balibar, Étienne. The Philosophy of Marx. London: Verso, 1995.
    • Benjamin, Walter. Das Passagen-Werk. Gesammelte Schriften. Ed. Rolf Tiedemann. Vol. 5. Frankfurt: Suhrkamp, 1982.
    • Blackburn, Simon. The Oxford Dictionary of Philosophy. Oxford: Oxford UP, 1994.
    • Bosteels, Bruno. “The Speculative Left.” The South Atlantic Quarterly 104:4 (Fall 2005): 751-67.
    • Bourdieu, Pierre. Die Politische Ontologie Martin Heideggers. Trans. Bernd Schwibs. Frankfurt: Suhrkamp, 1988.
    • Bunnin, Nicholas, and Jiyuan Yu. The Blackwell Dictionary of Western Philosophy. Oxford: Blackwell, 2004.
    • Butler, Judith, Ernesto Laclau, and Slavoj Zizek. Contingency, Hegemony, Universality: Contemporary Dialogues on the Left. New York: Verso, 2000.
    • Connolly, William E. Pluralism. Durham: Duke UP, 2005.
    • Critchley, Simon. Ethics, Politics, Subjectivity. Essays on Derrida, Levinas, and Contemporary French Thought. New York: Verso, 1999.
    • Deleuze , Gilles. Pure Immanence: Essays on a Life. Trans. Anne Boyman. New York: Zone, 2001
    • Deleuze, Gilles, and Félix Guattari. What is Philosophy? Trans. Hugh Tomlinson and Graham Burchell. New York: Columbia UP, 1991.
    • Deranty, Jean-Philippe. “Rancière and Contemporary Political Ontology.” Theory and Event 6:4 (2003).
    • Derrida, Jacques. Aporias. Trans. Thomas Dutoit. Stanford: Stanford UP, 1993.
    • —. “Justice, Law and Philosophy–An Interview with Jacques Derrida.” South African Journal of Philosophy 18.3 (Aug. 1999): 279-87.
    • —. Limited Inc. Evanston: Northwestern UP, 1988.
    • —. “Marx & Sons.” Ghostly Demarcations: A Symposium on Jacques Derrida’s Specters of Marx. Ed. Michael Sprinker. London: Verso, 1999. 213-69.
    • Gasché, Rodolphe. “How Empty Can Empty Be? On the Place of the Universal.” Laclau: A Critical Reader. Ed. Simon Critchley and Oliver Marchart. New York: Routledge, 2004. 17-34.
    • Geulen, Eva. Giorgio Agamben: Zur Einführung. Hamburg: Junius, 2005.
    • Groys, Boris. Das Kommunistische Postskriptum. Frankfurt: Suhrkamp, 2006.
    • Hallward, Peter. “Appendix: Politics and Philosophy: An Interview with Alain Badiou.” Ethics: An Essay on the Understanding of Evil. Trans. Peter Hallward. New York: Verso, 2001. 95-144.
    • —. “The Politics of Prescription.” The South Atlantic Quarterly 104:4 (Fall 2005). 769-89.
    • Hardt, Michael, and Antonio Negri. Empire. Cambridge: Harvard UP, 2000.
    • —. Labor of Dionysus: A Critique of the State-Form. Minnesota: U of Minnesota P, 1994.
    • —. Multitude: War and Democracy in the Age of Empire. New York: Penguin, 2004.
    • Hegel, G.F.W. Wissenschaft der Logik. Hauptwerke in 6 Bänden. Vol 3. Darmstadt: Wissenschaftliche Buchgesellschaft, 1999.
    • Jameson, Fredric. “Actually Existing Marxism.” Polygraph 6/7 (1993): 170-95.
    • —. Archaeologies of the Future: The Desire Called Utopia and Other Science Fictions. London: Verso, 2005.
    • —. Late Marxism: Adorno, or, The Persistence of the Dialectic. New York: Verso, 1990.
    • —. “Marxism and Dualism in Deleuze.” A Deleuzian Century? Ed. Ian Buchanan. Durham: Duke UP, 1999. 13-36.
    • Laclau, Ernesto. “Can Immanence Explain Social Struggles?” Diacritics 31:4 (Winter 2001): 3-10.
    • —. Emancipation(s). New York: Verso, 1996.
    • —. New Reflections on the Revolution of Our Time. London: Verso, 1991.
    • —. “A Reply: Glimpsing the Future.” Laclau: A Critical Reader. Ed. Simon Critchley and Oliver Marchart. New York: Routledge, 2004. 277-328.
    • Laclau, Ernesto, and Chantal Mouffe. Hegemony and Socialist Strategy: Towards a Radical Democratic Politics. New York: Verso, 1985.
    • Macherey, Pierre. A Theory of Literary Production. Trans. Geoffrey Wall. London: Routledge, 1978.
    • Massumi, Brian. Parables for the Virtual: Movement, Affect, Sensation. Durham: Duke UP, 2002.
    • Nancy, Jean-Luc. Being Singular Plural. Stanford: Stanford UP, 2000.
    • Negri, Antonio. Time for Revolution. Trans. Matteo Mandarini. New York: Continuum, 2003.
    • Norris, Andrew, ed. “Introduction: Giorgio Agamben and the Politics of the Living Dead.” Norris 1-30.
    • —. Politics, Metaphysics, and Death: Essays on Giorgio Agamben’s Homo Sacer. Durham: Duke UP, 2005.
    • Patton, Paul. “Deleuze and Democratic Politics.” Tønder and Thomassen 50-67.
    • Rancière, Jacques. Disagreement: Politics and Philosophy. Trans. Julie Rose. Minneapolis: U of Minnesota P, 1999.
    • —. “Ten Theses on Politics.” Theory and Event 5:3 (2001).
    • Strathausen, Carsten. “Facing Zizek.” The Minnesota Review 61-62 (2004): 239-46.
    • Thomassen, Lasse. “In/Exclusions: Towards a Radical Democratic Approach to Exclusion.” Tønder and Thomassen 103-119.
    • Tønder, Lars and Lasse Thomassen, eds. Radical Democracy:. Politics Between Abundance and Lack. Manchester: Manchester UP, 2005.
    • Tønder, Lars and Lasse Thomassen. “Introduction.” Tønder and Thomassen 1-13.
    • White, Stephen K. “Affirmation and Weak Ontology in Political Theory: Some Rules and Doubts.” Theory and Event 4:2 (2000).
    • Zizek, Slavoj. “Beyond Discourse Analysis.” New Reflections on the Revolution of Our Time. Ernesto Laclau. London: Verso. 249-60.
    • —. “Introduction.” Deleuze: A Critical Reader. Ed. Paul Patton. Oxford: Blackwell, 1996. 1-17.
    • —. “Introduction: The Spectre of Ideology.” Mapping Ideology. Ed. Slavoj Zizek. London: Verso, 1994. 1-33.
    • Zizek, Slavoj. The Ticklish Subject: The Absent Center of Political Ontology. New York: Verso, 1999.
    • Zizek, Slavoj, and Glyn Daly. Conversations with Zizek. Cambridge: Polity, 2004.

     

  • The Speed of Beauty: Hans Ulrich Gumbrecht, Interviewed by Ulrik Ekman

    Ulrik Ekman

    Department for Cultural Studies and the Arts
    University of Copenhagen
    ekman@hum.ku.dk

     

    Professor Gumbrecht was interviewed after his visit in November 2005 at the Department for Cultural Studies and the Arts, Copenhagen University, Denmark, arranged by the Research Forum for Intermedial Digital Aesthetics directed by Ulrik Ekman. On that occasion, Gumbrecht gave a seminar titled “Benjamin in the Digital Age,” which focused on his editorial work with Professor Michael Marrinan (Stanford) on the essay anthology, Mapping Benjamin: The Work of Art in the Digital Age.

     

    This interview originated in conversations during Gumbrecht’s visit and continued to develop further ideas raised in the seminar. The interview took place mainly by email during the first three months following Gumbrecht’s Denmark seminar.

     

    This interview stretches the conventional limits of the genre in more ways than one. The initial agreement was that questions and answers would be exchanged several times, undergoing cuts or further articulation as each party found necessary, until a format and body of work acceptable to both was reached. The length of the interview as well as the scope and complexity of the questions and answers thus often exceed what one would normally expect. It has from the outset been a conscious decision to articulate and even to emphasize the participants’ differences of position or of approach.

     

    UE: The Dubrovnick seminar on the materialities of communication not only resulted in the publication of a very rich body of work,1 it also seems to have been of lasting importance for you. You refer frequently to this event as the high point of the seminar series,2 and one can see how it prefigures, among other things, your later work on post-hermeneutics, the production of presence, and meaning-effects. What was the motivation, at that time, for bringing specific attention to “materialities of communication,” and how do you work with that notion today?

     

    HUG: “Materialities of Communication” (back in the spring of 1987, if I remember correctly), in a still almost “Socialist” Yugoslavia, was indeed only one (the fourth) of four meetings that my friends and I organized on the Eastern Adriatic coast between 1981 and 1989. Our main motivation was, typically enough, as I might say today, to “keep alive” the theoretical and philosophical impulses in the humanities that came from the “earthshaking years” around 1970, but that we felt had been slowly ebbing since the early 1980s. I am saying “typically enough” because today, in a first and not yet totalizing retrospective, it is my impression that it has always been my task (at least my main ambition) to keep alive, and even to accelerate, intellectual movement. In those Dubrovnik years, I once said that I wanted to be a “catalyst of intellectual complexity”–and this certainly still holds true. Now, such a self-description implies that I care much less about “where” such intellectual movement will lead us. I care less about the “vectors” of our thinking than about its actual happening–and this works well with a general conception that I have of the humanities as being a (small) social system, which, rather than reducing complexity (which of course is necessary in general), adds to the intrinsic complexity of our societies. We should be less about solutions and more about producing new questions, i.e., more complexity. But back to your question, and my Dubrovnik decade–the 1980s. As I am implying, it was not very clear at the beginning of our colloquium series in which direction we could be successful with our intention to keep intellectual movement alive. What we first tried was a “revitalization” of the then-present moment through a study of the history of our disciplines. But this turned out to be too “antiquarian.” Then we tried two universally totalizing concepts, i.e., that of “historical periods” (in German: Epochen) and “style.” But in general, our experience pointed out the misery of any type of constructivism; that is, that there are certain concepts that one can endlessly expand so that, in the end, they don’t distinguish anything any longer. This was, in the mid-1980s, the moment–a moment quite loaded with frustration–when we were looking for a topic and a self-assignment that would offer us more conceptual and intellectual resistance. “Materialities of communication” seemed to be the solution–and I assure you that, while the actual invention of the topic caused great euphoria (I can still remember it: it happened on a Sunday morning on the beautiful marble-stoned main street of Dubrovnik), we didn’t quite know where it would lead us. It was in the most complete sense of the phrase: a “search concept.” Let me add, anecdotally, that the strongest reason for choosing this concept back in the mid-1980s, was the hope that it might contribute to a revitalization of a small materialist Marxism. This clearly remained an ambition–almost unbelievably, from my present-day perspective. Indeed, we organized those colloquia in Yugoslavia because Yugoslavia was the only country in that world that would let Westerners run academic colloquia and that offered, at the same time, the possibility of inviting colleagues from “behind the Iron Curtain” to participate.

     

    UE: It seemed obvious that both the concern with the materialities of communication and the ensuing inquiry into the limits of the hermeneutic tradition of either assuming or attributing meaning opened a host of difficult epistemological questions, not just as regards any stability for (socially) constructed meaning-effects but also respecting the centered, or at least consensual unity versus a fragmentary multiplicity of epistemological positions. You reflect upon this several times in your work, and I wonder how you see this problematic today. In addition, would there be a way to sketch out how the form and style of your writing were influenced by this? I am thinking here of the inventive and complex kinds of intermediary constellations or configurations that you elaborate in both In 1926 and Mapping Benjamin–in the first case via notions of arrays, codes, collapsed codes, and frames–and in the second case via the notion of mapping, the use of 16 critical terms, eight stations, and various nodes or knots between these…

     

    HUG: You know, you may have discovered something here that I have neither seen nor intended myself–which of course does not imply that what you are seeing is “wrong.” The subjective truth is, however, that, firstly, I have never cared all that much about those “epistemological” motifs that came with the threatening authority of prescriptions. While I do think it matters to care about the “cutting-edge,” in the sense of knowing “where it is,” and in the sense of having the ambition to really “be” “cutting-edge,” it is not in my temperament to follow certain fashions (I am too ambitious for that–it is rather my way to try and “found” my own fashion by departing from existing ones). Anyway, I have never thought that “epistemological fragmentation” was the order of the day, or the order of the year. What you are observing (correctly, no doubt) are “local” solutions to “local” problems. My main personal desire for the project that led to the 1926 book was to find a way (and, later on, a discursive form) that would allow me to produce this illusion of “full immersion into the past.” In the end, a “fragmentation” of my material into fifty-three “entries” seemed to be an appropriate discursive solution because it gave me the impression that I could “surround” myself (full immersion!) with those “fragmented” entries. In the Benjamin reader that I edited with Michael Marrinan, the question between the two editors (two editors, by the way, who never happened to agree easily–which is why I have such good memories of my collaboration with Marrinan)–anyway, the question was how we could “work through” and present “editorial discourse” on the work presented by the multiple (and very short) contributions to our volume. After long discussion, we constructed / “extracted” a certain (perhaps I would tend to say: all too complicated) conceptual grid along which Marrinan and I wrote our editorial commentaries. We felt that this was a way, if you will allow for this metaphor, to x-ray Benjamin’s essay sixty years after its first publication, with intellectual tools (to continue with the metaphor)–with a “technology”–that was very different from the prevailing intellectual tools of his time. I fear that this answer may be disappointing, because it is so unprogrammatic–but at least I am trying to tell you the truth.

     

    UE: One of the intriguing aspects of your work on the materialities of communication is the careful and repeated traversal of the relation between epistemological and ontological concerns. Your work displays, especially in its reiterated encounters with “presence,” an extremely intricate oscillation between a move, perhaps unavoidable, towards epistemological sense-making and conceptualization on the one hand, and, on the other, an at least formally opening move in the direction of ontological concerns, “ontology” here perhaps remaining altogether other, overwhelmingly complex, or socially and historically variable. Moreover, this oscillation seems informed by a problematization of ideality and the empirical both, just as it draws not only on modes of deconstructive differentiation from Heidegger through early Derrida but also, and perhaps especially, on the affirmative making of distinctions we find in the later Luhmann. How do you see this oscillation today, and how do you undertake the navigation between incessantly complicating deconstructive gestures towards “presence”–such as the early Derrida’s concern with the “exteriority of writing” or Jean-Luc Nancy’s notion of the “birth to presence”–and the frequent reduction of complexity in Luhmann’s social systems theory, from its centering on semantics in the mid-80s through the later elaboration of autopoeisis and observation?

     

    HUG: Let me start by admitting that, in a not-so-remote past, I cherished the word “ontology” because it was such a “dirty word,” the word with the worst possible philosophical reputation–a word, therefore, that had an enormous potential for provocation. This “explosive” situation, unfortunately, has faded away–and at times, I accuse or pride myself on having made a certain contribution to this development. But, more seriously, my best way of saying what I am referring to by “ontology,” is, surprisingly, I hope, to say that the word refers to an epistemological situation, an epistemological feeling that is no longer completely obedient to the premises and prejudices imposed by the so-called “linguistic turn.” Yes, I refuse to accept what Foucault, Luhmann, and ultimately even Derrida almost joyfully accepted, i.e., that it is neither possible nor desirable to “speak,” or even to think, about anything that is outside of language. Of language, or, in Luhmann’s terms, outside of “communication,” i.e., outside of those systems, all social systems and the psychic system, whose functioning is based on “meaning.” It turns out that, quite simply, I am fascinated by things, i.e., by that which is “not language”–I have, for example, long felt that it is stupid and counterproductive to describe sex as a form of communication (I never forget to tell my undergraduate students that, if they want to communicate, they should rather use language than sex). A more academic way of perhaps expressing the same would be to say that there is nothing wrong with “post-linguistic turn” philosophy–the basic argument is of course quite convincing: that nothing outside of language can ever be grasped by our minds. But this leaves us with a relatively narrow range of possibilities for thinking. Now, if thinking in the humanities is genuinely “riskful thinking” (just another way of saying that the humanities should produce complexity), then we have a right and an obligation to rebel against such reductions in the range of thought-possibilities (as has been advocated for almost a century now by what we call “analytic philosophy”). This is a way of saying what, despite his quite repulsive biography, I cannot help but be fascinated by Heidegger’s philosophy: it is a philosophy that does not care about the premises and prescriptions coming from the “linguistic turn.” Derrida, unfortunately, as far as I am concerned, soon abandoned a motif that was strong in his earlier work, the motif of the “exteriority of the signifier” (as my Chicago colleague David Wellbery called it), a motif that could have made his philosophy a “non-linguistic turn” philosophy. But he ended up embracing linguistic absolutism and Hermeneutics, its Teutonic equivalent. Luhmann, in this sense, was a linguistic-turn philosopher right from the beginning, i.e., from his very first programmatic essay–which had the title “Meaning as Basic Concept of Sociology.” But, after all, why should my heroes from the previous intellectual generation necessarily be those who have already thought everything that I myself might desire to think?

     

    UE: The editor of the first anthology to present in English a fuller range of your early texts was Wlad Godzich, who was also one of the contributors to The Materialities of Communication. You refer more than once to his essay in the latter, which delineates a very interesting history of the crisis of legitimation for language and literacy vis-à-vis the hegemony of images, especially in a contemporary culture of digital technology and media.3 As regards image-culture today Godzich remarks towards the end of his essay that we are “living in the midst of a prelogical affirmation of the world, in the sense that it takes place before the fact of logos, and it threatens us with an alienation that modern thinkers could barely conceive” (368). According to him, this means that we are now “inhabited by images that we have not drawn from ourselves, images of external impressions that we do not master and that retain all their agential capability without being mediated by us” (369). It is not just that world, subject, and language thereby lose stability and fixation as was the case with the modern putting into motion of these concepts, something which still permitted constructive solutions in the sense that modes of control over velocities could be achieved, along with effects of stability and management of instabilities. Rather, what Godzich has in mind here, echoing Virilio’s concern with such acceleration, is that today “the technology of images operates at the speed of light, as does the world” (370), something which at best allows one to ask whether language can indeed bring the speed of the image under control, turning images into some new kind of language. Godzich, of course, is not alone in pointing out the problematic vicissitudes of the digital image; in fact, there is still no consensus on an aesthetics of the digital image, in spite of the laudable efforts of Sean Cubitt, Edmond Couchot, W.J.T. Mitchell, Jonathan Crary, Bernard Stiegler, Mark B. Hansen, and quite a few others.4 We still seem to be left with discussions about the very possibility or impossibility of framing the digital image, prior to any more elaborate or differentiated engagement that retains notions of aesthesis, whether more traditional or as regards relations to, or breaks from, the avant-garde. When you concur in your texts that we do, as Godzich has it, live in a world of floating images, how do you see the relation of images and language, and in what ways do digital images enter your work?

     

    HUG: I was just saying earlier that I am inclined (not to say eager) to find that my very impressive predecessors (although I have never seen them in a “Harold Bloomian” way, as all too threatening)–that my very impressive predecessors have left something for me to think. But now you have jumped–and you seem to confront me with a question that, from my perspective, seems to be a question/an assignment for the next generation (although you are referring to my friend Wlad Godzich, who is three years older than I). Anyway, to really think about what it means to be increasingly surrounded by and immersed in an environment of “floating images” is, from my point of view, a question for the next generation, because I, frankly, try to be as little surrounded by “floating images” as I possibly can. I have nothing on earth against TV, for example (on the contrary, my family may well hold the record for the most TV hours per week for an academic family). But I personally (and atypically, within my family) don’t like TV. The truth is that I regularly fall asleep in front of the TV screen–even if I am not tired at all, even if I am watching the most exciting thing for me, i.e., sports and athletic events. So I am just not in a good position to analyze “floating images”–although I of course acknowledge that the question is important.

     

    But let me try to say something more general (from the wisdom of my age?) about the character of such tasks. It is my impression and my criticism that your generation, i.e., the “media theory-generation,” is always trying to come up with the “genius formula,” the “genius intuition,” when it comes to describing and analyzing such phenomena. Patiently working on and developing a network of distinctions (I know I now sound like an analytic philosopher) does not seem to be your thing. Many protagonists of your generation (and of my own) do look strangely “Hegelian” to me–but Hegelian with the ridiculous ambition to be geniuses and geistreich. Like those late nineteenth-century naturalists who were “hunting butterflies” with nets, and never caught any. Virilio, for example, looks to me like the embodiment of such bad intellectual taste; I have never managed to read any of his texts all the way through. Very seldom, Friedrich Kittler participates in such lapses of bad taste–but his best pages are of course sublime–and the admirable phenomenon is that most of his pages are “best pages.” Anyway, I am trying to make a pledge for patient and descriptive accuracy. Following this pledge, one will discover that we are of course not as exclusively surrounded by “floating images” as Godzich would have it. Not our entire world is MTV. Most of us are also surrounded, for many hours a day, by the environment of electronic mail and of the Internet, which is, after all, still a “verbal” environment. Now, the new thing, the thing yet to be analyzed by a good phenomenological description, is that, on the one hand, visual perception (“images”) is less embodied and requires different reactions from our bodies than visual perception that is not produced by a screen. On the other hand, communication by email and by the Internet “feels” different, in this very bodily sense, from writing a text by hand or on the typewriter, and from receiving a “traditional” letter on either beautiful or cheap stationery. The simple proof is, for me (if this observation requires proof at all), that I miss that old-fashioned type of correspondence every day when I look into my (real space) mailbox in the mailroom of my building at the university–and see that it is empty; whereas the “mailbox” on my screen contains around five hundred new electronic messages every day. Now, I shouldn’t fall back (or “fall ahead”) onto that tone of cultural criticism; all I want to say is that not only do I not have a formula for describing our profoundly changed communicative environment, I feel that one should not even go for such a formula. In more critical terms: I think that media research and media theory would have made much more sense and much more progress if it had concentrated more insistently and more broadly on good descriptions.

     

    UE: One of the recurring debates about the digital image concerns the question whether the condition of “post-photography” and the variability or manipulability of the digital image entail a more or less complete departure from ontological and realistic representational dimensions. Currently, Mitchell is very much concerned to counter exactly such leave-takings of realism, and others try to point out how work in this area does not exclude notions of realism in the first place and, secondly, is not unidirectional but rather seems to be undergoing a more differentiated development. In particular, Lev Manovich points out that the almost unlimited digital simulation in cinematic post-production that we know from the Wachowski brothers’ The Matrix, and from virtuality-oriented art more generally, now increasingly seems to be supplemented by new modes of work that focus on sampling rather than on pure simulation, or on documentary video realism rather than on the full-scale special effects of Hollywood cinema.5 If we keep in mind the rich set of focal interests for the study of the materialities of communication, how do you view such debates over the “real” status of (moving) digital images?

     

    HUG: Unfortunately I am not familiar with most of the works–artistic and academic–that you are invoking here. In this case, my ignorance has no excuse; it is sheer ignorance, and not a judgment, as in the case of Virilio, whose work I find grotesquely overrated. Sometimes, if you will allow me this remark, I am astonished to see–and grateful at the same time–that I have survived the challenges of an academic life, being the slow reader that I am. I read slowly, I spend a lot of time taking and making notes, and I write comparatively much. But that feeling of being “behind,” of not reading enough, of not responding to so many questions, grows, the older I get–and unfortunately, this is not just secretly self-congratulatory rhetoric. This is the reason why my reaction to your question about the “reality-status” of “moving” and digital images has to be all too general and abstract. Whatever degree of “reality” you want to invest them with of course depends on the epistemological premises, the philosophical system, or the conceptual network within which you are asking this question. Each framework (think of analytic philosophy, systems theory, deconstruction–you name it) will produce a more or less predictable answer. What I find interesting (and not in the sense of a judgment) is that I, for example (and I believe: like many people of my age) have a hard time reacting to (and an even harder time connecting with) some of these digital effects and miracles. I do not deny their value and their potential merit; it does not astonish me to see that you, for example, really enjoy and appreciate them. But in my case, they have produced a paradoxical reaction. The more I see myself confronted and surrounded by a technologically mediated environment of stimuli, the more I enjoy that which, at least from a naïve standpoint, is not mediated. As I said before, there is a huge difference for me between watching a game of American football on TV or in the stadium–and I am well aware that I see “less” in the stadium. As I am answering your questions, I am looking through the window of my library carrel, across the red roofs of the buildings of Stanford University, in their strangely nineteenth-century Spanish Colonial style–and in the background, I see a mountain range, and, faintly, the wings of a white bird. I find this moving; I wish I had learned earlier to be more a part, with my own body, of this natural and physical environment. Now, I am not talking (at least not mainly talking) about “ecological politics.” What I am trying to point to is an aesthetics, perhaps an impossible aesthetics, of “immediate experience”–which no doubt, in my case, depends on being overfed and overstimulated by manmade technologies. Yes, this is very romantic; you may even call it kitsch. But I do not seem to be the only one, at least in my generation. Read, for example, the book of my good friend and closest colleague Robert Harrison, The Dominion of the Dead. This book is about rediscovering a feeling for the ground we walk on as the ground that contains the remnants of our predecessors. It is a feeling that we have largely lost, and I will admit that this (objective) loss has only become a (subjective) loss for me in the past few decades.

     

    UE: You open your co-edited essay anthology Mapping Benjamin: The Work of Art in the Digital Age, by introducing the coupling of two critical terms, aesthetics and perception, as part of the reactualization of Benjamin’s work today. In the treatment of perception you point out that we might understand the intellectual background of “aura” as “Benjamin’s last-ditch effort to save, in the face of a growing challenge from technology, the physical limits of our human bodies as the yardstick of perception itself” (7). More specifically, you see in Benjamin’s polarization of “cult value” and “exhibition value” a certain reintroduction of the traditional philosophical dualism of what you call nativist and empiricist models of perception. On this view Benjamin seems unable or unwilling to consider perception in a technologically expanded field. Could one understand you as saying that he allows for an opening, at the very least, of the question respecting whether and how “the fundamental parameters of perception itself might escape the limits of our physical bodies” (6)? In that same passage regarding perception, and the missing link in Benjamin to seemingly inhuman models of perception, you describe today’s dominant model of perception as based on the body qua “information processor”–one that “deploys a complex system of long-term and short-term memory storage, of hierarchical coding schemes, and a modular chain of cognitive operations very much like a computer” (6). In that case, embodied perception would be attuned to the production, dissemination, and reception of digital data. While the reception of Benjamin’s mechanical production essay is famously multiplicitous, at least two recent efforts draw extensively on Benjamin as a source of inspiration for a materialist theory of digital media and a notion of the lived body as the framing capacity vis-à-vis digital art. I am thinking here of the reactualization of Benjamin and cinematic paradigms in Manovich’s widely read study, The Language of New Media, and of Mark B. Hansen’s more recent New Philosophy for New Media, which opens by citing Benjaminian perception as a source of hope for the survival of media today in spite of digital convergence and various posthuman positions. Hansen devotes his entire text to fleshing out the notion of the body as the framer of information artworks. In addition, at least two of the essays in Mapping Benjamin, by Bolz and Werber, go quite far, albeit differently, towards actualizing Benjamin’s notion of the “training of perception” as something valuable today. I know that bodily being-there, the experience proper to the life world, as well as (mediated) spectatorship and/or participation figure very prominently in your work, including in the recent text on athletic beauty.6 How do you see Benjamin, the body, and the training of perception in our digital age?

     

    HUG: Of course I find Benjamin’s essay (which someone told me is the most frequently cited essay in the academic humanities) very important–otherwise I would not have invested my time into a collective volume discussing it. But I find it important as a symptom of its own time, the late 1930s, of its specific sensitivities, hopes, and above all prognostics. For me (and I know how irreverent this may sound), Benjamin’s prognostics were about as grotesquely wrong as Jules Vernes’s imagination of the future world (although it is very interesting that, in both cases, intellectuals passionately insist on how miraculously right they both were). Look, for example, at how Benjamin predicts that aura will disappear–whereas our contemporary truth is that so many more artifacts than in the mid-twentieth-century have become “auratic.” If, in Benjamin’s time, a drawing by Paul Klee or a picture by Picasso had an aura, today we consider even the (very “selective”) posters (I always find a touch of kitsch there) of Klee and Picasso exhibits auratic, and subsequently frame them. Or take the moving but completely erroneous idea that a multiplication of “cameramen” would entail some effect of “emancipation” (whatever this may mean). Technologically, this has happened. But I cannot imagine that anyone would seriously claim that running through the world with a camcorder, or being able to take photographs with a cell phone, has had any “emancipatory” effect. Now, I am not blaming Benjamin–I think his essay is a bundle of strong intellectual intuitions–whose incoherence (and I mean it in the sense of “glorious incoherence”) has probably contributed to the unique breadth of its reception. But give me a break! Can people be serious when they claim that Benjamin’s concepts will help us to analyze our present-day media environment? This would be even more hilarious than to claim that scientific labs of the late 1930s were superior in terms of the “truth value” that they produced, than contemporary labs. So I won’t even begin to discuss the question of whether Benjamin’s concepts or intuitions can be helpful in analyzing our present-day technological and media environment. They can definitely not. The interesting question is, once again, why so many of my colleagues, specifically younger colleagues (colleagues of your generation), are so obsessed with and so insistent in finding more than inspiration, in finding, indeed, “Truth,” in the classics of our field. It is as if today, very different from those days around 1980, when my friends and I (with the beginning of the Dubrovnik colloquia) tried “to keep intellectual movement alive” we have fallen under a paralysis or a prohibition of independent thinking. Why do those who are interested in digital art not use their own competence to describe and analyze it, to develop theories? Why do you read Benjamin with the hope of finding help for the analysis of contemporary technology, instead of thinking for yourselves?

     

    UE: I was quite intrigued when watching the opening ceremony of the most recent Olympic Games–for on that occasion bodily presence, perception, participation, and the spectacle of the sports event all seemed to be displaying in uncircumventable ways the changes our culture and our life world are currently undergoing due to digital augmentation and the pervasiveness of computing. I am not just talking about the real time or “live” televising with multiple cameras and the big screens on the stadium, but also about the fact that a most of the spectators present and the participants themselves were carrying and actively using cellular phones, digital cameras, as well as digital video cameras. “Presence,” “being-there,” and “participation” here rather obviously included the navigation through the augmented dimension, in the sense of engaging with quite complicated overlays of physical space and data spaces, place and tele-distance–just as the pervasiveness of computing made it difficult, if not impossible, to distinguish clearly between embodied and digital perception at the level of at least the audio-visual and the haptic or tactile. You have written extensively on sports events, spectatorship, participation, and the relation to the media,7 but today how is one to make sense of, and is one indeed to make sense of, so many athletes and spectators pointing and waving with one hand, while talking right there as well as via their wireless headsets, and video recording with the other hand?

     

    HUG: Yes, this time I am familiar with the (screen) images that you are referring to. I have seen those closing ceremonies of the Olympic Games, for example, where the athletes whom we see on the screen have nothing better to do than to shoot photographs or use their cell phones. Frankly (and after the first part of our conversation, you won’t be surprised to hear this), I find these images depressing–I certainly cannot identify with this attitude. Had I ever had the privilege of participating in the Olympic Games, I would have tried to indulge, as best I could, in the immediacy (here is this kitsch word again!) of every moment. It wouldn’t have crossed my mind to become an amateur reporter–and why would I ever take photos or produce a video in order to enjoy the event retrospectively, instead of enjoying the event in real time? But this movement and practice have a long history, meanwhile. When my four children (today 27, 23, 16 and 14 years old) were born, I was of course present in the delivery room–and, quite honestly, I cannot remember any other moments or events that I have found more impressive or incisive for my life. But alreaady at that time (back in the spring of 1978), there were dads who filmed the “event” with their camcorders. I found that obscene–but even forgetting the criticism of “obscenity”–how can one possibly forego the immediacy of the event in order to prepare for a retrospective viewing? Now, let me become self-critical here: there is clearly something that I do not get. Of course these children, today, use their computers as photo albums; they edit pictures; they fast-forward through them; they enjoy them in a way that I cannot follow–I always want to tell them that I want to take more time with each picture (and I no longer dare to tell them that I would so like to have a print–and an album full of prints). It is as if the speed of beauty was not for me.

     

    UE: This problematic of sense-making, assumption or attribution of meaning, and of semantics generally has been a lasting concern, indeed one of the most indisputable and energized foci of your work. It is evident in your approaches to the everyday life world on psychological and socio-cultural planes both, and in your reconsideration of what the role of meaning can be in the encounter with art and the spectacle, but perhaps it is enjoying special foregrounding in your explicit reflections upon the difficult challenges posed by a new epistemology that does not grant that traditional kind of privilege to interpretation and hermeneutics which we find not least in Germany. What was the original motivation for your questioning of interpretation, and what do you consider to be the more or less unmet challenges today for post-hermeneutic epistemology, or epistemologies?

     

    HUG: Although I get the impression that this, the “non-hermeneutic” epistemology, is what colleagues and readers most associate with my work and with me, this is indeed a good question in many ways. The most banal way in which it is a good question (and the most interesting one for me personally) is that if I am such a verbally exuberant person, someone who always interprets, who always attributes meaning, why am I so radically against the “universality claim of hermeneutics”? Of course I will not venture any kind of self-reflexive psychoanalysis here. Let me admit, rather, that there is clearly some academico-Oedipal dynamic at play here–about which I have recently written for the first time (symptomatically enough, the essay was first published in Russian, but will soon come out in the American journal Telos8. My own Doktorvater and first academic boss (whose name I had sworn I would not mention in the public sphere again) was a great admirer (rather than a student, as he claimed) of Hans-Georg Gadamer, who was himself a student of Heidegger–who was a student of Husserl; this is a heavy genealogy already, which, despite a remark I made earlier in our conversation, probably did incite some Oedipal energies. But while I have come to greatly admire Gadamer’s work (and Heidegger’s even more so), I have always hated the authoritarian way in which my academic advisor handled interpretation–even more so when he pretended that his method was “dialogic.” Another, very German, way of answering your question would be to say that what separated that advisor of mine and myself was the (never to be underestimated) distinction between German Protestant culture and German Catholic culture. While my parents did not give me an orthodox Catholic upbringing, I was an altar boy, I enjoyed incense, sumptuous religious rituals, the “real presence” of God in the Eucharist–rather than the Lutheran insistence on the gospels, the Word, and their meaning. Some people have said that I am simply “sensual”–and of course I hope that this is also true. Nevertheless, I believe–or should I say: I fear?–that the Oedipal (self-)interpretation goes a long way in my case.

     

    UE: When reading through your texts on post-hermeneutic epistemology as an historical sequence, according to their date of publication, my impression is that a certain transformation is gradually taking place: the earlier texts appear quite a lot more radical, either in their call for a strict departure from hermeneutics and sense-making or in their emphasis on the severity of the difficulties that work on a new epistemology is facing, and the later texts sketch out a more balanced and consensus-seeking approach to meaning-production and interpretation. I am thinking of certain earlier passages in Making Sense in Life and Literature and in Materialities of Communication as read in dialogue with the more recent comments in The Production of Presence. Let me try to unfold this a bit.

     

    In the first of these texts you point out that: “the proposal to analyze sense making as an intrasystemic operation depending on each system’s specific environment (without ‘picturing’ it) generates the new question of whether we have to count, according to the high variation in the frame conditions of sense making, on a multiplicity of different modalities in sense and meaning” (Making Sense 12). You remark that you are not taking any answer to this question for granted but rather consider its pursuit “important in an epistemological situation in which we have been aware for quite a long time of the fact that our concepts for the description and the analysis of sense making turn out to be insufficient whenever we apply them to contemporary culture (12). At that time your conclusion was first that we were facing the task of inventing “a new epistemology capable of theorizing and analyzing ways of sense making that perhaps no longer include effects of ‘meaning’ and ‘reference,’” and, secondly, that so far we “simply do not know what interfaces such as those between TV and psychic systems, or between computers and social systems, look like.” Accordingly, the question of “sense making” might continue to be the issue at hand, but this would no longer hold for meaning, representation, and reference–which leads one to suspend the question whether “our dealing with new modes of sense making will make sense” (13).

     

    In your closing essay for the second volume you undertake a more detailed macro- and micro-mapping of the urgent tasks for projects working on materialities of communication, and your key hypothesis here is that quite a few emergent theory-positions could be seen to converge in a shared problematizing of conceptualizing the humanities as hermeneutics, i.e., “as a group of disciplines grounded on the act of interpretation as their core exercise” (Materialities 396). In the case of the inquiry into the materialities of communication, such problematizing of interpretation would cause, you remark, a shift in the main perspective of investigation. This shift would go “from interpretation as identification of given meaning-structures to the reconstruction of those processes through which structures of articulated meaning can at all emerge” (398). Rather than assuming given meaning or unproblematic attribution of such meaning, the projects gesturing towards the materialities of communication would thus be trying to take care of all the phenomena that somehow contribute to the constitution of meaning without being meaning themselves. Hence the difficult question whether and how it is at all possible for psychic and social systems to constitute meaning, a question that simultaneously pursues a replacement of “interpretation” with “meaning constitution” and seeks to pay much more attention to the human body and the physical qualities of signifiers.

     

    In contrast to such marked departures towards a rather decidedly post-hermeneutic condition, The Production of Presence emphasizes the various ways one should precisely not take you to be opposing or abandoning meaning, signification, and interpretation. For example, when reflecting upon Derrida’s early remark that “the age of the sign” will “perhaps never end. Its historical closure, however, is outlined,” you point out that whatever else this kind of “beyond” might involve, putting an end to the age of the sign and the metaphysics of presence can “certainly not mean that we would abandon meaning, signification, and interpretation” (Derrida, Of Grammatology 14; Gumbrecht, Production of Presence 52).9 Rather, if we are to talk of such a “beyond” and of what it would take to end metaphysics, this can, you emphasize, “only mean something in addition to interpretation–without, of course, abandoning interpretation as an elementary and probably inevitable intellectual practice” (52).

     

    Some of this perceived change in your work could, of course, just be due to a later, strategic response on your part, not least because you have been misread so often on this score, but if there is some truth to the impression of such a gradual change of your position, could you elaborate on the implications of this movement you now seem to be gesturing towards, a movement somehow between interpretative meaning and a “beyond” whose birth is otherwise? HUG: You are right, the insistence on the “non-hermeneutic” character of my work has certainly changed over the past decades (or over the past two decades)–my tone has become more conciliatory. I will not even try to deny that this is, partly at least, an effect of (incipient?) old age, and of becoming more established. I wouldn’t go so far, as a Berlin newspaper recently did, as to say that I have now “joined the club of toothless old ex-intellectuals”–but, yes, it would be pathetic to try to maintain a full-fledged “Oedipal energy” at age 57. But the most important answer to your question–at least for me–lies elsewhere. As I mentioned before, when we organized the “Materialities of Communication” colloquium, when I was experimenting with a concept (if it was a concept at all) such as the “non-hermeneutic,” it was not quite clear where this journey would take me–if it took me anywhere at all. This fact, that I had a vague feeling and intuition of wanting to find something like an “alternative” to hermeneutics and interpretation, made it more or less necessary to be very radical. Ever since I “found” (not the Promised Land, but) the dimension of “presence,” since I have begun to develop, as best I could, a network of concepts regarding presence, I can afford to be less fanatical. Besides that, would it not be ridiculous to “deny” the existence of meaning and of interpretation? Of course we do interpret all of the time; it is (Heidegger was right) one of our more basic existential conditions–up to the point that I would confirm that we cannot not interpret. But the point is (and here again, I turn against the “linguistic turn,” that there is more to our lives than just interpretation; there is what I call “presence”–and there might well be other dimensions that, like presence, our Western philosophical tradition has abandoned and neglected for many centuries. So, to come back to your question, the answer is that I believe that I could begin to be more open to “meaning” again as soon as I had a clearer conception of what was the non-hermeneutic dimension on which I wanted to concentrate.

     

    UE: I was particularly intrigued by the possible convergences between your notion of an in-between movement for sense-making and a different production of presence on the one hand, and the situation facing one in the contemporary field of digital art and aesthetics. Perhaps the latter can be seen to be almost the obverse of the traditional privileging or taking for granted of meaning and interpretation in the humanities. That is, digital artworks more often than not present one with the difficulty or even impossibility of sense making, seeing that whatever we might take to be meaningful here implies and originates from digital media, communication, discrete code and programs, and technology–all of which most often operate well beyond human ratios of perception, or well beyond the speeds of either embodied interaction or conceptualization. This is most evident when purely technological and machinic agency drives the artwork, but it appears in video installations and hyperfictions depending on human interaction as well–for example, in Bill Viola’s work with technological and media-specific slowness or acceleration as paths towards the delimitation and/or reactualization of affect in Anima (2000), or in Urs Schreiber’s sometimes rather radical departures from printed text, literacy, literariness, and the tradition of the book in Das Epos der Maschine (2001). Would it be possible to see in your recent work the emergence of a more visible limit, border, skin, communicative membrane, or level of structural coupling between sense making and “presencing”: constitutive of meaning in various ways and yet vanishing in the very birth to presence of sense, sensation, and the sensible? What would the prospects be, do you think, of approaching meaning-effects and presence in the area of digital art and aesthetics via your reflections on such an in-between, perhaps more specifically via your notions of rhythm, oscillation, and speed?

     

    HUG: No doubt you are right. I think my old “Oedipal” and radical denial of the hermeneutic dimension has morphed into an insistence on the difficult, tense, always complex and never “natural” cohabitation of “meaning” and “presence.” When I talk about “oscillations” between meaning and presence, I mean “oscillation” in the sense of a pluraletantum–there is a variety of such oscillations–and given that the variety might be endless, I am simply not sure at this point whether it makes sense, as I used to think, to work towards a “typology” of such oscillations. Clearly, however, the proportion–the “weight,” if you will–of “meaning” in relation to “presence” is different for different media. It would certainly be hilarious to say that, in reading a novel, the material “presence” effects of the book are as important as the meaning conveyed by the text. Instrumental music might be the opposite: we can certainly not help but produce associative meanings while we are listening to music–but I believe that these meanings are highly personal, futile, and that they ultimately draw our attention away from what only music can provide: the beautiful feeling of being wrapped in the light and soft touch of the materiality of sounds.

     

    UE: In your more recent engagements with art and aesthetics you explicitly reintroduce the distinction between the beautiful and the sublime, but now with the intent of foregrounding and granting a different privilege to beauty and the beautiful. Perhaps this move has an element of surprise to it and is not immediately part of the intuitive horizon of expectation for many readers–considering the import of the limits of the Kantian imagination for, say, Heidegger’s relatively early work, the attention paid to the sublime in several strands of what often passes under the somewhat homogenizing rubric of poststructuralism, the role played by overwhelming complexity in a Luhmannian notion of art as a social system, or the emphasis in many other efforts towards a contemporary aesthetics that cares for the avant-garde or for the strict singularity of the experience of art. So, my question is triple, I think: What is at stake in this actualization and bringing into movement of the beautiful, under what conditions do digital works of art present beauty from your perspective, and do the experience of art as well as art as a social system retain a distinguishable or even privileged role in contemporary culture?

     

    HUG: Again, you have it right–and I am beginning to be scared by how familiar you are with my thought, far beyond what I make explicit and (sometimes at least) have come to understand myself. But there is nothing terribly programmatic or symptomatic about my “preference” for the beautiful (in comparison to “the sublime”). As I said before, it seems to lie in my temperament that I want to speak about “the beautiful,” but everyone else seems to concentrate on the sublime (about “the non-hermeneutic,” when everyone else discusses interpretation), about literature “itself,” when everybody feels that theory is the only thing, and so forth. In this very (ultimately banal) spirit, some of my colleagues and I, back in the early 1990s, had planned to work towards an issue of an academico-intellectual journal on “Beauty”–but, fortunately for us, the journal did not survive, and some of its projects shared this fate. A project from the same journal that did survive, by the way, is the volume on Benjamin that we have discussed. The one case where I have used the concept of “the beautiful” quite systematically (and to a certain extent: to my surprise), was my book In Praise of Athletic Beauty. While I am of course not saying that watching sports does not have any “sublime” moments, I am convinced that, in most cases of spectator sports, “beauty” (according to Kant: the impression of purposiveness without purpose) is the more feeling concept than the sublime. Not unexpectedly, several reviewers have taken issue with this opinion–but, interestingly enough, they never argued about it. It was as if they wanted to say that there was one and only one category to describe aesthetic experience, and that was “the sublime.”

     

    UE: The field of digital art has focused from the late 1980s to the last half of the 1990s on virtuality and thus on immersion, simulation, and abstract or even transcendent self-reference as aesthetic paradigms–witness such works as Charlotte Davies’s Osmose (1995) and Ephemere (1998)–the history and structures of which have been charted quite engagingly in Oliver Grau’s book on virtual art. However, already with Jeffrey Shaw’s Eve (1993) and ConFIGURING the CAVE (1996), the focus has shifted not only towards the use of physical and architectural structures to achieve immersion effects, but towards opening up embodiment and the relation between the body and space as altogether dominant issues. When one considers the subsequent developments in the field, one is tempted to diagnose symptoms of what one might call “the physical turn” of digital art. For instance, the works in tele-presence by Roy Ascott, Ken Goldberg, and Eduardo Kac, the broadening of interest in transgenic art and artificial life, the entry on stage of augmentation not only in everyday and commercial culture but also in more classical art forms such as in Christian Ziegler’s dance performance scanned I-V (2000-01), and the very recent peaking of interest in pervasive computing–all of this bespeaks amarked change of aesthetic focus which seems to bring us far away from the Cartesianism evident in William Gibson’s early exploration of the notion of “cyberspace” or in most earlier artistic and critical theoretical engagements with virtuality. But perhaps this change is most visible and tangible in the rather radical widening of the field of digital art and aesthetics concerned with the body–Stelarc is an obviously provocative example, but a visitor to Medien Kunst Netz will confront around 200 digital artworks that explore the body, embodiment, and social or psychic effects of framing and/or identity-formation. Or, as Manovich formulates this predicament more generally, the 1990s

     

    were about the virtual. We were fascinated by new virtual spaces made possible by computer technologies. The images of an escape into a virtual space that leaves the physical space useless and of cyberspace–a virtual world that exists in parallel to our world–dominated the decade . . . It is quite possible that this decade of the 2000s will turn out to be about the physical–that is, physical space filled with electronic and visual information.

     

    I was wondering how one would want to think about this physical turn in digital art, and, considering your inquiry into the materialities of communication as well as the beauty of bodies that matter, how you approach this emergence of digital body art. In particular, I was struck by the impression, when confronting the research in the field, that Cartesianism and more or less strict dualisms of body and mind are not so easily left behind. In the middle part of your Production of Presence you devote quite some energy and reflection to reconsidering Heidegger’s thinking of “world” and “earth” in “The Origin of the Work of Art,” and you rightly emphasize Heidegger’s critique of Descartes in that context.10 In a recent essay, Katherine N. Hayles–whose study How We Became Posthuman was instrumental in provoking a more differentiated and qualified critical debate over the posthuman, which Friedrich Kittler has also enriched in so many ways–reconsiders her position and recognizes that she is still haunted by the incessant returns of such dualisms. That later essay sketches out a relational notion of emergence from a dynamic flux both of the body and of embodiment, a relationality that departs in a different way from Cartesianism than her earlier work does.11 How do you think of the emergence or presencing of embodiment and of the experience of beauty in a digital age–on the other side of Cartesian and posthuman temptations both? In particular, how would one want to consider the beauty of digital art and embodiment in their concretely specific differentiation and materiality–even on that level of gendered difference which Lyotard brought into his work on the inhuman, or on that level of “an erotics of art” which Susan Sontag was thinking of in Against Interpretation?

     

    HUG: Of course, “dualisms like body and mind are not so easily left behind.” For my part, I do not believe that I have ever promised (!) to leave either “body” or “mind” behind (I may have said that there are other tasks for the mind to get engaged in than interpretation). In this spirit, I am convinced that the provocative power of the concept of the post-human has long since worn out. When Foucault (if it was Foucault) first used it, it was beautifully provocative because it made us aware that a certain concept of the “human” that we had thought to be metahistorical and transcultural was indeed both culturally and historically very specific (i.e., it was rooted in the eigtheenth century). So Foucault’s provocation helped us to not feel forever obliged to live up to the eigtheenth-century concept of the “human.” For example, we have become much less optimistic regarding the natural generosity of “humans” towards other humans–and we no longer even think that this is such a devastating insight. But will we ever become post-human, in the sense of not living through (in one way or the other), this dualism (or should I say oscillation) between “body” and “mind” (and again, what would be wrong with this)?

     

    UE: I know that Luhmann’s work and his intellectual impact on the academy have been of extraordinary import to you and, naturally, the lasting fascination with his social systems theory has left many traces in your own production. On the one hand, I wonder how you see the fate of Luhmann’s work today, in the face of a pervasively digital culture? Specifically, how do you evaluate and handle the absence in Luhmann’s work of a refined and differentiated set of concepts and distinctions relating to new media, including the questions raised, and debated by many of Luhmann’s readers, by the introduction of the notion of the “code” versus the eventual discreteness of information in The Reality of the Mass Media? On the other hand, you yourself on occasion gesture towards what you find to be relatively unelaborated aspects of Luhmann’s work, his concepts of time and space in particular.12 How would you describe your own departure here towards different notions of form, event, position, distance, movement, and the widening of the present as a dimension of simultaneity?

     

    HUG: Two or three years ago, in Copenhagen (indeed), I was invited to give the closing lecture for the (at least then) “largest Luhmann Congress ever.” I accepted–but I did feel slightly uneasy, because, by then, I had somehow ceased to be “Luhmannian.” My solution to this (emotional, rather than cognitive) dilemma was to start the lecture by confessing (and this is still true) that “Niklas Luhmann’s work was the intellectual love of my life.” It had never before happened with the same intensity as in the case of Luhmann’s work–and I anticipate that it will never happen again in my intellectual life: I absolutely had to read each new book, each new article by this author. It wasn’t even a question of whether I agreed or not; I fear (but why am I saying “fear”?) that “rapture” would have been the adequate word here. I was in a true Luhmann-fever–it was something like a novel released in serial form, to see how he complicated his thought and his philosopy in a way that I found aesthetically fascinating. This is the one side. On the other side, however (and this is the simple reason why I am no longer a Luhmannian–a reason, of course, that doesn’t say anything against Luhmann’s work), what I have increasingly concentrated upon over the past decade, i.e., the dimension of “presence,” does not have a place in Luhmann’s work. Now, this fact is altogether undramatic. Each philosophy, programmatically or preconsciously, opts for certain problems and concepts that it can deal with–and thus automatically excludes others. What my friends and I used to call “materiality” (and what today I refer to as “presence”) is something that Luhmann’s philosophy could not capture from the (very foundational) moment Luhmann decided to make meaning (Sinn) the key-concept of his work. In this sense, it is perhaps more than a bon mot to say–rather it is an ultimately laudatory description–that Luhmann’s philosophy is the “hermeneutics of the digital age.” I do not know whether his concept of “communication” was deliberately or unintentionally adapted to electronic communication–but I imagine that it would work beautifully and gloriously to describe and to analyze our technological and mainly electronic communication environment. Now, I insist: all of this is not a criticism of Luhmann; rather it explains why I don’t have much use for the entire edifice of Luhmann’s philosophy. Nevertheless, his name still plays an important role in my ongoing work–and it is not derogatory if I characterize this role by saying that Luhmann has become my “main provider of punch lines.” Like many other stunning intellectual talents (he certainly belongs to the five or even three most intelligent persons I have ever seen), he was fantastic at coming up with sharp and always surprising (i.e., counterintuitive) definitions. Many of these definitions function as healthy thought-provocations even if you do not buy into the entire complexity of Luhmann’s system. And this is how I use him today. Let me end with one further comment on your question–which indirectly also refers back to our Benjamin discussion. That author “X” (Niklas Luhmann, for example) does not provide a full-fledged theory of phenomenon “Y” (in which you happen to be interested), does not mean that author X is not interesting. Here it is again, for me: this feeling of a taboo imposed on independent thinking. Unlike your generation, I have to say that I am always (and not only secretly) happy when I see that my great intellectual heroes (even my great intellectual heroes) have their limits.

     

    UE: You chose “Beyond Meaning: Positions and Concepts in Motion” as the title of the third, very important chapter of The Production of Presence. I was very taken by the possibility of inquiring further into the notion you develop there of presence in movement, for bodies in space as well as for the conceptualizations proper to more mindful bodies, so as to sense in it the delimitation of an aesthetics of movement for digital art. I was perhaps particularly piqued by the kind of approach you brought out here to such movement–since it not only encompassed the dimensions of “vertical” movement (emergence into being-there so as to occupy space) and “horizontal” movement (being qua appearance or something that moves towards or against an observer), but paid special attention to the more difficult dimension of negativity in movement, i.e., the dimension of “withdrawal” as in some (non-)sense prior to and (de)constitutive of both verticality and horizontality, emergence and appearance. You draw to good effect on the admirable work of Nancy and Bohrer here, as well as on Seel’s ingenious ways of pointing out the limits of human control of “appearance” via his notion of Unfervügbarkeit.13 In a way, then, my question is disturbingly simple: what would, for you, constitute a “composure” for Dasein in relation to the happening or taking place in movement of the text, images, sound, and touch of contemporary digital artworks, a “composure” that cares for the ontology of the digital work of art so as not to forget either the Unfervügbarkeit of its appearance or its “birth” to presence, nor simply denying its movement of withdrawal and dis-appearance into discreteness?

     

    HUG: Well, let me confess that, honestly (not the least thanks to your influence), I am increasingly trying to expose myself to digital art whenever I have the chance to do so. Sometimes I find it terribly pretentious, and it triggers that horribly petit bourgeois question in me of whether the (aesthetic) effect was worth all of the financial and technological investment. Sometimes I find that there is too much self-reflexive ambition–as if self-reflexivity were, without any question, the best thing our life can offer. But sometimes I am impressed, I like what I see, I could and would stay forever–and then, at the moment that I have to go or decide to go, I find it consoling to know that this digital work of art will not only continue to exist, but will continue to “play,” even in my absence. While there is nothing terribly surprising in this description, I think it is already the main effect of Gelassenheit. To be able to let go, to know that certain things are unverfügbar (strange, by the way, that German, of all languages, has such a differentiated repertoire for describing this state of mind). So, yes, for once I am able to associate digital art with something that is dear to me, i.e., Gelassenheit. Now this is an effect that has a strange, not to say decisive, existential impact for me. I hope (and would perhaps even dare to claim) that I am not a complete control freak. But if I am not a complete control freak, as I hope, my belief in the capacities of human agency, despite all theoretical and philosophical reservations, is unlimited. Yes, subconsciously and pre-philosophically, I seem to assume that you can achieve whatever you want enough to achieve. So it is good, it makes a huge difference for me to realize that I cannot “force” certain things–not even what matters most to me–my children’s success, my wife’s good humor (on a Friday night), and the success of my favorite sports team, the Stanford (American) Football Team. As I am trying to answer you, I realize that there is astonishingly little to say about Gelassenheit. Perhaps I should add, however, that Gelassenheit could always be an anticipation, a blank cheque, so to speak, of that desire for (as I call it) “being in synch with the things of the world.” It is true and embarrassing, at the same time, that, in this very sense, I find certain animals terribly attractive–and the way I describe this attraction is to say that, most likely, they don’t have problems with their self-reflexivity. These days, I am specifically impressed by a population of sea elephants (I hear there are only a couple of hundred left on the planet) that happen to mate on a Pacific shore not too far from Stanford. When you first see them lying on the dunes, they look like stones, like things. From time to time, they move around, slowly. Yes, I tend to believe that it would be beautiful to be a sea elephant–if you only don’t take me too seriously here. And let me add that, as a mating ritual, sea elephants seem to engage in the cruelest and most bloody fights.

     

    UE: In 2001 the media installation artist David Rokeby opened the work n-Cha(n)t to the public at the Banff Centre for the Arts, a work that won prizes for interactive art the year after. Rokeby described the motivation for the work as “a strong and somewhat inexplicable desire to hear a community of computers speaking together: chattering amongst themselves, musing, intoning chants.” The work is an advanced elaboration of the effort over ten years to make rather intelligent “Givers of Names,” i.e., linguistically intelligent IT-systems that can recognize objects on location and give them names. In n-Cha(n)t the human interactants encounter a community of networked “Givers of Names,” where these intercommunicate among themselves in order to synchronize their “states of mind.” This communicative process of synchronization goes on semi-organically; left to their own devices, the “Givers of Names” will eventually arrive at a coherent and shared chanting. The human interactants, however, constitute a channel of disruption of this communication, a source of disturbance, distraction, perhaps fragmentation or at least slowing down of the speed of shared chanting of the “Givers of Names.” This is how Rokeby describes that part of the work:

     

    When left uninterrupted to communicate among themselves, they eventually fall into chanting, a shared stream of verbal association. This consensus unfolds very organically. The systems feel their way towards each other, finding resonance in synonyms and similar sounding words, working through different formulations of similar statements until finally achieving unison. Each entity is equipped with a highly focused microphone and voice recognition software. When a gallery visitor speaks into one of the microphones, these words from the outside “distract” that system, stimulating a shift in that entity’s “state of mind.” As a result, that individual falls away from the chant. As it begins communicating this new input to its nearest neighbors, the community chanting loses its coherence, with the chanting veering towards a party-like chaos of voices. In the absence of further disruptions, the intercommunications reinforce the similarities and draw the community back to the chant.

     

    In one of the most recent of his works, SubTitled Public (2005), which is about pervasive computing (rather than forming a part of the ongoing series of works concerned with relational architecture), Raphael Lozano-Hemmer created an empty exhibition space where human visitors are tracked with a computerized infrared surveillance system and specific texts, or subtitles, are projected onto their bodies, following them everywhere they go.14 No matter what kind of body-movements the visitors perform, these textual brandings of individuals are impossible to get rid of–except when you touch somebody else, in which case the words are exchanged with the other. Lozano-Hemmer’s work makes obvious and ironic reference to the security-specific, juridical, and political problematics of pervasive computing, in this case the dimension of surveillance in particular.15 But again, as in Rokeby’s work, it is noteworthy that a posthuman dimension informs the work: human bodies, interaction, and communication pose at best as minor modes of suspension or temporary interruption of informational speed.

     

    Even such an impressively humanistic artist as Bill Viola works on and with that sort of inhuman speed in his video installations, in this case very often by using analog and digital video-technology to achieve (almost) imperceptible effects of slowness rather than radical acceleration. In Viola’s case, one notices an incessant effort towards crossing back and forth over the limits of human affect at the micro-physical or micro-perceptual level and always via digital speeding or slowing down. Witness the series of works in The Passions, for example.16

     

    You deal with the problematic of speed in various places in your texts, at least one of them directly relating to the question of the materialities of communication.17 On that occasion you describe speed as yet another aspect of coupling and resonance. From this systems-theoretical perspective “rhythm” gains a new relevance, because “rhythm” can be understood as speed that facilitates coupling. You also note that such reflection upon coupling and its conditions might furnish interesting ways of rephrasing the contemporary philosophical tendency to problematize concepts such as “agency” and “subjectivity.” I was struck by the ways in which this approach to speed seems so much cooler and formally dry than, say, Virilio’s very important, but tendentially catastrophic diagnosis of an information society touching upon the absolute speed of light, on the other side of the modern transmission revolution, but also displaying much more interesting critical potential than such utopian-minded thinkers of the speed of posthuman robotics and intelligence as Moravec and Minsky. Not surprisingly, perhaps, I want to ask you how you would flesh out your notion of speed in relation to digital works of art whose tempi and rhythms touch upon the limits of human affectivity, interfaces, as well as modes of communication.

     

    I wondered whether one can get far enough here to meet an all too common reaction to the question concerning posthuman speed: “Yes, sure, digital technology, mediation, and communication introduce accelerations that go beyond the human in quite a few ways, but, then, what does it matter?” Particularly in the area of digital art and aesthetics people often shrug off this question of speed, typically with a remark to the effect that, if indeed we cannot perceive it nor place it in the sensible nor make sense of it, we are not talking about art anymore anyway. And to a certain extent I understand that response, at least if one can describe it as the urge to abandon the question when we are not even dealing with coding and hence with information–information in Luhmann’s sense. That is, I can understand it as a response of this kind: “If this thing about speed is supposed to have to do with ‘digital art,’ then ‘digital art’ does not matter–what difference does it make?” The question becomes somewhat more pressing, however, once we are dealing with speeds of coding and information, for what to make of works that at least in part move too fast, or too slowly, for the human sensorium, language, or thought, but achieve artful or aesthetic effects nonetheless? Hence the title of this interview: how are the speeds that grant beauty to digital artworks, and how are we humans and our bodies, placed in relation to this?

     

    HUG: Again, this weird and passé concept of the “post-human.” What would be “human” speed–and why should any kind of speed, so to speak, bother to be “human”? Isn’t this ridiculously anthropocentric, once you agree that the entire dimension and category of the “sublime” (which we discussed earlier) could not possibly exist if it were not for all of those (endless, innumerable) phenomena that exceed the different human capacities for decomplexification? Let me just suggest a very simple comparison: we know that each of the different human senses only covers or captures a limited range of what other living beings can capture, and therefore perceive and even experience. There are levels of speed (and slowness) that we may be able to calculate, but for which we will never have any mental or physical affinity. So what’s the big deal? I suppose that any kind of speed or slowness that can ever become aesthetically relevant cannot be post- or meta-human. In this sense, I believe that those phenomena and works of art that we like to call “sublime” are those that exceed the capacity of the human senses just by a bit. The extent of this universe may be “way too big to be sublime.” The same is true for speed. If certain digital artists produce effects of speed that are appealing to some or many viewers (seemingly not to me), then these viewers must be capable of relating to this speed. What I call “rhythm,” I assume, helps to relate to different speeds in the perceived transformation of phenomena, without of course being a necessary condition of such relating. Now I define/describe “rhythm” as a form given to (wrested from) a “time-object” in the proper sense, i.e., an object that exists in an ongoing self-transformation. So I assume that our possibility for capturing the speed of such transformation is greatly enhanced if these transformations take place in a rhythmic form. Of course there might be transformations that do have a form and that do take place at a rate of speed that simply exceeds our perceptive capacities.

     

    What I do not understand is why and how, for example, it would be a “catastrophy” to discover (if this were ever the case) that the speed of information comes close to the speed of light. Can channels of information that have to do with electricity ever have been much slower? And why would we want to perceive all of the screams and waves of technologically-produced electricity (for example) that surround us? Would it not only be to give us the right to complain about present-day culture?

     

    Notes

     

    1. See Gumbrecht and Pfeiffer, eds., Materialities of Communication.

     

    2. See, for instance, Gumbrecht, “Epistemologie / Fragmente” in Gumbrecht and Pfeiffer, eds., Paradoxien 837-50, 839.

     

    3. For Gumbrecht’s remarks on this text, see Making Sense 12.

     

    4. See Cubitt, Couchot, Hansen, Stiegler, Mitchell, and Crary.

     

    5. See Manovich, Image Future.

     

    6. See Gumbrecht, Lob Des Sports, translated as In Praise of Athletic Beauty.

     

    7. See, for example, “‘Dabei Sein Ist Alles’,” “It’s Just a Game,” “Epiphany of Form,” and In Praise of Athletic Beauty.

     

    8. In Russian, see Gumbrecht, “From Oedipal Hermeneutics”; the original English version appeared in Telos.

     

    9. Gumbrecht writes in more detail about Derrida’s work and the institutional impact of deconstruction, in the U.S. in particular, in “Deconstruction Deconstructed,” “Who Is Afraid of Deconstruction?” and “Martin Heidegger and His Interlocutors.”

     

    10. See Gumbrecht, Production of Presence 65-67.

     

    11. See Hayles, “Flesh and Metal” 297-99. Hayles’s text is also available at Medien Kunst Netz (<http://www.medienkunstnetz.de/search/?qt=hayles>. That site includes half a dozen rich critical articles that work towards rethinking “cyborg bodies” today; see <http://www.medienkunstnetz.de/themes/cyborg_bodies>.

     

    12. See Gumbrecht, “Form without Matter.” Note also Gumbrecht’s turn to Heidegger in The Production of Presence when engaging in a rethinking of space and bodily presence.

     

    13. The latter translated as Aesthetics of Appearing (Stanford: Stanford UP, 2005).

     

    14. A four-minute video of the work is available at <http://www.fundacion.telefonica.com/at/rlh/video/subpub.html>.

     

    15. ZKM arranged an important exhibition on precisely this, and the resulting publication is of seminal importance in the field; see Frohne et al., eds.

     

    16. See Hansen’s interesting article on this aspect of Viola’s work.

     

    17. See Gumbrecht, “A Farewell to Interpretation” 400.

     

    References

     

    • Bohrer, Karl Heinz. Ästhetische Negativität.München: C. Hanser, 2002.Bolz, Norbert. “Aesthetics of Media: What Is the Cost of Keeping Benjamin Current?” Gumbrecht and Marrinan 24-29.
    • Couchot, Edmond. La technologie dans l’art: de la photographie à la réalité virtuelle. Nîmes: Éditions Jacqueline Chambon, 1998.
    • Crary, Jonathan. Suspensions of Perception. Attention, Spectacle, and Modern Culture. Cambridge: MIT P, 1999.
    • Cubitt, Sean. Digital Aesthetics. London: Sage, 1998.
    • Derrida, Jacques. Of Grammatology. Trans. Gayatri Chakravorty Spivak. Baltimore: Johns Hopkins UP, 1997.
    • Frohne, Ursula, Peter Weibel, Thomas Y. Levin, and Zentrum für Kunst und Medientechnologie, eds. Ctrl Space: Rhetorics of Surveillance from Bentham to Big Brother: Exhibition: 12 October 2001-24 February 2002. Cambridge: MIT P, 2002.
    • Godzich, Wlad. “Language, Images, and the Postmodern Predicament.” Gumbrecht and Pfeiffer, Materialities 355-70.
    • Grau, Oliver. Virtual Art: From Illusion to Immersion. Rev. ed. Cambridge: MIT P, 2003.
    • Gumbrecht, Hans Ulrich. “‘Dabei Sein Ist Alles’: Über Die Geschichte Von Medien, Sport, Publikum.” Arete: The Journal of Sport Literature 4.1 (1986): 25-43.
    • —. “Deconstruction Deconstructed: Transformationen Französischer Logozentrismus-Kritik in Der Amerikanischen Literaturtheorie.” Philosophische Rundschau 33.12 (1986): 1-35.
    • —. “Epiphany of Form: On the Beauty of Team Sports.” New Literary History 30.2 (1999): 351-72.
    • —. “A Farewell to Interpretation.” Gumbrecht and Pfeiffer, Materialities 389-402.
    • —. “Form without Matter Vs. Form as Event.” MLN 111.3 (1996): 578-92.
    • —. “From Oedipal Hermeneutics to Philosophy of Presence (an Autobiographical Fantasy).” New Literary Review (Moscow) 2005.
    • —. “From Oedipal Hermeneutics to Philosophy of Presence (an Autobiographical Fantasy).” Telos (forthcoming 2006).
    • —. In 1926: Living at the Edge of Time. Cambridge: Harvard UP, 1997.
    • —. In Praise of Athletic Beauty. Cambridge: Belknap P, 2006.
    • —. “Introduction: How Much Sense Does Sense Making Make? Californian Retrospective to a German Question.” Gumbrecht, Making Sense 3-13.
    • —. “It’s Just a Game: On the History of Sports, Media, and the Public.” Gumbrecht, Making Sense 272-87.
    • —. Lob Des Sports. Frankfurt am Main: Suhrkamp, 2005.
    • —. Making Sense in Life and Literature. Ed. Wlad Godzich. Minneapolis: U of Minnesota P, 1992.
    • —. “Martin Heidegger and His Interlocutors: About a Limit of Western Metaphysics.” Diacritics 30.4 (2000): 83-101.
    • —. Production of Presence: What Meaning Cannot Convey. Stanford: Stanford UP, 2004.
    • —. “Who Is Afraid of Deconstruction?” Diskurstheorien Und Literaturwissenschaft. Eds. Jürgen Fohrmann and Harro Müller. Frankfurt am Main: Suhrkamp, 1988. 95-114.
    • Gumbrecht, Hans Ulrich, and Michael Marrinan, eds. Mapping Benjamin: The Work of Art in the Digital Age. Stanford: Stanford UP, 2003.
    • Gumbrecht, Hans Ulrich, and Karl Ludwig Pfeiffer, eds. Materialities of Communication. Stanford: Stanford UP, 1994.
    • Gumbrecht, Hans Ulrich, and K. Ludwig Pfeiffer, eds. Paradoxien, Dissonanzen, Zusammenbrüche: Situationen Offener Epistemologie. Frankfurt am Main: Suhrkamp, 1991.
    • Hansen, Mark B. N. New Philosophy for New Media. Cambridge: MIT P, 2004.
    • —. “Seeing with the Body: The Digital Image in Postphotography.” Diacritics: A Review of Contemporary Criticism 31.4 (2001): 54-84.
    • —. “The Time of Affect, or Bearing Witness to Life.” Critical Inquiry 30.3 (2004): 584-626.
    • Hayles, N. Katherine. “Flesh and Metal: Reconfiguring the Mindbody in Virtual Environments.” Configurations 10 (2002): 297-320.
    • —. How We Became Posthuman: Virtual Bodies in Cybernetics, Literature, and Informatics. Chicago: U of Chicago P, 1999.
    • Lozano-Hemmer, Rafael. “Subtitled Public.” < http://www.fundacion.telefonica.com/at/rlh/eproyecto.html> 21 Dec. 2001.
    • Luhmann, Niklas. The Reality of the Mass Media. Stanford: Stanford UP, 2000.
    • Lyotard, Jean-Francois. “Can Thought Go on Without a Body?” Gumbrecht and Pfeiffer, Materialities 286-300.
    • Manovich, Lev. Image Future. <http://www.manovich.net/DOCS/image_future.doc> 21 Dec. 2005.
    • —. The Language of New Media. Cambridge: MIT P, 2001.
    • —. The Poetics of Augmented Space. <http://www.manovich.net/DOCS/augmented_space.doc.>. 7 Oct. 2005.
    • Mitchell, William J. The Reconfigured Eye. Visual Truth in the Post-Photographic Era. Cambridge: MIT P, 1992.
    • Nancy, Jean-Luc. The Birth to Presence. Stanford: Stanford UP, 1993.
    • Rokeby, David. “n-Cha(n)t.” Walter Phillips Gallery, Banff Centre for the Arts, Canada. 2001. <http://homepage.mac.com/davidrokeby/nchant.html> 21 Dec. 2001.
    • Seel, Martin. Aesthetics of Appearing. Stanford: Stanford UP, 2005.
    • —. Ästhetik Des Erscheinens. München: Hanser, 2000.
    • Sontag, Susan. Against Interpretation and Other Essays. New York: Farrar, 1966.
    • Stiegler, Bernard. “The Discrete Image.” Echographies of Television: Filmed Interviews. Eds. Jacques Derrida and Bernard Stiegler. Cambridge: Polity, 2002. 147-63.
    • Werber, Niels. “Media Theory after Benjamin and Brecht: Neo-Marxist?” Gumbrecht and Marrinan 230-38.

     

  • Lose the Building: Systems Theory, Architecture, and Diller+Scofidio’s Blur

    Cary Wolfe

    Department of English
    Rice University
    cewolfe@rice.edu

     

    “The work of art is an ostentatiously improbable occurrence.”

    –Niklas Luhmann, Art as a Social System (153)

     

    The Blur building designed by the New York architectural team of Ricardo Scofidio and Elizabeth Diller–a manufactured cloud with an embedded viewing deck, hovering over Lake Neuchatel in Switzerland–seems to have enjoyed nearly universal acclaim from the moment it opened to the public in October of 2002 as part of media Expo ’02. The reasons for this are not far to seek; they range from what a Swiss newspaper reviewer characterizes as the liberating effect of the zany cloud on “the crotchety Swiss”–“What a crazy, idiosyncratic thing! How deliciously without purpose!,” he exclaims (Diller+Scofidio 372)–to Diller+Scofidio’s knowing deployment of the relationship between public architecture, the history and function of the exposition as a social form, and the manufacture and use of spectacle in relation to both (92, 162). The project went through many different elaborations, enhancements, and embellishments between July of 1998, when Diller+Scofidio was invited to participate, and the closing of the Expo in October of 2002. Almost all of these were, for various reasons, unrealized in the final project. At one point, the cloud was to house an “LED text forest” of vertical LED panels that would scroll text–either from an Internet feed (including live “chat” produced by visitors to the structure) or, in a later version, produced by an artist such as Jenny Holzer (163, 324). Another idea early in the project was to build an adjacent “Hole in the Water” restaurant made of submerged twin glass cylinders with an aquarium layer in between, in which diners would sit at eye level with the lake and eat sushi (100-111); another, to have an open air “Angel Bar” embedded in the upper part of the cloud, in which patrons could select from an endless variety of the only beverage served there: water–artesian waters, sparkling waters, waters from both glacial poles, and municipal tap waters from around the world (“tastings can be arranged,” we are told) (146-55). Yet another elaborate idea, rather late in the project’s evolution, involved the distribution of “smart” raincoats–or “braincoats”–to visitors to the cloud, which would indicate, through both sound and color, affinity or antipathy to other visitors on the basis of a preferences questionnaire filled out upon entry to the cloud (209-51).

     

    Figure 1
    Figure 1: The “Blur Building.”
    Courtesy of Diller+Scofidio

     

    As even this brief list suggests, the project went through many permutations. But in the end–not least for reasons of money–what we are left with in Blur is the manufactured cloud with the “Angel Deck” (now, not a water bar but a viewing deck) nestled at its crest. For reasons I will try to explain by way of contemporary systems theory, the fact that these permutations and sideline enhancements were not realized in the end is not entirely a bad thing, because it rivets our attention not only on what has captivated most viewers from the beginning, but also on what makes the project a paradigmatic instance of the way contemporary architecture responds to the complexities of its broader social environment in terms of its specific medium–and that is, as Diller+Scofidio put it, “the radicality of an absent building” (15), the remarkable, audacious commitment to a building that was not a building at all but a manufactured cloud: “the making,” as they put it, “of nothing.” This core commitment was sounded by Diller+Scofidio early and often; at the core of the project, as it were, was no core at all, but a commitment to something “featureless, depthless, scaleless, spaceless, massless, surfaceless, and contextless” (162). And this overriding concern was reiterated at the end of the design phase, about a year before the Expo opened, in a very important communiqué from Diller:

     

    BLUR is not a building, BLUR is pure atmosphere, water particles suspended in mid-air. The fog is a dynamic, phantom mass, which changes form constantly . . . . In contradiction to the tradition of Expo pavilions whose exhibitions entertain and educate, BLUR erases information. Expos are usually competition grounds for bigger and better technological spectacles. BLUR is a spectacle with nothing to see. Within BLUR, vision is put out-of-focus so that our dependence on vision can become the focus of the pavilion. (325)

     

    And, she adds in bold type: “The media project must be liberated from all immediate and obvious metaphoric associations such as clouds, god, angels, ascension, dreams, Greek mythology, or any other kitsch relationships. Rather, BLUR offers a blank interpretive surface” (325).

     

    But not quite blank, as it turns out. In fact, the architects thought the perceptual experience of the Blur building would either metaphorize or, conversely, throw into relief a larger set of concerns about electronic media and how we relate to it. Midway through the project, in a presentation to a media sponsor, they characterized it this way:

     

    To “blur” is to make indistinct, to dim, to shroud, to cloud, to make vague, to obfuscate. Blurred vision is an impairment. A blurry image is the fault of mechanical malfunction in a display or reproduction technology. For our visually obsessed, high-resolution/high-definition culture, blur is equated with loss . . . . Our proposal has little to do with the mechanics of the eye, but rather the immersive potential of blur on an environmental scale. Broadcast and print media feed our insatiable desire for the visual with an unending supply of images . . . [but] as an experience, the Blur building offers little to see. It is an immersive environment in which the world is put out of focus so that our visual dependency can be put into focus. (195)

     

    At a different stage–one in which the LED text forest played a central role–the experience of the cloud figures “the unimaginable magnitude, speed, and reach of telecommunications.” As Diller+Scofidio put it, “unlike entering a building, the experience of entering this habitable medium in which orientation is lost and time is suspended is like an immersion in ‘ether.’ It is a perfect context for the experience of another all-pervading, yet infinitely elastic, massless medium–one for the transmission and propagation of information: the Internet. The project aims to produce a ‘technological sublime’ . . . felt in the scaleless and unpredictable mass of fog” (qtd. in Dimendberg 79).

     

    There are some interesting differences between these versions of the cloud, of course. In the first version, the resonance of the project falls on the iconographic and visually based forms of mass media; in the second, it is the ephemeral yet pervasive presence of electronic, digital forms of telecommunication generally that is in question. In the first, the point of the cloud is that it deprives us of the unproblematic visual clarity, immediacy, and transparency that the mass media attempt to produce in its consumers; in the second, the cloud’s water vapor metaphorically envelopes us in the electronic ether that we inhabit like a medium in contemporary life, but deprives us of the information that usually accompanies it and therefore distracts us from just how immersed in that medium we are. I am more concerned here, however, with what the two accounts have in common: that this particular form has been selected by Diller+Scofidio, and selected, moreover, to represent the unrepresentable–hence the notion of the “technological sublime” upon which both accounts converge.

     

    We ought not, however, take this notion of the sublime (or the term “representation,” for that matter) at face value. In fact, resorting to the discourse of the sublime here can only obscure the specificity of the project’s formal decisions–why it does what it does how it does–and how those decisions are directly related to the ethical and political point that the project is calculated to make. At its worst, it leads down the sorts of blind alleys we find in the July 2002 issue of Architecture, where one reviewer reads the project in terms of the symbolic significance of clouds and of Switzerland in Romantic literature (Mary Shelley’s Frankenstein, among others) and painting (J.M.W. Turner, among others), all of which is supposedly mobilized in Blur‘s rewriting of the sublime as a “cautionary tale about the environment” (Cramer 53). And all of which recycles exactly the sorts of “immediate and obvious metaphoric associations” and “kitsch relationships” that, as we have just seen, Diller rightly rails against.

     

    It might seem more promising, at least at first glance, to pursue more theoretically sophisticated renderings of the sublime in contemporary theory, most notably in the work of Jean-François Lyotard (though other recent renditions of the concept, such as we find in Slavoj Zizek’s conjugation of Kant and Lacan, might be invoked here as well). In Lyotard–to stay with the most well-known example–the locus classicus is a certain reading of Kant. The sublime is rendered as a kind of absolute outside to human existence–one that is, for that very reason, terrifying. At the same time, paradoxically (and this is true of Zizek’s rendering as well), that radically other outside emerges as a product of the human subject’s conflict with itself, a symptom of the Enlightenment subject running up against its own limits. In Lyotard’s famous rendering of the Kantian sublime in The Postmodern Condition, it emerges from the conflict between “the faculty to conceive of something and the faculty to `present’ something” (77). “We can conceive the infinitely great, the infinitely powerful,” he explains, “but every presentation of an object destined to ‘make visible’ this absolute greatness or power appears to us painfully inadequate. Those are ideas of which no presentation is possible. Therefore they impart no knowledge about reality (experience)” (78). And the entire ethical stake of modern art for Lyotard is “to present the fact that the unpresentable exists. To make visible that there is something which can be conceived and which can neither be seen nor made visible” (78). But how to do this? Here, Lyotard follows Kant’s invocation of “‘formlessness, the absence of form,’ as a possible index to the unpresentable,” as that which “will enable us to see only by making it impossible to see; it will please only by causing pain” (78). The sublime, then, is a “feeling” that marks the incommensurability of reason (conception) and the singularity or particularity of the world and its objects (presentation). And it is an incommensurability that carries ethical force, for it serves as a reminder that the heterogeneity of the world cannot be reduced to a unified rule or reason. And this incompleteness in turn necessitates a permanent openness of any discourse to its other, to what Lyotard calls, in a book by the same title, the “differend.”

     

    Lyotard’s rendering of the Kantian sublime would seem to be useful in approaching Blur, and Kant’s invocation of “formlessness” as the sublime’s index would seem doubly promising. But its limitations may be marked by the fact that Kant’s sublime remains tethered to “something on the order of a subject” (to use Foucault’s famous phrase)–hence it remains referenced essentially to the language of phenomenology, to the affective states of a subject-supposed-to-know who, in experiencing her non-knowledge, experiences pain, and thus changes her relation to herself. What I am suggesting, then, is that in Lyotard’s rendering of the sublime–and it would be far afield to argue the point in any more detail here–the price we pay for a certain deconstruction of the subject of humanism (one that will be traced from Kant to Nietzsche in The Postmodern Condition) is that the subject remains installed at the center of its universe, only now its failure is understood to be a kind of success (77). Moreover, the fact that this failure is ethical–is the hook on which the ethical rehabilitation of the subject hangs in its forcible opening to the world of the object, the differend, and so on–is the surest sign that we have not, for all that, left the universe of Kantian humanism. For we must remember that the ethical force of the sublime in Lyotard’s Kant depends upon the addressee of ethics being a member of the community of “reasonable beings” who must be equipped with the familiar humanist repertoire of language, reason, and so on to experience in the ethical imperative not a “determinant synthesis”–not one-size-fits-all rules for the good and the just act–but “an Idea of human society” (which is why Kant will argue, for example, that we have no direct duties to non-human animals) (Lyotard and Thébaud 85). And this in turn re-ontologizes the subject/object split that the discourse of the sublime was meant to call into question in the first place.

     

    In contrast to this, Diller+Scofidio insist that their work be understood in “post-moral and post-ethical” terms (qtd. Dimendberg 79). This does not mean I think, that they intend their work to have no ethical or political resonance–that much is already obvious from their comments on Blur–but rather that they understand the relationship between art, the subject, and world in resolutely post-humanist terms. In Diller+Scofidio, the human and the non- or anti- or a-human do not exist in fundamentally discrete ontological registers but–quite the contrary–inhabit the same space in mutual relations of co-implication and instability. This boundary-breakdown tends to be thematized in their work in the interlacing of the human and the technological (as in, for example, the multimedia theater work Jet Lag, the Virtue/Vice Glasses series, and the EJM 2 Inertia dance piece); it is also sometimes handled even more broadly in terms of the interweaving of the organic and the inorganic, the “natural” and the “artificial” (think here not only of Blur, but also of projects like Slow House and The American Lawn). Sometimes those unstable relations are funny, sometimes they are frightening, but almost always the signature affect in Diller+Scofidio is radical ambivalence–an ambivalence that, in contrast to the sublime, isn’t about a clear-cut pain that becomes, in a second, pedagogical moment, pleasure, but rather an ambivalence from the first moment of our experience of the work. This ambivalence is often tied to the difficulty of knowing exactly what is being experienced (as in works that intermesh real video surveillance with staged scenes, such as the Facsimile installation at the Moscone Convention Center in San Francisco), or, if we do know, how we should feel about it (think here of Jump Cuts or, again, Blur). All of which leads, in turn, to the ultimate question: namely, who is doing the experiencing? Who–in phenomenological, ethical, and political terms–are “we,” exactly? In this light, Diller+Scofidio (like Lyotard’s Kant) show us how questions of ethics are just that: questions; but they do so (unlike Lyotard’s Kant) without recontaining the force of that radical undecidability in terms of a humanist subject, an all too familiar “we”–a “reasonable being” directed toward an “idea of society”–for whom, and only for whom, those questions are.

     

    What this suggests, I think, is that a move beyond an essentially humanist ontological theoretical framework is in order if we are to understand the Blur project or, indeed, Diller+Scofidio’s work as a whole. We need, in other words, to replace “what” questions with “how” questions (to use Niklas Luhmann’s shorthand) (Art 89). Here, recent work in systems theory–and particularly Luhmann’s later work–can be of immense help, not least because it gives us a theoretical vocabulary for understanding the sorts of things that Diller+Scofidio have in mind when they suggest that in Blur “our objective is to weave together architecture and electronic technologies, yet exchange the properties of each for the other” (44). For the fundamental postulate of systems theory–its replacement of the familiar ontological dichotomies of humanism (culture/nature and its cognates: mind/body, spirit/matter, reason/feeling, and so on) with the functional distinction system/environment–is indispensable in allowing us to better understand the sorts of transcodings that Diller+Scofidio have in mind, because it gives us a common theoretical vocabulary that can range across what were, in the humanist tradition, ontologically discrete categories. Moreover, systems theory will allow us to explain not only how those transcodings are specific to particular systems–how art and architecture, for example, integrate electronic technologies as Art–but also how, in being system-specific, they are paradoxically paradigmatic of, and productive of, the very situation to which those systems respond.[1] That situation is “hypercomplexity,” created by what Luhmann calls the “functional differentiation” of modern society (what other critical vocabularies would call its specialization or, more moralistically, its fragmentation), which only gets accentuated and accelerated under post-modernity.[2]

     

    For Luhmann, the social system of art–like any other autopoietic system, by definition–finds itself in an environment that is always already more complex than itself, and all systems attempt to adapt to this complexity by filtering it in terms of their own, self-referential codes which are based on a fundamental distinction by means of which they carry out their operations. The point of the system is to reproduce itself, but no system can deal with everything, or even many things, all at once. The legal system, for example, responds to changes in its environment in terms of–and only in terms of–the distinction legal/illegal. In litigation, decisions are not based–and it is a good thing too–on whether it is raining or not, whether you went to Duke or to Rice, if you are wearing a blue shirt or a white shirt, whether or not you’re a vegetarian, and so on. One might well object that this ignores, say, the obvious influence of the economic system on the legal system, but for Luhmann this is simply evidence of the need for the legal system to further assert its own differentiation and autopoietic insularity. The determination of the legal by the economic system would be a symptom, to use Raymond Williams’s well-worn distinction, of the undue influence of a residual, premodern mode of social organization (center/periphery or top/bottom), in which one system dominates and determines the functions of the others, on the dominant, yet incompletely realized, mode of functional differentiation that characterizes modernity.

     

    Two subsidiary points need to be accented here. First, it is by responding to environmental complexity in terms of their own self-referential codes that subsystems build up their own internal complexity (one might think here of the various sub-specialties of the legal system, say, or for that matter the specialization of disciplines in the education system, particularly in the sciences); in doing so, systems become more finely grained in their selectivity, and thus–by increasing the density of the webwork of their filters, as it were–they buy time in relation to overwhelming environmental complexity. As Luhmann puts it in Social Systems, “Systems lack the `requisite variety’ (Ashby’s term) that would enable them to react to every state of the environment . . . . There is, in other words, no point-for-point correspondence between system and environment . . . . The system’s inferiority in complexity [compared to that of the environment] must be counter-balanced by strategies of selection” (25). But if the self-reference of the system’s code reduces the flow of environmental complexity into the system, it also increases its “irritability” and, in a very real sense, its dependence on the environment.

     

    As for this latter point, it is worth noting that systems theory in general and the theory of autopoiesis in particular are often criticized for asserting a kind of solipsism separating the system from its environment, but what this rather ham-fisted understanding misses is that systems theory attempts to account for the complex and seemingly paradoxical fact that the autopoietic closure of a system–whether social or biological–is precisely what connects it to its environment. As Luhmann explains, “the concept of a self-referentially closed system does not contradict the system’s openness to the environment. Instead, in the self-referential mode of operation, closure is a form of broadening possible environmental contacts; closure increases, by constituting elements more capable of being determined, the complexity of the environment that is possible for the system” (Social Systems 37). And this is why, as Luhmann puts it in Art as a Social System,

     

    autopoiesis and complexity are conceptual correlates . . . . Assuming that the system’s autopoiesis is at work, evolutionary thresholds can catapult the system to a level of higher complexity–in the evolution of living organisms, toward sexual reproduction, independent mobility, a central nervous system. To an external observer, this may resemble an increase in system differentiation or look like a higher degree of independence from environmental conditions. Typically, such evolutionary jumps simultaneously increase a system’s sensitivity and irritability; it is more easily disturbed by environmental conditions that, for their part, result from an increase in the system’s own complexity. Dependency and independence, in a simple causal sense, are therefore not invariant magnitudes in that more of one would imply less of the other. Rather, they vary according to a system’s given level of complexity. In systems that are successful in evolutionary terms, more independence typically amounts to a greater dependency on the environment . . . . But all of this can happen only on the basis of the system’s operative closure. (157-58)

     

    Or as Luhmann puts it in one of his more Zen-like moments, “Only complexity can reduce complexity” (Social Systems 26).

     

    The information/filter metaphor already invoked is misleading, however, on the basis of the second subsidiary point I mentioned above: because systems interface with their environment in terms of, and only in terms of, their own constitutive distinctions and the self-referential codes based upon them, the “environment” is not an ontological category but a functional one; it is not an “outside” to the system that is given as such, from which the system then differentiates itself– it is not, in other words, either “nature” or “society” in the traditional sense–but is rather always the “outside” of a specific inside. Or as Luhmann explains it, the environment is different for every system, because any system excludes only itself from its environment (Social Systems 17). All of this leads to a paradoxical situation that is central to Luhmann’s work, and central to understanding Luhmann’s reworking of problems inherited from both Hegel and Husserl: What links the system to the world–what literally makes the world available to the system–is also what hides the world from the system, what makes it unavailable. Given our discussion of the sublime and the problem of “representing the unrepresentable” this should ring a bell–but a different bell, as it turns out. To understand just how different, we need to remember that all systems carry out their operations and maintain their autopoiesis by deploying a constitutive distinction, and a code based upon it, that in principle could be otherwise; it is contingent, self-instantiated, and rests, strictly speaking, on nothing. But this means that there is a paradoxical identity between the two sides that define the system, because the distinction between both sides is a product of only one side. In the legal system, for example, the distinction between the two sides legal/illegal is instantiated (or “re-entered,” in Luhmann’s terminology) on only one side of the distinction, namely the legal. But no system can acknowledge this paradoxical identity of difference–which is also in another sense simply the contingency–of its own constitutive distinction and at the same time use that distinction to carry out its operations. It must remain “blind” to the very paradox of the distinction that links it to its environment.

     

    That does not mean that this “blind spot” cannot be observed from the vantage of another system–it can, and that is what we are doing right now–but that second-order observation will itself be based on its own blind spot, the paradoxical identity of both sides of its constitutive distinction, and so on and so forth. First-order observations that deploy distinctions as difference simply “do what they do.” Second-order observations can observe the unity of those differences and the contingency of the code of the first-order observer–but only by “doing what they do,” and thus formally reproducing a “blindness” that is (formally) the same but (contingently) not the same as the first-order system’s. And here, as I have suggested elsewhere, we find Luhmann’s fruitful reworking of the Hegelian problematic: Hegel’s “identity of identity and non-identity” is reworked as the “non-identity of identity and non-identity”–and a productive non-identity at that.[3] As Luhmann explains:

     

    The source of a distinction’s guaranteeing reality lies in its own operative unity. It is, however, precisely as this unity that the distinction cannot be observed–except by means of another distinction which then assumes the function of a guarantor of reality. Another way of expressing this is to say the operation emerges simultaneously with the world which as a result remains cognitively unapproachable to the operation. The conclusion to be drawn from this is that the connection with the reality of the external world is established by the blind spot of the cognitive operation. Reality is what one does not perceive when one perceives it. (“Cognitive Program” 76)

     

    Or as he puts it in somewhat different terms, the world is now conceived, “along the lines of a Husserlian metaphor, as an unreachable horizon that retreats further with each operation, without ever holding out the prospect of an outside” (Art 92).

     

    The question, then–and this is directly related to the problems raised by the topos of the sublime–is “how to observe how the world observes itself, how a marked space emerges [via a constitutive distinction] from the unmarked space, how something becomes invisible when something else becomes visible.” Here, we might seem far afield from addressing the Blur project, but as Luhmann argues, “the generality of these questions allows one to determine more precisely what art can contribute to solving this paradox of the invisibilization that accompanies making something visible” (Art 91). In this way, the problems that the discourse of the sublime attempts to address can be assimilated to the more formally rigorous scheme of the difference between first- and second-order observation. Any observation “renders the world invisible” in relation to its constitutive distinction, and that invisibility must itself remain invisible to the observation that employs that distinction, and can only be disclosed by another observation that will also necessarily be doubly blind in the same way (91). “In this twofold sense,” Luhmann writes, “the notion of a final unity–of an ‘ultimate reality’ that cannot assume a form because it has no other side–is displaced into the unobservable . . . . If the concept of the world is retained to indicate reality in its entirety, then it is that which–to a second-order observer–remains invisible in the movements of observation (his own and those of others)” (91). This means not only that “art can no longer be understood as an imitation of something that presumably exists along with and outside of art,” but more importantly for our purposes, “to the extent that imitation is still possible, it now imitates the world’s invisibility, a nature that can no longer be apprehended as a whole” (92). “The paradox unique to art, which art creates and resolves,” Luhmann writes, “resides in the observability of the unobservable” (149). And this is a question of form.

     

    It is in these terms–to return to Diller+Scofidio–that we might best understand the uncanny effect of Blur‘s manufactured cloud hovering over a lake, with the point being, we might say, not that the cloud is not a cloud but rather that the lake is not a lake, precisely in the sense that art can be said to imitate nature only because nature isn’t nature (an insight that is surely at work as well in Diller+Scofidio’s Slow House project)–which is another way of saying that all observations, including those of nature, are contingent, and of necessity blind to their own contingency. To put it in a Deleuzean rather than Luhmannian register, we might say that Blur virtualizes the very nature it “imitates,” but only, paradoxically, by concretizing that virtualization in its formal decisions–an “imitation of nature” that formally renders the impossibility of an “imitation of nature.” As Luhmann puts it, in an analysis that is thematized, as it were, in the blurriness of Diller+Scofidio’s project (and in the critical intent they attach to it), “Art makes visible possibilities of order that would otherwise remain invisible. It alters conditions of visibility/invisibility in the world by keeping invisibility constant and making visibility subject to variation” (Art 96). And here I think we can bring into the sharpest possible focus (if the metaphor can be allowed in this context!) the brilliance of the project’s “refusal” of architecture and its strategy of focusing on “the radicality of an absent building.” In this context, the strength of Blur’s formal intervention via à vis the medium of architecture is precisely its formlessness, because it is calculated to show how “the realm officially known as architecture” (to borrow Rem Koolhaas’s and Bruce Mau’s phrase)[4] can no longer “keep invisibility constant and make visibility subject to variation.” “Official architecture” renders the invisibility of the world invisible precisely by being too visible, too legible. And in so doing, as art, it might as well be invisible.

     

    Here, we might recall Luhmann’s suggestive comments about Christo’s and Jeanne-Claude’s wrapping of architectural structures. In an earlier moment of the “postmodern” in architecture, “quotation” of historical styles and elements attempts, as Luhmann puts it, “to copy a differentiated and diverse environment into the artwork,” but this in turn only raises the formal problem of “whether, and in what way, the work can claim unity, and whether it can assert itself against its own (!) ‘requisite variety’” (Art 298-89). “How,” as Luhmann puts it, “can the art system reflect upon its own differentiation, not only in the form of theory, but also in individual works of art?” (299). Christo’s and Jeanne-Claude’s response to this problem, he suggests, is “particularly striking: if objects can no longer legitimize their boundaries and distinctions, they must be wrapped” (400 n.220). From this perspective, we might think of Blur as a wrapped building with no building inside. Or better yet, as a wrapped building in which even the wrapping has too much form and begins to obsolesce the minute form is concretized.

     

    Figure 2
    Figure 2: Wrapped Reichstag, Berlin 1971-95.
    Christo and Jeanne-Claude
    Photo: Wolfgang Volz

     

    But what can it mean to say that an architectural project is concerned primarily with having little enough form? Here–and once again the otherwise daunting abstraction of systems theory is indispensable–we need to understand that when we use the term “form,” in no sense are we talking about objects, substances, materials, or things. Nor are we even, for that matter, talking about “shape.” As Luhmann explains,

     

    The word formal here does not refer to the distinction, which at first guided modern art, between form and matter or form and content, but to the characteristics of an indicating operation that observes, as if from the corner of its eye, what happens on the other side of form. In this way, the work of art points the observer toward an observation of form . . . . It consists in demonstrating the compelling forces of order in the realm of the possible. Arbitrariness is displaced beyond the boundaries of art into the unmarked space. If . . . one transgresses this boundary and steps from the unmarked into the marked space, things no longer happen randomly. (Art 147-48)

     

    In this way, form stages the question of “whether an observer can observe at all except with reference to an order” (148), andit stages the production of the unobservable (the “blind spot” of observation, the “outside” of any distinction’s “inside”) that inevitably accompanies such observations (149). As Luhmann will put it (rather unexpectedly), “the world displays all the qualities that Nicholas of Cusa ascribed to God: it is neither small nor large, neither unity nor diversity, it neither has a beginning nor is it without beginning–and this is why the world needs forms” (150). “From this vantage,” he writes,

     

    the function of art, one could argue, is to make the world appear within the world–with an eye toward the ambivalent situation that every time something is made available for observation something else withdraws, that, in other words, the activity of distinguishing and indicating that goes on in the world conceals the world . . . . Yet a work of Art is capable of symbolizing the reentry of the world into the world because it appears–just like the world–incapable of emendation. (149, emphasis added)

     

    With regard to this “reentry,” two related points should be highlighted here to fully appreciate the specificity of Blur‘s formal innovations. First, form is in a profound sense a temporal problem (if for no other reason than because of the contingency of any constitutive distinction); and second, formal decisions operate on two levels, what we might call the “internal” and “external”; they operate, that is, in relating the formal decisions of the artwork itself to the larger system of art, but also in relating the artwork as a whole to its larger environment, of which the subsystem of art is only a part. As Luhmann explains,

     

    What is at stake, operatively speaking, in the production and observation of a work of art is always a temporal unity that is either no longer or not yet observed. In this sense, the artwork is the result of intrinsic formal decisions and, at the same time, the metaform determined by these decisions, which, by virtue of its inner forms, can be distinguished from the unmarked space of everything else–the work as fully elaborated “object.” (Art 72)

     

    Even more forcefully, one can say that here we are not dealing with objects at all but rather with what systems theory sometimes calls “eigenvalues” or “eigenbehaviors,” recursive distinctions that unfold–and can only unfold–over time, even as they can only be experienced in the nano-moment of the present.[5] From this vantage, “objects appear as repeated indications, which, rather than having a specific opposite, are demarcated against `everything else’” (46). In fact, Luhmann suggests that we might follow Mead and Whitehead, who “assigned a function to identifiable and recognizable objects, whose primary purpose is to bind time. This function is needed because the reality of experience and actions consists in mere event sequences, that is, in an ongoing self-dissolution” (46).

     

    These terms, it seems to me, are remarkably apt for understanding how Blur‘s significance as a work of art under conditions of postmodernity goes far beyond the mere thematizations we can readily articulate. Indeed, in its unstable shape, shifting constantly in both density of light and moisture, this building that is not a building could well be described as epitomizing “a temporal unity that is either no longer or not yet observed”: a something that is also, to use Diller+Scofidio’s words, a nothing–in short, a blur. At the same time, paradoxically, as a “metaform,” one could hardly imagine a more daring and original formal decision that dramatically distinguishes itself from “the unmarked space of everything else.”

     

    Figure 3
    Figure 3: The “Blur Building.”
    Courtesy of Diller+Scofidio

     

    When we combine this understanding of the artwork as what Luhmann (following Michel Serres) calls a “quasi-object” with attention to the double aspect of its formal decisions outlined above, we can zero in on the fact that, paradoxically, the “shapelessness” of the Blur building is precisely what constitutes its most decisive and binding formal quality–and not least, of course, with regard to adjacent formal decisions in architecture. Its “refusal” of architecture and its dematerialization of the architectural medium paradoxically epitomize the question of architectural form from a Luhmannian perspective; the shape-shifting, loosely-defined space of Blur only dramatizes what is true of all architectural forms. As the shifting winds over Lake Neuchatel blow the cloud this way and that, the joke is not on Blur, but rather on any architectural forms that think they are “solid,” real “objects”–that have, one might say, a compositional rather than systematic understanding of the medium. In this light, one is tempted to view those moments when the winds at Lake Neuchatel swept nearly all the cloud away to reveal the underlying tensegrity structure of Blur–leaving, as one reviewer put it, the view of “an unfinished building awaiting its skin” (Schafer 93)–as the most instructive all, insofar as THE BUILDING (as object), “official architecture,” is revealed to be precisely not “the building” (as form).

     

    And as we have already noted, the effectiveness of these formal decisions is only enhanced by the fact that they are smuggled inside the Trojan Horse of the work’s savvy play with the “art imitates nature” theme. From a systems theory point of view, the joke is not on those who think that art imitates nature, but rather on those who think it doesn’t–not in the sense of “an imitation of something that presumably exists along with and outside of art,” but rather in the sense that “it now imitates the world’s invisibility, a nature that can no longer be apprehended as a whole” (Art 92). Another name for this fact, as we have already noted, is contingency–namely, the contingency of the distinctions and indications that make the world available and that, because contingent, simultaneously make the world unavailable. And it is against that contingency that the artwork and its formal decisions assert themselves. To put it succinctly, the work of art begins with a radically contingent distinction–a formal decision that could be otherwise–and then gradually builds up, through recursive self-reference, its own unique, non-paraphrasable character–its internal necessity, if you like. As Luhmann characterizes it,

     

    The artwork closes itself off by reusing what is already determined in the work as the other side of further distinctions. The result is a unique, circular accumulation of meaning, which often escapes one’s first view (or is grasped only “intuitively”) . . . . This creates an overall impression of necessity–the work is what it is, even though it is made, individual, and contingent, rather than necessary in an ontological sense. The work of art, one might say, manages to overcome its own contingency. (120)

     

    But here (and this is a crucial point), the recursive self-reference of form–and not the materiality of the medium per se–is key; as Luhmann puts it, “in working together, form and medium generate what characterizes successful artworks, namely, improbable evidence” (119). The genius of Blur from this vantage is that submits itself to this contingency in the vagaries and malleability of its shape, its “loose” binding of time (to recall Whitehead and Mead’s definition of objects), while simultaneously taking it into account, but as it were preemptively, within its own frame, as “an indicating operation that observes, as if from the corner of its eye, what happens on the other side of form” (147-48). And in doing so, “it employs constraints for the sake of increasing the work’s freedom in disposing over other constraints” (148), and this includes, of course, those contingencies that, rather than threatening the work with obsolescence, now increase the resonance of the work with its environment.

     

    Of course, this raises the question of what, exactly, art is, if the formlessness of the object is equated with the strength of its formal statement–if the strongest form of “something” turns out to be “nothing.” Here, however, we need only remind ourselves of the point we made a moment ago: that questions of form are not questions of objects (and indeed, if we follow Whitehead, Mead, and systems theory, even objects are not questions of objects). Or to put it another way, it is a question not of the being of the artwork but rather of its meaning. And if that’s the case, then we would do well, Luhmann rightly suggests, to remember the lessons of Duchamp, Cage, and conceptual art in general.[6] “One can ask how an art object distinguishes itself from other natural or artificial objects, for example, from a urinal or a snow shovel,” Luhmann writes (Art 34). “Marcel Duchamp used the form of a work of art to impress this question on his audience and, in a laudable effort, eliminated all sensuously recognizable differences between the two. But can a work of art at once pose and answer this question? ” (34). The answer, as it turns out, is no, because the meaning of Duchamp’s snow shovel–the significance of its first-order formal decisions–depends upon (and indeed ingeniously anticipates and manipulates) a second-order discourse of “art” criticism and theory in terms of which those first-order decisions are received. The first-order observer need only “identify a work of art as an object in contradistinction to all other objects or processes” (71). But for those who experience the work and want to understand its significance, the situation is quite different. Here, the project of Cage and Duchamp is “to confront the observer with the question of how he goes about identifying a work of art as a work of art. The only possible answer is: by observing observations” (71):

     

    The observer uses a distinction to indicate what he observes. This happens when it happens. But if one wants to observe whether and how this happens, employing a distinction is not enough–one must also indicate the distinction. The concept of form serves this purpose . . . . Whoever observes forms observes other observers in the rigorous sense that he is not interested in the materiality, expectations, or utterances of these observers, but strictly and exclusively in their use of distinctions. (66-7)

     

    Luhmann argues, in fact, that this is the issue that art and art criticism have been struggling with at least since the early modern period. The convention of the still life, for example, which assumes great importance in Italian and Dutch painting, presents us with “unworthy” objects that “could acquire meaning only by presenting the art of presentation itself,” focusing our attention on “the blatant discrepancy between the banality of the subject matter and its artful presentation” (Art 69)–a process that is only further distilled (more abstractly and formally, as it were) in Duchamp’s snow shovel. Indeed, part of the genius of Duchamp’s work is that it reveals how the formula of “disinterested pleasure” fails to clarify what can be meant by artful presentation as “an end in itself,” which only begs the question of whether “there is perhaps a special interest in being disinterested, and can we assume that such an interest also motivates the artist who produces the work, and who can neither preclude nor deny an interest in the interests of others?” (69). For Luhmann, such questions index the situation of art as a social system under functionally differentiated modernity, of art struggling to come to terms with its raison d’être–in systems theory terms, to achieve and justify its operational closure, its newly-won “autonomy.” “To create a work of art under these sociohistorical conditions,” then, “amounts to creating specific forms for an observation of observations. This is the sole purpose for which the work is ‘produced.’ From this perspective, the artwork accomplishes the structural coupling between first- and second-order observations in the realm of art . . . . The artist accomplishes this by clarifying–via his own observations of the emerging work–how he and others will observe the work” (69-70).

     

    Now such an understanding is well and good, but it would seem to leave wholly to the side the question of the experience of art as a perceptual and phenomenological event–something that would appear to be rather spectacularly foregrounded in Blur, as Mark Hansen has recently argued, and foregrounded, moreover, quite self-consciously in terms of the function of spectacle in the tradition of the international Expo as a genre (a matter emphasized in Diller’s lectures about the project at Princeton and elsewhere) (Hansen 325-30; Diller+Scofidio 92-4). Indeed, one might well argue that this, and not the coupling of first- and second-order observations by means of form, is what motivates contemporary art, its experimentation with different media, and so on–a rule that is only proved, so the argument would unfold, by the exception of conceptual art. Yet here, it seems to me, we find one of the more original and innovative aspects of Luhmann’s theory of art as a social system. Luhmann’s point is not to deny the phenomenological aspect of the artwork, but rather to point out the fact–which seems rather obvious, upon reflection–that the meaning of the artwork cannot be referenced to, much less reduced to, this material and perceptual aspect. Rather, the work of art co-presents perception and communication–and does so in a way that turns out to be decisive for what another theoretical vocabulary might call art’s “critical” function in relation to society.

     

    To understand how this happens, we need to remember that for Luhmann, perception and communication operate in mutually exclusive, operationally closed, autopoietic systems, though they are structurally coupled through media such as language. As Luhmann puts it in a formulation surely calculated to provoke: “Humans cannot communicate; not even their brains can communicate; not even their conscious minds can communicate. Only communication can communicate” (“How Can the Mind” 371). “Communication operates with an unspecific reference to the participating state of mind,” he continues; “it is especially unspecific as to perception. It cannot copy states of mind, cannot imitate them, cannot represent them” (381). At first, this contention seems almost ridiculously counter-intuitive, but upon reflection it is rather commonsensical. As Luhmann explains–and there is ample evidence for this in contemporary neurobiology and cognitive science–“what we perceive as our own mind operates as an isolated autopoietic system. There is no conscious link between one mind and another. There is no operational unity of more than one mind as a system, and whatever appears as a consensus is the construct of an observer, that is, his own achievement” (372). At the same time, however, consciousness and perception are a medium for communication. On the one hand, unperceived communications do not exist (if they did, how would we know?); communication “can hardly come into being without the participation of the mind,” Luhmann points out, and in this sense “the relationship is asymmetrical” (374). On the other hand, “communication uses the mind as a medium precisely because communication does not thematize the mind in question. Metaphorically speaking, the mind in question remains invisible to communication” (378). The mind is its own operationally closed (biological) system, but because it is also a necessary medium for communication, “we can then say that the mind has the privileged position of being able to disturb, stimulate, and irritate communication” (379). It cannot instruct or direct communications–“reports of perceptions are not perceptions themselves”–but it can “stimulate communication without ever becoming communication” (379-80).

     

    This “irreducibility” of perception to communication (and vice versa) and their asymmetrical relationship are important to art for several reasons. First, as Dietrich Schwanitz notes, perception and communication operate at different speeds–and this is something art puts to use. “Compared to communication,” he writes,

     

    the dimension of perception displays a considerably higher rate of information processing. The impression of immediacy in perception produces the notion that the things we perceive are directly present. Naturally, this is an illusion, for recent brain research has proven that sensory input is minimal compared with the complexity of neuronal self-perception . . . . Together, cultural and neuronal construction thus constitute a form of mediation that belies the impression of immediacy in perception. That does not, however, alter the fact that perception takes place immediately as compared to communication, the selective process of which is a sequential one. (494)

     

    To put it another way, although both perception and communication are autopoietic systems that operate on the basis of difference and distinction, their very different processing speeds make it appear that perception confirms, stabilizes, and makes immediate, while communication (to put it in Derridean terms) differs, defers, and temporalizes. In the work of art, the difference between perception and communication is “re-entered” on the side of communication, but (because of this asymmetry in speeds) in a way that calls attention to the contingency of communication–not of the first-order communication of the artwork, which appears incapable of emendation (it is what it is), but of the second-order observation of the work’s meaning vis à vis the system of art. This can be accomplished, as in Blur, by making perception “outrun” communication, as it were (a process well described by Hansen), the better to provoke a question that the work itself is made to answer; or, conversely, in a work like On Kawara’s Date Paintings, by using the calculated deficit of perceptual cues and information in the “paintings” themselves to call attention to the difference between the work’s immediate perceptual surface and its meaning.

     

    Figure 4
    Figure 4: Date Painting
    On Kawara

     

    Thus, the artwork co-presents the difference between perception and communication and it uses perception to “irritate” and stimulate communication to respond to the question, “what does this perceptual event mean?” And it is this difference–and how art uses it–that allows art to have something like a privileged relationship to what is commonly invoked as the “ineffable” or the “incommunicable.” As Luhmann puts it,

     

    The function of art would then consist in integrating what is in principle incommunicable–namely, perception–into the communication network of society . . . . The art system concedes to the perceiving consciousness its own unique adventure in observing artworks–and yet makes available as communication the formal selection that triggered the adventure. Unlike verbal communication, which all too quickly moves toward a yes/no bifurcation, communication guided by perception relaxes the structural coupling of consciousness and communication (without destroying it, of course) . . . . In a manner that is matched neither by thought nor by communication, perception presents astonishment and recognition in a single instant. Art uses, enhances, and in a sense exploits the possibilities of perception in such a way that it can present the unity of this distinction . . . . [T]he pleasure of astonishment, already described in antiquity, refers to the unity of the difference between astonishment and recognition, to the paradox that both intensify one another (Art 141).

     

    And, Luhmann adds–in an observation directly relevant to Blur‘s audacious formal solution to the “problem” of architecture–“Extravagant forms play an increasingly important role in this process” (141).

     

    This is not, however, simply a matter of “pleasure.” In fact, it is what gives art something like a privileged critical relationship to society, because art “establishes a reality of its own that differs from ordinary reality”; “despite the work’s perceptibility, despite its undeniable reality,” Luhmann writes, “it simultaneously constitutes another reality . . . . Art splits the world into a real world and an imaginary world,” and “the function of art concerns the meaning of this split” (Art 142). By virtue of its unique relationship to the difference between perception and communication, art can raise this question in an especially powerful way not available to other social systems. If we think of objects as “eigen-behaviors” (to seize once again on Heinz von Foerster’s term), as stabilizations made possible by the repeated, recursive application of particular distinctions, then we might observe that “the objects that emerge from the recursive self-application of communication”–versus, say, rocks or trees–“contribute more than any other kinds of norms and sanctions to supplying the social system with necessary redundancies.” They literally fix social space. This is probably even more true, Luhmann observes, of such “quasi-objects” (to use Michel Serres’s phrase) “that have been invented for the sake of this specific function, such as kings or soccer balls. Such ‘quasi-objects’ can be comprehended only in relation to this function”–indeed it is their sole reason for being. “Works of art,” Luhmann continues,

     

    are quasi-objects in this sense. They individualize themselves by excluding the sum total of everything else; not because they are construed as given but because their significance as objects implies a realm of social regulation. One must scrutinize works of art as intensely and with as close attention to the object as one does when watching kings and soccer balls; in this way–and in the more complex case where one observes other observers by focusing on the same object–the socially regulative reveals itself. (47, emphasis added)

     

    And when we remember that for Luhmann this “more complex” case is represented nowhere more clearly than in our experience of the mass media, the relationship between Blur‘s formal decisions as a work of art and its critical agenda of shedding light on “the socially regulative”–on the terrain of an international media Expo, no less–comes even more forcefully into view. In these terms, works of art, in calling our attention to the realm of “the socially regulative,” cast light on precisely those contingencies, constructions, and norms that the mass media, in its own specific mode of communication, occludes. In the first instance (the artwork), we seem to be dealing with completely ad hoc, constructed objects whose realm of reference is not “the real world” but rather that of the imagination; in the latter, we appear to be dealing with the opposite, in which the representations of the mass media are supposedly motivated by the objects and facts of “the real world.” In fact, however, this thematization in terms of “imaginative” and “real” only obscures the need to be rearticulate the relationship in terms of the dynamics of first- and second-order observation of different social systems. As Luhmann points out, “the mass media create the illusion that we are first-order observers whereas in fact this is already second-order observing” (“Deconstruction as Second-Order Observing” 775); or, more baldly still, “put in Kantian terms: the mass media generate a transcendental illusion” (The Reality of the Mass Media 4). The mass media’s rendering of reality, however–and this is a point that the “post-ethical” character of Diller+Scofidio’s work insists on as well–is not to be taken as, “as most people would be inclined to think, a distortion of reality. It is a construction of reality. For from the point of view of a postontological theory of observing systems, there is no distinct reality out there (who, then, would make these distinctions?) . . . [T]here is no transcendental subject,” Luhmann continues. “We have to rely on the system of the mass media that construct our reality . . . If there is no choice in accepting these observations, because there is no equally powerful alternative available, we have at least the possibility to deconstruct the presentations of the mass media, their presentations of the present” (“Deconstruction as Second-Order Observing” 776).

     

    That deconstruction of the mass media in Blur proceeds by means of the artwork’s second-order observation of the first-order system of the mass media, but it can carry out that observation only as art, only by “doing what it does” within the codes of the social system of art. The formal symmetry between those two observing systems, however–the fact that the dynamics of communication in autopoietic social systems operate in the same ways in each system (on the basis of the “blind spot” of paradoxical self-reference, and so on)–only throws into critical relief the important difference in the relationship of communication and perception (and in the case at hand, specifically visual perception) that is quite specific to each system: a difference that Blur will put to critical use under the thematics, as Diller suggests, of “spectacle.” We can gain a sharper sense of just how this is the case when we remember that for Luhmann, electronic mass media is just the latest in a series of powerful developments in the history of what he calls “media of dissemination,” beginning with language and then, crucially, the invention of writing and printing, whose power lies in their ability to make communication independent from a specific perceptual substrate or set of coordinates. “Alphabetized writing made it possible to carry communication beyond the temporally and spatially limited circle of those who were present at any particular time,” he writes, and language per se –and even more so writing and printing–“increases the understandability of communication beyond the sphere of perception” (Social Systems 160). Unlike oral speech, which “can compensate for lack of information with persuasion, and can synchronize speaking, hearing, and accepting in a rhythmic and rhapsodic way, leaving literally no time for doubt” (162), writing and printing “enforce an experience of the difference that constitutes communication,” and “they are, in this precise sense, more communicative forms of communication” (162-63).

     

    For Luhmann, the electronic mass media represent the culmination of this general line of historical development. Indeed, “for the differentiation of a system of the mass media, the decisive achievement can be said to have been the invention of technologies of dissemination which not only circumvent interaction among those co-present, but effectively render such interaction impossible for the mass media’s own communications” (The Reality 15-16)–a process begun with the advent of the printing press, when “the volume of written material multiplied to the extent that oral interaction among all participants in communication is effectively and visibly rendered impossible” (16). And so it is, Luhmann argues, that

     

    in the wake of the so-called democratization of politics and its dependence on the media of public opinion . . . those participating in politics–politicians and voters alike–observe one another in the mirror of public opinion . . . . The level of first-order observation is guaranteed by the continuous reports of the mass media . . . . Second-order observation occurs via the inferences one can draw about oneself or others, if one assumes that those who wish to participate politically encounter one another in the mirror of public opinion, and that this is sufficient (Art 64-65).

     

    It is just this situation that Blur attempts to address, if we believe Diller+Scofidio–namely, by subjecting communication in its mass mediated mode (as immediately legible and consumable) to a perceptual Blur, so that spectacle here operates not in the services of an immediately meaningful, pre-fab content (as in the electronic mass media) but rather as the quite unavoidable “irritation” or “perturbation” for another communication–one whose meaning is far from immediately clear and, in being so, operates directly in the services of art’s own communication and autopoiesis about itself (i.e. “what does this mean?; is this art?”), and its second-order observation of the all-too-tight coupling of perception and communication in the mass media. In this way, Diller+Scofidio’s Blur might be understood as bringing into focus 1)how the contingency of communication is managed and manipulated (quite improbably, as Luhmann reminds us) by the “socially regulative” in the electronic mass media and 2)how that dynamic, in turn, is coupled to a certain “consumerist” schematization of visuality, in which the difference between perception and communication is always already “re-entered” in mass-mediated communication to produce a “pre-digested,” iconographic visual space readily incorporated by a subject whose (un)ethical relation to the visual might best be summed up as: “CLICK HERE.”

     

    We could say, then, that Blur uses the difference between perception and communication in a way diametrically opposed to what we find it in the electronic mass media, and then routes that difference between art and the mass media through the work’s formal choices to render them specifically meaningful as art, and not just as well-meaning critical platitude. What is remarkable here, of course, is not that Blur makes this (somewhat unremarkable) observation about the relationship of perception and communication in electronic mass media, a relationship particularly evident in the realm of visuality; what is remarkable is that Blur does so without saying so, by insisting only on itself. This is simply to say that Blur communicates this difference as Art. And if it didn’t, we wouldn’t pay any attention to it.

     

    Notes

     

    1. It should be noted here–and it is abundantly clear in the catalog, Scanning, that accompanied the retrospective of Diller+Scofidio’s work at the Whitney in New York–that the distinction between “art” and “architecture” is of relatively little moment for Diller+Scofidio, and indeed their body of work is calculated to blur it (if the expression can be allowed in this context) beyond recognition. The same is true for Luhmann, who treats architecture as a subspecies of art, even while addressing here and there its differences from, say, painting or literary art.

     

    2. It should be noted that the term “postmodern” is one for which Luhmann has no use. For him, the postmodern is merely an intensification of features already fully present in modernity. On this point, see his essay “Why Does Society Describe Itself as Postmodern?”

     

    3. See on this point Wolfe, 67-68.

     

    4. This phrase was used by Koolhaas and Mau in their presentations of their Tree City project for the Parc Downsview Park competition in Toronto in 1999-2000. For an overview, see Polo.

     

    5. As Luhmann puts it, “Objects are therefore nothing but the eigenbehaviors of observing systems that result from using and reusing their previous distinctions” (“Deconstruction” 768).

     

    6. In this connection, we should remember, as Roselee Goldberg reminds us, just how influential conceptual art was for the early, formative stages of Diller+Scofidio’s career.

     

    Works Cited

     

    • Anderson, Laurie, Aaron Betsky, and K. Michael Hays, eds. Scanning: The Aberrant Architectures of Diller+Scofidio. New York: Whitney Museum of Art, 2003.
    • Cramer, Ned. “All Natural.” Architecture 91.7 (July 2002): 51-59.
    • Diller+Scofidio. Blur: The Making of Nothing. New York: Abrams, 2002.
    • Dimendberg, Edward. “Blurring Genres.” Anderson et al. 67-80.
    • Goldberg, Roselee. “Dancing About Architecture.” Anderson et al. 44-60.
    • Hansen, Mark. “Wearable Space.” Configurations 10:2 (2002): 321-70.
    • Luhmann, Niklas. Art as a Social System. Trans. Eva M. Knodt. Stanford: Stanford UP, 2000.
    • —. “The Cognitive Program of Constructivism and a Reality that Remains Unknown.” Selforganization: Portrait of a Scientific Revolution. Ed. Wolfgang Krohn et al. Dordrecht: Kluwer, 1990. 64-85.
    • —. “Deconstruction as Second-Order Observing.” New Literary History 24 (1993): 763-82.
    • —. “How Can the Mind Participate in Communication?” Materialities of Communication. Ed. Hans Ulrich Gumbrecht and K. Ludwig Pfeiffer. Stanford: Stanford UP, 1994. 371-87.
    • —. The Reality of the Mass Media. Stanford: Stanford UP, 2000.
    • —. Social Systems. Trans. John Bednarz, Jr. with Dirk Baecker. Stanford: Stanford UP, 1995.
    • —. “Why Does Society Describe Itself as Postmodern?” Observing Complexity: Systems Theory and Postmodernity. Ed. William Rasch and Cary Wolfe. Minneapolis: U of Minnesota P, 2000. 35-49.
    • Lyotard, Jean-François. The Differend: Phrases in Dispute. Trans. George Van Den Abbeele. Minneapolis: U of Minnesota P, 1988.
    • —.The Postmodern Condition: A Report on Knowledge. Trans. Geoff Bennington and Brian Massumi. Fwd. Fredric Jameson. Minneapolis: U of Minnesota P, 1984.
    • Lyotard, Jean-François, and Jean-Loup Thè:baud. Just Gaming. Trans. Wlad Godzich. Minneapolis: U of Minnesota P, 1985.
    • Polo, Marco. “Environment as Process.” Canadian Architect 45.10 (Oct. 2000): 14-19.
    • Schafer, Ashley. “Designing Inefficiencies.” Anderson et al. 93-102.
    • Schwanitz, Dietrich. “Systems Theory and the Difference between Communication and Consciousness: An Introduction to a Problem and Its Context.” MLN 111.3 (1996): 488-505.
    • Wolfe, Cary. Critical Environments: Postmodern Theory and the Pragmatics of the “Outside.” Minneapolis: U of Minnesota P, 1998.

     

     

     

  • Queer Optimism

    Michael Snediker

    English Department
    Mount Holyoke College
    msnedike@mtholyoke.edu

     

    Epithets

     

    While optimism has made cameos in the pages of queer theory, “queer” is not itself readily imaginable as one of optimism’s epithets. More familiar, perhaps, is Lauren Berlant’s and Michael Warner’s invocation of “hegemonic optimism” in their 1998 essay, “Sex in Public” (549). Berlant raises the spectre of “dubious optimism” in her 2001 essay, “The Subject of True Feeling: Pain, Privacy, and Politics” (129). The epithets “dubious” and “hegemonic” construe optimism as a tease, a seduction that queer theory might expose–and subsequently if not simultaneously jettison altogether–as that which cozens liberals (queer and non-queer) into complacency, the extensiveness and lure of which would all the more require optimism’s debunking.

     

    In the vernacular, optimism is often imagined epithetically as “premature”: as though if the optimist at hand knew all that she could eventually know, she would retract her optimism altogether. Prematurity would qualify optimism as a temporary state of insufficient information. The phrase “woefully optimistic,” on the other hand, implies that the knowledge that would warrant optimism’s retraction might never arrive. As an epithet, “woefully” (like “hegemonic,” “dubious,” or “premature”) subjects optimism to an outside judgment, the likes of which the optimist in question is presumed unable to make. It is difficult to imagine an optimist, as conventionally understood, denominating her own optimism as woeful or premature. Indeed, the moment at which a person is able to characterize her optimism as such might well mark the moment at which being optimistic cedes, as a position, if not to being pessimistic, then to something like being realistic. (I will return to the idea that being pessimistic potentially is potentially equivalent to being realistic.) The epithets delineated, that is, do not describe optimism so much as impose a diagnosis external to it that would make further characterizations of optimism (and more to the point, attachments to optimism) unnecessary.

     

    For all the lexical and semantic differences between the above epithets (“hegemonic,” for instance, hardly seems synonymous with “premature”), the optimism to which these epithets attach is fundamentally the same. This optimism can describe the utopic energy that motivates counterpublics (along the lines drawn by Michael Warner); or more generally, the liberal nation-state; or cynically, the inane recalcitrances of the Bush administration; or literarily, the pluck of Pollyanna or Horatio Alger’s Ragged Dick. I do not seek a new relation (oppositional, proponential) to this optimism. Rather, my essay calls for a revaluation of optimism itself. The particular élan that underwrites utopic optimisms can be traced to Leibniz, and I shall turn later in the essay to the ways Leibnizian optimism crucially differs from that of my own project. Succinctly: utopic optimism–and following, the optimism that crops up both in queer theory and critical theory more generally–is attached, temporally, to a future. Not unrelated to its futural (promissory, parousiac) stakes is its allergic relation to knowledge. For Leibniz, as we shall see, optimism’s attachment to faith would render knowledge superfluous. In current critical thought, optimism’s very sanguinity implies an epistemological deficit. This ostensibly definitional antagonistic relation to knowledge has had the perhaps unsurprising effect of taking optimism out of critical circulation. Queer optimism, oppositely, is not promissory. It doesn’t ask that some future time make good on its own hopes. Rather, queer optimism asks that optimism, embedded in its own immanent present, be interesting. Queer optimism’s interest–its capacity to be interesting, to hold our attention–depends on its emphatic responsiveness to and solicitation of rigorous thinking.

     

    Queer optimism, immanently rather than futurally oriented, does not entail a predisposition in the way that conventional optimism entails predisposition. More simply, it presents a critical field and asks that this field be taken seriously. If my investigation, then, extends to the likes of happiness, this is not because if one were more queerly optimistic, one would feel happier. Rather, queer optimism can be considered as a form of meta-optimism: it wants to think about feeling good, to make disparate aspects of feeling good thinkable.

     

    Queer optimism, then, seeks to take positive affects as serious and interesting sites of critical investigation. Likewise, queer optimism insists on thinking about personhood (as opposed to subjectivity) in terms of a durability not immediately or proleptically subject to structuralist or post-structuralist mistrust. Queer optimism concerns persons, rather than subjects or even selves. The latter categories inhabit (and unknowingly curate) particular discursive labyrinths (Cartesian, Foucaultian, Althusserian, Hegelian, Lacanian, etc.) of discipline, desire, and knowledge to which examinations of personhood at best only obliquely speak. My theoretical preference for persons over subjects asks how personhood variously can be characterized, removed from the columbarium of subjectivity.

     

    This critical project is born of the sense that queer theory, for all its contributions to our thinking about affect, has had far more to say about negative affects than positive ones. Furthermore, that in its attachment to not taking persons as such for granted, queer theory’s suspicious relation to persons has itself become suspiciously routinized, if not taken for granted in its own right. Risking charges of producing but another reductive binary, I shall for present, heuristic purposes be calling this tropaic gravitation toward negative affect and depersonation queer pessimism. It’s worth noting that queer pessimism has as little truck with conventional pessimism as queer optimism trucks with optimism, per se. Still, queer theory’s habitation of this pessimistic field is cause for real concern. Melancholy, self-shattering, the death drive, shame: these, within queer theory, are categories to conjure with. These terms and the scholarship energized by them do not in and of themselves comprise queer theory. To argue that they do caricatures both queer theory and the theorists who have put these terms on the map. However, these terms have dominated queer-theoretical discourse, and they have often seemed immune to queer theory’s own perspicacities.

     

    My essay conducts a purposive survey of the work of Judith Butler, Leo Bersani, Eve Kosofsky Sedgwick, and Lee Edelman. Without taking as definitive either this survey or my analysis of any given author, I wish these analyses to articulate a certain shape, to describe a current of enchantment that has privileged “suffering” and “dereliction” (to invoke two of Badiou’s terms) as sites both of ethics and understanding. Queer theory’s analyses of negative affect and ontological instability have been and continue to be both generous and generative. My wish is to clear a space for the possible generosities and generativities of queer optimism’s corresponding milieu. As space-clearing, this essay does not deliver the queer-optimistic “goods,” per se: positing a compact or even synecdochal account of queer optimism is at cross purposes with my reluctance to reduce queer optimism’s field before expanding it. I offer “Queer Optimism,” here, in the spirit of exordium and invitation.

     

    Of Sadness & Certainty

     

    The year I told my parents I was gay was also the year of my first sustained encounter with depression. At its bleakest, sadness and self-loathing felt like the sole remainders of a self which in all other aspects seemed untrustable and ersatz. Past happinesses seemed the feat of terrific mountebanking, moored either to monstrous ulterior motives or to machinically vacant automaticity. Delight was a little boat on a sad sea; it was slight and, simultaneously, perversely too heavy to be buoyant, too heavy because so quickly waterlogged.1

     

    What Elaine Scarry observed of physical suffering seemed as true of psychological suffering, that “for the person in pain, so incontestably, and unnegotiably present is it that ‘having pain’ may come to be thought of as the most vibrant example of what it is to ‘have certainty’” (4). Incontestable and unnegotiable, sadness seemed certain, tenaciously and vibrantly so. If sadness was the only thing I could feel utterly certain about, such an observation dovetailed with the inkling that certainty was itself a kind of sadness. Judith Butler’s accounts of melancholy seemed to confirm this latter possibility with an eloquence I had neither will nor skill to contest. “I want to suggest,” Butler writes, “that rigid forms of gender and sexual identification, whether homosexual or heterosexual, appear to spawn forms of melancholy” (Psychic Life 144). Not just particularly gendered or sexual identities, but “coherent identity position[s]” in general, are suspect within Butler’s account (149). “Perhaps,” Butler continues, “only by risking the incoherence of identity is connection possible” (149).2

     

    It seemed, in my first engagements with Butler’s texts, that I had two options. I could risk my own incoherence (which is as much to say, accept the originality of that incoherence), or can attach to coherence; as described by Butler, however, the latter can never really be an option. How can a nascent queer theorist indebted to and inspired by Butler choose the latter, when coherence was constitutively equivalent to reification, naturalization, and congealment? “Further,” Butler writes, “this [masculine or feminine] identity is constructed and maintained by the consistent application of this taboo [against homosexuality], not only in the stylization of the body in compliance with discrete categories of sex, but in the production and ‘disposition’ of sexual desire” (Gender Trouble 81). To attach to coherence would be to deny this series of “consistent applications,” to confuse repetition (amounting to congealment [81] or sedimentation [178]) with a “false foundationalism, the results of affectivity being formed or ‘fixed’ through the effects of the prohibition [against homosexuality]” (81).3 The globby abjection of a term like “congealment” should not, I think, go without saying. As though it weren’t bad enough that stability could come only on the heels of melancholy, this stability becomes, within Butler’s rhetoric, not just melancholic but disgusting, a sort of ontological aspic.

     

    My particular sadnesses, then, were all the more humiliating and confusing in so closely reflecting the critical writings to which I, as an initiate into queer theory, was attached. My experience of feeling ersatz, however, had none of the thrill of reading about being ersatz; likewise (to look ahead to another queer paradigm), my experience of feeling shattered lacked all the thrill of reading about being shattered. Stronger than the excitement of radical new possibilities of self-losing, of the vigorous embrace of factitiousness, was the grief of self-loss and the consuming repellence of feeling fictive. It seemed humiliating to approximate, even literalize, the conditions that in theory seemed so important, even exhilarating; but only to approximate them, to come up short. What I wanted for myself was the opposite of what I found intellectually most interesting and vital.

     

    What I noticed only later, returning to Butler’s texts, was the puzzling disjunction between the permanence ascribed to identities and the permanence ascribed to melancholy itself. Whereas identities appeared permanent (or became permanent through a process unsavory as congealment), melancholy simply was permanent. “This [melancholy] identification is not simply momentary or occasional, but becomes a new structure of identity” (Gender Trouble 74). Whereas the identity borne of melancholy required constant, quotidian maintenance, melancholy itself was described as a “permanent internalization” (74). Furthermore, Butler’s inclination to describe melancholy’s technique as “magical” rendered melancholy unimpeachable (73). Melancholy wasn’t like a magic trick, in the manner of debunkable smoke and mirrors; it was simply magic, a process beyond explanation, not entailing a suspension of disbelief, but seducing one into belief. Its effects were proof of its reality, and beyond analysis: unlike the identities that both “spawn[ed]” (Psychic Life 144) and were spawned by melancholy,4 whose congealed repetitions and machinic habits were nothing, under Butler’s perspicacious eye, if not susceptible to challenge and revision. Melancholy, that is, produced what would (erroneously) be experienced as coherent or certain identity, even as this false coherence was founded on the certain permanence of a melancholy whose reality was beyond reproach.

     

    For Leo Bersani, stable identities aren’t melancholic, but rather the source of interpsychical aggression. In one of his most recent books, Forms of Being: Cinema, Aesthetics, Subjectivity, Bersani reprises his conception of persons as fundamentally destructive, and sexuality as that which underwrites both auto- and allo-destructiveness. Bersani and co-author Ulysse Dutoit write:

     

    If we dismiss–as it seems to us we should–the more or less optimistic psychoanalytic theories between Freud and Lacan, theories that would make us more or less happy by way of such things as adaptation to the real and genital normalcy, then we may judge the great achievement of psychoanalysis to be its attempt to account for our inability to love others, and ourselves. The promises of adaptive balance and sexual maturity undoubtedly explain the phenomenal appeal of psychoanalysis as therapy, but its greatness may lie in its insistence on an intractable human destructiveness–a destructiveness resistant to any therapeutic endeavours whatsoever. This has little to do with sex, and we can distinguish between the practices normally identified as sex and a permanent, irreducibly destructive disposition which the great figures of psychoanalytic theory–especially Freud, Klein, Laplanche and Lacan–more or less explicitly define as sexuality. (124-25)5

     

    Bersani’s and Dutoit’s qualification of optimism and happiness as “more or less” connotes less optimism’s insidiousness–an allegation more readily detectable in Berlant’s and Warner’s affixing of “optimism” and “hegemonic”–than its inconsequentiality. Whether insidious or inconsequential, the result, however, is the same; optimism, for Bersani and Dutoit, calls not for further inquiry, but for “dismiss[al].” The grounds for dismissal, here, lie in the teleological alignment of those “more or less optimistic psychoanalytic theories’” with “real and genital normalcy.” In its imbricating of “real and genital normalcy” with the implicit factitiousness of both “real” and “normalcy” (and, in turn, its suggestion of heterosexuality’s conscription of this factitiousness as its own perseveratingly veracious prerogative), Bersani’s etiolated sketch of psychoanalysis resembles Berlant’s own recent analysis of optimism’s inextricability from the coercions of love.6 But even if queer theory positions normativity as heterosexual fantasy (and vice versa), why does it follow that heterosexuality necessarily monopolizes optimism? Why couldn’t optimism alternately navigate the non-normative? Or be conceived as other than universalized and universalizing? The dismissible inconsequentiality of the above passage’s optimism contrasts starkly with the passage’s subsequent account of “destructive disposition” as “permanent,” and “irreducibly so,” specifications rhetorically similar to Butler’s depictions of melancholy. Queer optimism seeks to turn these tables–to consider the possible permanences of optimism, the possible fictions of aggression.

     

    Bersani omits British psychoanalyst D.W. Winnicott from his catalogue of “great figures of psychoanalytic theory,” perhaps, in part, because Winnicott’s theorizations of aggression challenge the intrinsically negative, malfeasant valence of Bersani’s primordial destructiveness. Contrary to Bersani’s invocation of “human destructiveness” as commensurate with (if not underwriting) “our inability to love others,” Winnicott argues provocatively and sensitively that destructiveness is itself a condition for love. Unlike Bersani’s consideration of love’s destructive tendencies,7 Winnicott’s insights are not reducible to theorizations of masochism insistent upon desire’s inextricability from pain. Rather, Winnicott’s insights pertain to a sphere more expansive than that in which desire and masochism so quickly collide. Winnicott writes thus, in his crucial essay, “The Use of an Object and Relating Through Identifications”:

     

    This change (from relating to usage) means that the subject destroys the object. From here it could be argued by an armchair philosopher that there is therefore no such thing in practice as the use of an object: if the object is external, then the object is destroyed by the subject. Should the philosopher come out of his chair and sit on the floor with his patient, however, he will find that there is an intermediate position. In other words, he will find that after “subject relates to object” comes “subject destroys object” (as it becomes external); and then may come “object survives destruction by the subject.” But there may or may not be survival. A new feature thus arrives in the theory of object-relating. The subject says to the object: “I destroyed you,” and the object is there to receive the communication. From now on the subject says: “Hullo object!” “I destroyed you.” “I love you.” “You have value for me because of your survival of my destruction of you.” “While I am loving you I am all the time destroying you in (unconscious) fantasy.” Here fantasy begins for the individual. The subject can now use the object that has survived. It is important to note that it is not only that the subject destroys the object because the object is placed outside the area of omnipotent control. It is equally significant to state this the other way round and to say that it is the destruction of the object that places the object outside the area of the subject’s omnipotent control. In these ways the object develops its own autonomy and life, and (if it survives) contributes-in to the subject, according to its own properties. (89-90)

     

    Winnicott’s conception of destructiveness amounts to a theory of love (as opposed to desire) to the extent that the object survives the destructiveness dealt to it. This is to mark within Winnicott’s work an interest in and valuation of durability that is not inapposite to my own. Put more directly, an object’s durability as such signals that it is an object, and this durability is not recognizable to the Winnicottian subject without the fantasy of destroying it. The destructiveness that an object can withstand, for Winnicott, demonstrates not just the object’s own integrity (an integrity from which the subject might subsequently learn), but its own capacity for loving in spite of feeling damaged or even repelled by the subject. This form of durability (opposite Butler’s flinching congealment) offers an important psychoanalytic context in which to imagine my own subsequent readings. Winnicott’s work seems indispensable both to future queer engagements with psychoanalysis, and not unrelatedly to particularly psychoanalytically-conceived modes of optimistic thinking and practice.

     

    Contrary to Winnicottian destructiveness, Bersanian self-shattering amounts to a temporary figurative suicide, a moment’s disorganization within a field of otherwise intense regulation; or oppositely, an internalization of the destructive, shattering energies otherwise directed outward. Whereas Butler deploys Freud’s “Mourning and Melancholia” in the service of producing a genealogy of subjects, Bersani illuminates resistances and impasses internal to Freud’s Beyond the Pleasure Principle that collectively suggest a violence far more capacious than the one Freud’s text manifestly delineates. “What has been repressed from the speculative second half of Freud’s text,” Bersani writes, “is sexuality as productive masochism. The possibility of exploiting the shattering effects of sexuality in order to maintain the tensions of an eroticized, de-narrativized, and mobile consciousness has been neglected, or refused, in favor of a view of pleasure as nothing more than the reduction of all tension and the evacuation of all excitement” (Freudian Body 63-64). In “Is the Rectum a Grave?” Bersani more explicitly narrativizes self-shattering and the conditions from which its need arises:

     

    The self which the sexual shatters provides the basis on which sexuality is associated with power. It is possible to think of the sexual as, precisely, moving between a hyperbolic sense of self and a loss of all consciousness of self. But sex as self-hyperbole is perhaps a repression of sex as self-abolition. It inaccurately replicates self-shattering as self-swelling, as psychic tumescence. If, as these words suggest, men are especially apt to “choose” this version of sexual pleasure, because their sexual equipment appears to invite by analogy, or at least to facilitate, the phallicizing of the ego, neither sex has exclusive rights to the practice of sex as self-hyperbole. For it is perhaps primarily the degeneration of the sexual into a relationship that condemns sexuality to becoming a struggle for power. As soon as persons are posited, the war begins. It is the self that swells with excitement at the idea of being on top, the self that makes of the inevitable play of thrusts and relinquishments in sex an argument for the natural authority of one sex over the other. (218)

     

    Sex, for Bersani, becomes a spectacular, radical literalization of deconstruction. The “shattering” of sex undoes persons the way queer theory (as paradigmatically practiced by Butler) undoes persons.

     

    I might say here that this essay has less to do theoretically with my own engagements with Freudian or Lacanian psychoanalysis than it does with queer theory’s mobilizations of particular psychoanalytic topoi. More to the point, I am concerned with the particular strains of queer theory that such mobilizations both enable and preempt. For all my interest in Freud, my attention is not primarily to his texts, but to particular receptions of him within queer theory. Freud’s own body of work indubitably remains an important site from which to challenge ostensibly uniforming, simplifying distillations of psychoanalysis. As just one instance of Freud’s usefulness in the interrogation of his reception, one might consider Butler’s dependence on a particular passage from The Ego and the Id. Freud observes thus:

     

    When it happens that a person has to give up a sexual object, there quite often ensues an alteration of his ego which can only be described as a setting up of the object inside the ego, as it occurs in melancholia. (29)

     

    Butler’s reading of this passage takes for granted that a process structurally analogous to that of melancholic incorporation (“as it occurs in melancholia”) is itself equivalentto melancholia:

     

    If we accept the notion that heterosexuality naturalized itself by insisting on the radical otherness of homosexuality, then heterosexual identity is purchased through a melancholic incorporation of the love that it disavows: the man who insists upon the coherence of his heterosexuality will claim that he never loved another man, and hence never lost another man. That love, that attachment, becomes subject to a double disavowal, a never having loved, a never having lost . . . . What ensues is a culture of gender melancholy in which masculinity and femininity emerge as the traces of an ungrieved and ungrievable love. (Psychic Life 139-40)

     

    My interest, contra Butler’s, lies in the extent to which Freud’s account does not literally produce equivalence so much as insist upon similarity. In following a structural pattern that is like melancholia, the process described seems most readily not to be melancholic; analogy marks a structural similarity but explicitly not an affective one. Thus, such a passage from Freud’s writings might not singularly corroborate Butler’s argument that sexual loss effects gender melancholy, but also pressure Freud’s and Butler’s readers to query precisely the differences between the loss of a sexual object and the losses particular to melancholy as such.

     

    There is much in Bersani and Butler to disagree with. Nonetheless, within queer theory (as it has been and is currently being practiced), no one with the exception of Sedgwick has been more influential. The list of essays and books variously indebted to the insights of Butler and Bersani is long, and ever lengthening. The number of times Butler and Bersani are noted in the index of Tim Dean’s and Christopher Lane’s Homosexuality and Psychoanalysis (well over fifty instances) far exceeds references to such seminal psychoanalysts as Sándor Ferenczi (four cites) or Winnicott (zero). While one cannot equate influence with this kind of indexical showing, one nonetheless can get a sense of the extent to which Butler and Bersani have become part of a canon, contested as the category of canonicity (in queer theory or in psychoanalysis) might be.8

     

    Even as Butler and Bersani have positioned their work in the context of AIDS, hate-crimes, and other lived domains of crisis,9 their work, with telling insistence, often depends on abstraction, on metaphor. One doesn’t really shatter when one is fucked, despite Bersani’s accounts of it as such; millions of persons who imagine their subjectivity as fairly cohesive and non-fictive do not necessarily feel melancholy, even if Butler would claim melancholy as the inevitable cost of that cohesiveness. If these models of shattering and gender-melancholy seem less than practicable in lived experience, they’ve become ubiquitous in the no less lived biosphere of the academy.

     

    The alchemy of such figurations demarcates an ever-fluctuating space between (theoretical) scrutiny and (ontological) practice. How to get from one domain to another, without the complex alchemy of figurativity? How might one articulate what happens within the limbo of the figurative? I see figuration as syncope between theoretical and practical domains, between literary and lived investments. Deleuze, in Essays Critical and Clinical, writes that “health as literature, as writing, consists in inventing a people who are missing. It is the task of the fabulating function to invent a people” (4). What if the people who were missing, the people this essay sought to invent, were missing optimists? The non-Bush optimists, the queer optimists, with a voice differing from both queer theory and optimism, as usually understood?

     

    If Deleuze’s turn to literature’s “fabulating function” does not exactly illuminate fabulation’s particular mechanisms, it nonetheless reminds us that fabulation is a function (of something, on something), whose structures and ends can and ought prompt explication in ways that figuration, in its slippery whisper of self-evidence, too often theoretically eludes. At the same time, it strikes me that the move to figuration within theoretical discourse often is a premature one. The transformation of non-figurative phenomena into figurative phenomena as often is a consequence of saturating cathexes that fetishize (and fetishistically treat) phenomena without acknowledgment of either their cathectic pulsions or the fetishization in which they participate.

     

    Along these lines, I again stress the salutary utility of Winnicott, specifically Winnicott’s non-ironic denomination of adolescent depression as “doldrums.” Adumbrated by the gravities of melancholy, doldrums might seem comparably slight. Winnicott, however, does not take his nominally non-enthralled category lightly. Doldrums, clinically, are experienced as miserable, and theoretically, are something that psychoanalysis can engage seriously (and compassionately), from which psychoanalysis can learn. For the purposes of queer optimism, I value the extent to which doldrums resist melancholy’s ostensible capacity to nominally colonize all experiences similar to it. The more there are doldrums, the less of a stronghold melancholy maintains over a field more various and differentiated than one term ever could describe. This Winnicottian de-fetishization of terms seems all the more salient an intellectual (and therapeutic) model in the context of David Eng’s and David Kazanjian’s edited volume, Loss (2003), in which accounts of intense resilience and creativity seem ultimately mischaracterized by their no less intense absorption into the category of melancholia, which, write Eng and Kazanjian, “at the turn of the century has emerged as a crucial touchstone for social and subjective formulations” (23).

     

    There seems in Eng’s and Kazanjian’s collection a conspicuous disparity between innovative scholarship and regression to nominal “touchstones,” as though after Freud’s dichotomizing of mourning and melancholia, a scholar’s choice were de facto only between these two categories. Such a disparity likewise is manifest in Ann Cvetkovich’s coterminous An Archive of Feelings. “What’s required,” Cvetkovich writes, “is a sex positivity that can embrace negativity, including trauma. Allowing a place for trauma within sexuality is consistent with efforts to keep sexuality queer, to maintain a space for shame and perversion within public discourse rather than purging them of their messiness in order to make them acceptable” (63). Cvetkovich wants a trauma that could describe nearly any lesbian experience (53-55), insisting on the de-pathologization of trauma (44-46), but simultaneously wants perversities to sustain their shocking edge. The result is an astute study that seems less energized by its recurrent invoking of trauma, than hampered by a misnomer for a range of experiences better left articulated in their specificity, rather than condensed to a single traumatic term. Winnicott speaks of a similar condensation in Freud’s original delineation of the death drive:

     

    when we look anew at the roots of aggression there are two concepts in particular, each of which must be thrown away deliberately, so that we may see whether . . . we are better off without them. One is Freud’s concept of a death instinct, a by-product of his speculations in which he seemed to be achieving a theoretical simplification that might be compared to the gradual elimination of detail in the technique of a sculptor like Michelangelo. The other is Melanie Klein’s setting up of envy in the prominent place that she gave it at Geneva in 1955. (“Roots” 458-59)

     

    Winnicott’s polemic distinguishes helpfully between the existence of a range of energies or pulsions and the denomination of that range as one “concept.” My reservation regarding works such as Cvetkovich’s has less to do with any given set of “speculations,” which (as Winnicott suggests) are often innovative and adroit, than with their resigned gravitation to a single concept, which can’t possibly do speculations as such justice. The more one can transform speculations into concepts, the more likely one is to turn observations into figurations. Easy enough, as Eng and Kazanjian demonstrate, to wax lyrical on melancholy.10 Harder to wax lyrical about “doldrums,” and thus “doldrums,” for all its banality, retains a useful nonfigurative (or at least differently figurative) specificity.

     

    Loving Shame

     

    Faithful, was all that I could boast
    But Constancy became
    To her, by her innominate
    A something like a shame
    –Emily Dickinson, Franklin 1716

     

    Melancholy and aggression, this essay has argued, are undertheorized terms in queer theory that have nonetheless galvanized a vital and proliferative body of work. Vital and proliferative, but also foreclosing, in its demarcation of an intellectual field that reinforces the intellectual non-viability of a different terrain, which I am calling the field of queer optimism. This section of the essay engages with shame (as opposed to melancholy, aggression, or self-shattering); it departs from the psychoanalytic, partly to attest that queer pessimism isn’t more simply a psychoanalytic pessimism. I’m likewise moved to write about queer theorizations of shame because much of this work (itself intentionally seeking to circumnavigate a psychoanalytic argot) in fact seems optimistically motivated. This is not to say that much of queer theory isn’t likewise optimistically motivated: much of Butler’s work seems thus energized, even as its optimistic premise nevertheless deploys a comparatively less optimistic-seeming lexicon of melancholy.

     

    I mean, here, to distinguish between the energy that motivates a theoretical enterprise and the subject of that enterprise. Queer optimism (pace inevitable charges of sloppiness by hard-core nominalists) speaks less to what motivates a project than to a project’s content. Optimistic motivations (of Butler, or even Bersani, and many other theorists[11) could correspond to Gramsci’s “optimism of the will,” while queer optimism would not. This is the case because Gramsci’s optimism does not seem radically different from optimism as usually conceived, whereas queer optimism, prima facie, seeks to complicate how optimism is conceived. This is not to say that I do not feel solidarity with recent interventions in pessimistic methodology (for instance, challenges to what Paul Ricoeur first termed a hermeneutics of suspicion).12 Queer optimism, however, calls for a different sort of intervention, an intervention on the level of content rather than of practice. On the level of practice, then, I’m sympathetic toward Butler’s recent invoking of hope. “I hope to show,” Butler writes in Giving an Account of Oneself, “that morality is neither a symptom of its social conditions nor a site of transcendence of them, but rather is essential to the determination of agency and the possibility of hope” (21). The formulation, “possibility of hope,” confirms what in a subsequent sentence Butler makes clear: that hope inhabits a horizon, emergent “at the limits of our schemes of intelligibility” (21). This hope, in content if not necessarily in practice, differs from queer optimism in that hope held-as-promissory (or “possibility”), or consigned to intelligibility’s limits, is only fleetingly intelligible–which is to say, estranged from immanent, fastidious articulation.

     

    Hope is promissory, hope is a horizon. Shame, on the other hand, occurs in a lavish present tense. This, again, helps clarify my turn to shame. What if the field of queer optimism could be situated as firmly in the present tense as shame? Even as work on shame may arise out of generosity and hopefulness, this work, within queer theory and affect theory, provides shame all the more eloquent and vibrant a vocabulary, leaving positive affect itself lexically impoverished. That positive affect would seem naturally less available to thinking (or that hope definitionally would exist futurally, and shame immanently) is the sort of temporal donnée against which this essay speaks.

     

    I have here distinguished between motivation and content because Eve Kosofsky Sedgwick’s theorizations of shame are indubitably, magnanimously optimistic and good-intentioned. Furthermore, the bon esprit that suffuse Sedgwick’s work–the inseparability, in her writing, of delight and perspicacity–have inspired my own thinking in ways for which I hardly can account. If ignorance attaches to bliss,13 Sedgwick’s trenchant complicating of ignorance (Epistemology 5) has made my chiasmatic attempt to complicate bliss possible. More simply, I imagine my project as a furthering of Sedgwick’s account of tantalizingly immanent joy, in Proust:

     

    In Freud, then, there would be no room–except as an example of self-delusion–for the Proustian epistemology whereby the narrator of A la recherche;, who feels in the last volume “jostling each other within me a whole host of truths concerning human passions and character and conduct,” recognizes them as truths insofar as “the perception of [them] caused me joy.” In the paranoid Freudian epistemology, it is implausible enough to suppose that truth could be even an accidental occasion of joy; inconceivable to imagine joy as a guarantor of truth. Indeed, from any point of view it is circular, or something, to suppose that one’s pleasure at knowing something could be taken as evidence of the truth of the knowledge. (“Paranoid Reading” 137-38)

     

    I’m riveted by the idea that joy could be a guarantor of truth–differently put, that joy could be persuasive. While qualifying the above observations with a caveat against tautology, Sedgwick’s later analyses of shame are marvelous in part for their escape of tautology, such that shame would yield knowledges not at all equivalent to the sense of shame with which one starts. This new body of knowledge, all the same, defers to a nominal circularity–what no longer resembles shame, in Sedgwick’s writing, still is called shame. Why would this necessarily be the case? Given shame’s (or, for that matter, melancholy’s) lability within queer theory, why might queer optimism’s subjects not be analogously labile?

     

    In “Shame, Theatricality, and Queer Performativity,” Sedgwick charts the exuberant, ambivalent affects of Henry James as he returns (in writing the prefaces for the New York Edition) to his own earlier novels and characters and to his own earlier authorial selves. In these prefaces (as in nearly everything he writes), James’s affective range is expansive, fastidious and ravishing, but the affect toward which Sedgwick turns (indeed, the affect, for Sedgwick, that comes to organize, beget and describe most other affects) is shame:

     

    The speaking self of the prefaces does not attempt to merge with the potentially shaming or shamed figurations of its younger self, younger fictions, younger heroes; its attempt is to love them. That love is shown to occur both in spite of shame and, more remarkably, through it. (40)

     

    The love of shame is the love between a “younger self” and the self that is currently writing; in the distance between selves, the younger self might arguably be experienced not only as having written those “younger fictions,” but as a “younger fiction” in its own right. The love of shame occurs in the disruption of what might otherwise be seen as a continuous self. The love of shame does not “merge,” does not synthesize, but flourishes in the very space of personal fissure. This is unsurprising, in that Silvan Tomkins (whose work Sedgwick’s extends and to which it pays homage) describes shame as “strik[ing] deepest into the heart of man”:

     

    While terror and distress hurt, they are wounds inflicted from outside which penetrate the smooth surface of the ego; but shame is felt as an inner torment, a sickness of the soul. It does not matter whether the humiliated one has been shamed by derisive laughter or whether he mocks himself. In either event he feels himself naked, defeated, alienated, lacking in dignity and worth. (133)

     

    Tomkins associates shame with guilt, and to a lesser extent with humiliation. I think also of a particularly resonant (if only because so pervasively, campily familiar) articulation of the link between shame and embarrassment: I could just die! Teenagers often say this in movies after they have done something embarrassing, or if their parents have done something terrible in their presence. Less common now than in the fifties (cf. Sandra Dee), the articulation clarifies an implicit relation between shame and the strategies of self-abdication found in Butler and Bersani. I could just die! More often a performance of shame than a literal threat (shame, after all, is, as Sedgwick suggests, the performative affect par excellence14), this articulation of shame nonetheless speaks to the ways shame, as an affect, erupts not just in the space between one version of self and another (as in James), but also in the space where one wants another self, and more acutely, to give up the self one has.15

     

    “Shame,” Tomkins writes, is “a specific inhibitor of continuing interest and enjoyment” (134). I want to emphasize that shame can also inhibit continuity. To live without shame, putatively, would be to live continuously, without the trauma of wanting to disappear, without the need to reinvent one’s “younger self” as a new if no less fictional person. A life without shame (neither plausible nor necessarily desirable, but entertained here hypothetically) might approach the stability of Butler’s melancholy congealment, even as Tomkins writes that shame, in its renunciation of or abandonment by a loved one, is “not unlike mourning, in which I become exquisitely aware of the self just because I will not surrender the love object which must be surrendered” (138). Here we come to a double-bind. The stable self is constitutively melancholic, and yet the unstable self, florid with “its own, powerfully productive and powerfully social metamorphic possibilities” (Sedgwick, “Shame” 65) is constituted by an affect that might “not [be] unlike mourning.” Why should the opposite paths of ontological stability and instability seem to go in circles?

     

    Shame, for Sedgwick, “generates and legitimates the place of identity . . . but does so without giving that identity space the standing of an essence” (64). While identities are not to be essentialized, however, Sedgwick claims that “at least for certain (‘queer’) people, shame is simply the first, and remains a permanent, structuring fact of identity” (64). Sedgwick’s “simply,” “permanent” and “fact” effect a strange dissonance between shame’s fostering of affective and ontological equivocation (what Sedgwick terms “possibilities”) and its own utterly stringent unequivocality. Shame, as conjured by Sedgwick, seldom seems shame-like, per se. So to Sedgwick’s credit, we can see in James how a “potentially paralyzing affect” can be “narratively, emotionally, and performatively productive” (44). What Sedgwick identifies in James’s writing as “occasions for shame and excitement” (46) do not, however, seem directly to bear on shame. Sedgwick cites this passage from James’s preface to The Wings of the Dove:

     

    I haven’t the heart now, I confess, to adduce the detail of so many lapsed importances; the explanations of most of which, after all, I take to have been in the crudity of a truth beating full upon me through these reconsiderations, the odd inveteracy with which picture, at almost any turn, is jealous of drama, and drama (though on the whole with greater patience, I think) suspicious of picture. Between them, no doubt, they do much for the theme; yet each baffles insidiously the other’s ideals and eats round the edges of its positions. (46)

     

     

    Why denominate these various affective maneuvers–these magnificently odd personifications of aesthetic media–shame, when they seem, affectively, so variously tinged with delight (for instance, the delight of imagining “drama” and “picture” eating around each other’s edges)? Such a question, following both the early work of Charles Darwin, and the more recent work of Mark Hansen, attempts to characterize not just what any particular affect is, but how long it lasts, what it cedes to, and why or how it cedes.16 The degree to which Sedgwick’s conception of shame, at this Jamesian juncture, seems more convincing on a nominal rather than affective register recalls, again, the ways Butler’s melancholy often doesn’t quite seem melancholic (in her work or as recounted in a work such as Julia Kristeva’s Black Sun). Or the way Bersani’s self-shattering describes an obliteration that on a somatic level (or even, speculatively, on a psychical one) doesn’t occur so much as hover, tantalizingly, as an idea.

     

    “Blazons of shame, the ‘fallen face’ with eyes down and head averted–and, to a lesser extent, the blush–are semaphores of trouble and at the same time of a desire to reconstitute the interpersonal bridge” (Sedgwick, “Shame” 36). I would question the inevitable simultaneity of shame’s semaphoric “trouble” and its desire for reconnection. Shame (at its most felicitous) cedes to a desire to reconstitute interpersonality, but this desire is neither synchronous with nor necessarily equivalent to shame’s desire to hide. Sedgwick posits shame as “the first” and “permanent, structuring fact of [certain (‘queer’)] identity”:

     

    Queer, I’d suggest, might usefully be thought of as referring in the first place to this group or an overlapping group of infants and children, those whose sense of identity is for some reason tuned most durably to the note of shame . . . . The shame-delineated place of identity doesn’t determine the consistency or meaning of that identity, and race, gender, class, sexuality, appearance, and abledness are only a few of the defining social constructions that will crystallize there, developing from this originary affect their particular structures of expression, creativity, pleasure, and struggle. (63)

     

    Why, in the midst of all these social constructions, is shame granted originary privilege? Tomkins usefully notes that before shame there exists an even more originary positivity:

     

    One of the paradoxical consequences of the linkage of positive affect and shame is that the same positive affect which ties the self to the object also ties the self to shame. To the extent to which socialization involves a preponderance of positive affect the individual is made vulnerable to shame and unwilling to renounce either himself or others. (138-39)

     

    Before one can have shame, before one can be disappointed into blushing (or performative blazoning), one must previously have nursed some “preponderance of positive affect.” But why, if positive affect so clearly precedes shame, is shame so unequivocally pronounced foundational? I don’t disagree with Sedgwick on the point of shame’s seeming intertwined in queer experience. I nonetheless challenge the insistence of shame’s anteriority; at the expense of elaborations of the sorts of positivity that might have preceded it, at the expense of the queer continuities which shame might be able to interrupt.

     

    Toujours du Jour

     

    I do not take my readings of Butler or Bersani as definitive, nor do I imagine these moments in the work of Butler or Bersani as synechdocally representative of their work. I mean, rather, to articulate some of the ways in which Butler’s and Bersani’s rigorous thinking itself sometimes seems predicated on curiously nonrigorous attachments (in the case of Butler) to melancholy, or (in the case of Bersani) to an unqualified aggression calling forth a no less qualified resort to self-shattering. My account of Sedgwick does not critique Sedgwick’s analyses of shame for lack of inventive and generous scrutiny (the sort of scrutiny I find absent in Butler’s and Bersani’s respective accounts of melancholy or aggression). Rather, I’ve sought to note how Sedgwick’s thinking makes available an affective territory far more interesting and various than the denomination “shame” could (or further, should) describe.

     

    Juxtaposed with Lee Edelman’s 2004 book, No Future, the orchestratively powerful but nonetheless opaque queer pessimism of the above theorists would seem like kid stuff (to invoke Edelman’s own charged turn to this formulation). The queer pessimism of Butler and Bersani, circuited from text to text in a persuasiveness inseparable from its occludedness, brings to mind Jean Laplanche’s enigmatic signifier.17 Edelman’s queer pessimism, by contrast, insistent on its own absolute non-enigmatic unequivocality, might suggest the draconian bravura of a superego were Edelman’s project not so pitted against the superego, pitted against all forms of stable identity except the “irreducible” (No Future 6) identity of the death drive. Though moving beyond the strictures of psychoanalysis, it is difficult for me not to hear in the sheer absoluteness of Edelman’s dicta something like a superego’s militancy.

     

    Edelman insists that “the only oppositional status to which our queerness could ever lead would depend on our taking seriously the place of the death drive we’re called on to figure” (30). Edelman, as the passage I’ve cited suggests, doesn’t seem to leave queers a lot of options, even as the option he adjures hardly seems self-evident. The egregious militancy of No Future presents an apogee of what I’ve been calling queer pessimism. Or if not an apogee, then a sort of pessimism-drag. My own thinking differs from Edelman’s in many ways, and might often go without saying.18 How, for instance, could a project attached to queer optimism not bristle at a book that insists unilaterally that “the only oppositional status” available to queers demands fealty to the death drive? Edelman’s book certainly trounces optimism, but the optimism he trounces is not the optimism for which my own project lobbies. Edelman writes thus:

     

    The structuring optimism of politics to which the order of meaning commits us, installing as it does the perpetual hope of reaching meaning through signification, is always, I would argue, a negation of this primal, constitutive, and negative act. And the various positivities produced in its wake by the logic of political hope depend on the mathematical illusion that negated negations might somehow escape, and not redouble, such negativity. My polemic thus stakes its fortunes on a truly hopeless wager: that taking the Symbolic’s negativity to the very letter of the law . . . that turning the force of queerness against all subjects, however queer, can afford an access to the jouissance that at once defines us and negates us. Or better: can expose the constancy, the inescapability, of such access to jouissance in the social order itself, even if that order can access its constant access to jouissance only in the process of abjecting that constancy of access onto the queer. (5)

     

    As I’ve made clear, and as this essay’s final section will make clearer, queer optimism is no more attached to “the logic of political hope” than No Future is. Even as I think there are some forms of hope worth defending, I’m not interested, for present purposes, in demarcating good and bad hopes, hegemonic and nonhegemonic attachments to futurity. To the extent that my own project seeks to recuperate optimism’s potential critical interest by arguing for its separability from the promissory, I’m here insisting that there are ways of resisting a pernicious logic of “reproductive futurism” besides embodying the death drive. If Edelman opines that all forms of optimism eventually lead to Little Orphan Annie singing “Tomorrow,” and therefore that all forms of optimism must be met with queer death-driven irony’s “always explosive force” (31), I oppositely insist that optimism’s limited cultural and theoretical intelligibility might not call for optimism’s grandiose excoriation, but for optimism to be rethought along non-futural lines. Edelman’s hypostasization of optimism accepts optimism as at best simplistic and at worst fascistic. This hypostasization leaves unthinkable queer optimism’s own proposition that the reduction of optimism to a diachronic, futurally bound axis is itself the outcome of a machinery that spits out optimism as junk, and renders suspicious any form of “enjoyment” that isn’t a (mis)translation of jouissance, “a violent passage beyond the bounds of identity, meaning, and law” (25), the production of “identity as mortification.” Enjoyment, anyone?19

     

    Edelman’s might be one way of refusing the logic of reproductive futurism, but not the only one. That there would be many possible queer courses of action might indeed seem to follow from Edelman’s invoking of Lacanian truth (“Wunsch“) as characterized by nothing so much as its extravagant, recalcitrant particularity. “The Wunsch,” Lacan writes in a passage cited in No Future‘s introduction, “does not have the character of a universal law but, on the contrary, of the most particular of laws–even if it is universal that this particularity is to be found in every human being” (6). This truth, which Edelman aligns with “queerness” (and ergo with negativity, the death-drive, jouissance, etc.) “does not have the character of a universal law.” Edelman, for all his attentiveness to the Lacanian “letter of the law,” glosses Lacan’s own argument with a symptomatic liberality. “Truth, like queerness,” Edelman writes, “finds its value not in a good susceptible to generalization, but only in the stubborn particularity that voids every notion of a general good. The embrace of queer negativity, then, can have no justification if justification requires it to reinforce some positive social value” (6). Lacan, however, does not speak, even in Jacques-Alain Miller’s translation, of a “general good.” He speaks of a universal, which might be good or bad. Furthermore, if the only characteristic universally applicable to this “truth, like queerness” is its particularity, what sort of particularity voids every notion of a general good? Might so intransigent a particularity sometimes not void a universal, good or bad?

     

    My line of inquiry might seem petty, but my question, in fact, illuminates how little Edelman’s argument can hold onto the particularity on which it is partly premised. “The queer,” Edelman insists, “insists that politics is always a politics of the signifier” (6). Edelman likewise insists that “queer theory must always insist on its connection to the vicissitudes of the sign” (7). The ubiquity of “always” and “every” in Edelman’s argument is nearly stunning, and it seems to me indicative of No Future‘s coerciveness, as a different passage from No Future‘s introduction quite handily demonstrates:

     

    Rather than rejecting, with liberal discourse, this ascription of negativity to the queer, we might, as I argue, do better to consider accepting and even embracing it. Not in the hope of forging thereby some more perfect social order–such a hope, after all, would only reproduce the constraining mandate of futurism, just as any such order would equally occasion the negativity of the queer–but rather to refuse the insistence of hope itself as affirmation, which is always affirmation of an order whose refusal will register as unthinkable, irresponsible, inhumane. And the trump card of affirmation? Always the question: If not this, what? Always the demand to translate the insistence, the pulsive force, of negativity into some determinate stance or “position” whose determination would negate it: always the imperative to immure it in some stable and positive form. (4)

     

    Always this, always this, always that. This absoluteness in Edelman’s characterization of affirmation, meant to rally and provoke, recalls Sedgwick’s incredulous reading of Fredric Jameson’s ukase, “Always historicize.” “What could have less to do,” Sedgwick rightly asks, “with historicizing than the commanding, atemporal adverb ‘always’” (“Paranoid Reading” 125)? What, for that matter, could have less to do with particularizations? The axiomatic thrust of Edelman’s “always” would seem to make the world so irrevocably one thing that response to the world would amount to one thing. But still: why would rejecting a primary attachment to futurity (regardless of what this futurity always does or doesn’t do) necessarily require embodying negativity?20

     

    Edelman’s queer pessimism positions itself as “our” only option without having exhausted what other options might glimmeringly look like. This glimmer doesn’t conjure the sort of horizon Edelman would be so quick to dismantle. Rather, it suggests that not all optimisms are a priori equivalent to each other. And as importantly, that not all queer theories need look like Edelman’s. “As a particular story . . . of why storytelling fails,” Edelman writes, “queer theory, as I construe it, marks the ‘other’ side of politics . . . the ‘side’ outside all political sides, committed as they are, on every side, to futurism’s unquestioned good” (7). This account of queer theory, even as construed by one theorist, hardly seems like a “particular” story, not at least particular enough. Queer theory, on this account, doesn’t seem like an escape from the political’s claustrophobically refracted unavailing sides, but a claustrophobia unto itself.21

     

    “If not this, what?”

     

    To return to the question Edelman raises, if not this, what? The structure of such a question importantly allows possible answers beyond the foreclosing choices that queer theory, these past decades, often has been asked to make. Mourning or melancholia? Gay pride or queer shame? Utopic or nonutopic? Even as the diacritical assertion of queer pessimism versus queer optimism might seem yet another reductive binary, queer optimism, as an answer to if not this, what?, first and foremost resists the self-evidence of the diverse things this “what” is. For instance, Butler reiterates in Giving an Account of Oneself what she earlier maintains in The Psychic Life of Power as the ethical value of “affirm[ing] what is contingent and incoherent in oneself” (Giving an Account 41). It seems crucial, in affirming what is incoherent in oneself, to understand likewise what is coherent, and furthermore, crucial to have a vocabulary as adequate to coherence as to coherence’s disruption. Why take coherence for granted? Why presume that coherence necessarily is characterizable only in the attenuated, non-critical terms that queer theory and other post-structuralist disciplines seek to challenge? Dissatisfaction with a given regime of coherence might sponsor a critical commitment to dismantling coherence tout court. Such a dissatisfaction, however, might likewise productively sponsor a reconfiguration of coherence–the cultivation of a vocabulary of coherence that more precisely does justice to the ways in which coherence isn’t expansively, unilaterally destructive, reductive, or ideological.

     

    To imagine a reevaluation of something like personal coherence as a queer-optimistic project requires, as I have been arguing, a reevaluation of optimism itself. Disdain for optimism as commonly practiced or invoked might solicit optimism’s wholesale repudiation (a la Edelman)–or it might solicit optimism’s own redress. Optimism’s queer contents seem inaccessible so long as optimism is sustained as futural, as allergic to scrupulous thinking. To more fully account for what in optimism heretofore has seemed unthinkable, it seems useful to return to Leibniz, insofar as Leibniz’s thinking remains exemplary of the context in which optimism is thought (or more to the point, not thought) about. Here I only want to note where Leibnizian optimism departs most starkly from my own essay’s investigations. My critique of Leibniz isn’t incommensurate with my critique of queer theory. And as this essay wishes already to have made clear, one of the ends of reconceiving optimism as an intellectual venture would be to open the possibility of a criticism–even skepticism–that is itself optimistically motivated. I conclude with an account of Leibniz–and by extension, Leibnizian and non-Leibnizian happiness–to suggest the penuries of our current repertoires of optimism and happiness. Again: what if these penuries compelled us to think harder about optimism or happiness, rather than accept their straw-figure hypostasizations as grounds for their dismissal or too easy excoriation?

     

    Before turning to what in Leibniz underwrites the modes of optimism from which my own project diverges, I wish to note one extraordinary way in which Leibnizian optimism itself differs from the optimisms invoked by Berlant, Bersani, Edelman, or Warner. Leibnizian optimism is not, in fact, oriented to the future. Optimism, etymologically evoking one who hopes, might somehow have come to name one strain of Leibniz’s philosophy, but Leibniz’s writing–even when most resembling Panglossian caricature of it–has nearly as little staked in hope or future as Edelman’s anti-optative No Future. In his 1686 Discourse on Metaphysics, Leibniz delineates the tenets of what would later be described as his optimism. “Therefore,” Leibniz writes,

     

    it is sufficient to have the confidence that God does everything for the best and that nothing can harm those who love him. But to know in detail the reasons that could have moved him to choose this order of the universe–to allow sins, to dispense his saving grace in a certain way–surpasses the power of a finite mind, especially when it has not yet attained the enjoyment of the vision of God. (38)

     

     

    As Deleuze succinctly notes, “Leibniz’s optimism is really strange” (The Fold 68). Really strange, in that “miseries are not what was missing; the best of all possibilities only blossoms amid the ruins of Platonic Good. If this world exists, it is not because it is the best, but because it is rather the inverse; it is the best because it is, because it is the one that is. The philosopher is still not the Inquisitor he will soon become with empiricism . . . . He is a Lawyer, or God’s attorney. He defends God’s Cause, following the word that Leibniz invents, ‘theodicy’” (68). That is, when Leibniz exhorts that we find all God’s works excellent and in complete conformity with what we might have desired, he neither claims that any given work would seem manifestly delightful, nor that our desires only retroactively could be known.

     

    Adjacent but by no means equivalent to Leibnizian tautology is a more familiarly teleological model of wishful thinking, whereby time could reveal the commensurability of God’s work and our desire. Leibniz, however, doesn’t need time to prove what faith simply makes known,22 faith being that which posits optimism not as practice but as given. Following Leibniz, a struggle to remain optimistic in the face of calamity or distress signals not a wavering of optimism, per se, but a wavering of faith, whose digital robustness forecloses faith as analogic sliding-scale. One believes or one does not, without gradation. Similarly, either one is optimistic, or one is not. To struggle to remain optimistic most reductively belies that one is not optimistic, that one already has fallen from the logic by which optimism is upheld. To believe absolutely in the goodness of God makes optimism not a choice, or even an attitude, but that faith’s inevitable extension. Faith’s capacity to convert all crises (past, present, future) into manifestations of the good indicates the extent to which Leibniz’s theodicy is as imperializing as the pessimisms of queer theory. That is, the semper of Leibniz and the semper of Edelman seem equivalently suspect, even if programatically opposed.

     

    At the same time, however, this Leibnizian semper is exactly that which countermands any privileging of futurity. Faith subordinates human experience of time (past, present, future) to a divine temporality in which temporal distinctions all but vanish; God already has orchestrated what will happen no less than what already has happened. Leibniz writes thus:

     

    The whole future is doubtless determined: but since we know not what it is, nor what is foreseen or resolved, we must do our duty, according to the reason that God has given us and according to the rules that he has prescribed for us; and therefore we must have a quiet mind, and leave to God himself the care for the outcome. (Theodicy 154)

     

     

    Humans perhaps equivocate, but Leibniz’s God does not, and in the fundamental non-equivocality of what divinely will happen, the future consequently for all practical purposes lies beyond engagement, revision, or hope–contrary the ways optimism, after Leibniz, is not beyond hope but generated by it.

     

    My turn from Leibniz, then, does not stem from his intense valuation of futurity; optimism as valuation of futurity seems a gross mischaracterization of both Leibniz’s Discourse and his Theodicy. Rather, queer optimism most significantly departs from Leibniz in indirect (and perhaps counterintuitive) response to Leibniz’s radical deflation of futurity. Leibnizian optimism lies beyond theorization not because it consigns determination or delight to a futural horizon, but because the faith that underwrites it looms beyond interrogation. This brand of optimistic unimpeachability characterizes both George W. Bush’s exasperating contumaciousness, as well as Howard Dean’s infamously Whitmanian barbaric yawp. The former is beyond theorization because (among myriad less glib reasons) Bush is incapable of theorizing; the latter, beyond theorization to the extent that Dean’s whoop came on the heels of defeat, what J.L. Austin might characterize as an optimistic performative utterance executed under infelicitous conditions. A person (e.g., George W. Bush) might possess the faith that prosthetically would make credible (which is to say, make credibly existent) the divinely infinite logic which to his finite mind is otherwise incomprehensible, or he might not. The optimism that this essay introduces, it nearly goes without saying, is not predicated on faith, at very least because concertedly wary of the seductions of absolutes over the comparably vulnerable values of particularity. I raise the examples of Bush and Dean to note the ways in which optimism already saturates the political field, both making and breaking presidential campaigns, initiating and sustaining otherwise untenable-seeming policies and positions (not to mention wars). Optimism’s political power (if not eloquence) makes its critical re-examination–as opposed to its critical eschewal–all the more timely, and crucial.

     

    Like optimism’s iron fist, Leibnizian happiness is chronic and beyond question, even as the means of this interminable happiness are in a secular register altogether unavailable. Leibnizian optimism purports a structure in which non-happiness might arise as an erosion of faith, as an erosion, that is, of a happiness that is otherwise structurally inescapable. I find the possible ordeal of inescapable happiness fascinating, in part because such an understanding so extravagantly revises how happiness ordinarily is considered. If optimism eludes or renders gratuitous theorization via a tautology (Deleuze’s “it is the one that is”) that fashions optimism as conceptually expansive and indelible as the world itself, happiness–plain old happy, not Leibniz’s mega-happy–oppositely eludes theorization because so transient. Non-Leibnizian happiness isn’t inextricable from structure (for instance, Leibnizian faith) but more precisely experienced as a disruption of structure.

     

    To speak of optimism’s relation to the timely likewise is to speak of optimism’s strenuous and strange relation to time. In Leibniz, a finite mind could come (if at best asymptotically) closest to accessing infinite knowledge through the exercise of an intense patience by which future events could make sense of past ones. The optimism of my study isn’t interested in the capacity of time to render the meaning of apparently terrible circumstances felicitous. My project more fundamentally challenges the temporal narratives to which both (Leibnizian) optimistic happiness and non-optimistic happiness ordinarily are subjected. For instance: Leibnizian happiness is chronic and beyond question, but the means of this durability are in a secular domain altogether unavailable. Leibnizian optimism imagines a structure in which nonhappiness might erupt as a wavering of faith, as a wavering, that is, of a happiness that is otherwise structurally inescapable. On the contrary, non-Leibnizian happiness (as vernacularly understood) isn’t inextricable from a structure (for instance, the strong theory of faith), but is more acutely experienced as a disruption of structure.

     

    The psychoanalyst Jonathan Lear describes happiness as disruption in his account not of Leibniz, but of Aristotle:

     

    If contemplation were a state that one could achieve and sustain indefinitely and unproblematically, then Aristotle would have been led to feel discontent within it–and he would start to fantasize a real happiness which lies just outside. (50)

     

    Continuing his discussion of contemplation, for Aristotle, as a site of happiness happier than that derived from living ethically, Lear observes that “those few who do manage to find time to contemplate will experience that time as precious and short-lived” (50). The supreme happiness afforded by contemplation, that is, lies outside the realm of ethics. This moment in which contemplation occurs is “precious and short-lived.” In the Leibnizian model, happiness is the structure from which one falls. In the Aristotelian model, happiness lies outside of structure. Indeed, in Lear’s work, happiness more closely resembles the death drive (in its disruption of life-as-lived) than it does the pleasure principle (despite happiness’ quotidian imbrications with pleasure), whose status as principle Lear finds antithetical to happiness’ propensity to disrupt principles as such:

     

    Here we need to go back to an older English usage of “happiness” in terms of happenstance: the experience of chance things’ working out well rather than badly. Happiness, in this interpretation, is . . . a lucky break . . . . If one thinks about it, I think one will see that in such fleeting moments we do find real happiness. (129)

     

    Despite Lear’s chiasmatic invoking of thinking, it seems unclear how such constitutively fleeting happiness could be thought about. One could recollect it, but could one articulate it beyond the fact that it feels good, quickly? Or that it feels so different from the rest of life that it approaches something like death? As Lear writes, “the fantasy of a happy life becomes tinged with the suggestion of a life beyond life–a certain kind of living death” (27). It is not surprising, given this claim, that Lear finally opines that “there are certain structural similarities between Aristotle’s treatment of happiness and Freud’s treatment of death. Happiness and death are each invoked as the purported aim of all striving” (98). The difficulty of really thinking about happiness (as opposed to the ease of thinking that real happiness arrives fleetingly) is, I think, a function of its putative fleetingness. Were one able to articulate happiness more thoroughly, or even imagine it as less fleeting, would it seem as authentically happy?

     

    Queer optimism involves a kind of thought-experiment. What if happiness could outlast fleeting moments, without that persistence attenuating the quality of happiness? What if, instead of attenuating happiness, this extension of happiness opened it up to critical investigations that didn’t a priori doubt it, but instead made happiness complicated, and strange? If the insights of the past few decades could newly mobilize shame, shattering, or melancholy as interesting, as opposed to merely seeming instances of fear and trembling; what if we could learn from those insights and critical practices, and imagine happiness as theoretically mobilizable, and conceptually difficult? Which is to ask, what if happiness weren’t merely, self-reflexively happy, but interesting? Queer optimism cannot guarantee what such a happiness would look like, how such a happiness would feel. And while it does not promise a road to an Emerald City, queer optimism avails a new terrain of critical inquiry, which, surely, is a significant felicity in its own right.

     

    Notes

     

    1. I offer this anecdote to suggest the difficulty of sequestering feelings from metafeelings. Or to conjure Isabel Archer or Maggie Verver, the frustrating and exhilarating perviousness of thinking and living. I’m not telling this particular story as a retreat from the discursive or critical, but to note the strangeness of having felt like an allegory for my own subsequent academic work. Why did sadness feel indomitable? Why did happiness, in comparison, seem to offer so impoverished and ineloquent a vocabulary?

     

    2. What Butler openly invokes as “connection”–implying connection between others on political, erotic, and any number of less recognizably charged registers–returns, more recently, in Lauren Berlant’s invoking of “collective attachment.” I wish to juxtapose Butler’s emphasis on “incoherence” with Berlant’s emphasis on attachment itself. “I propose,” Berlant writes, “that we turn optimism itself into a topic probably best phrased as collective attachment. Optimism is a way of describing a certain futurism that implies continuity with the present” (“Critical Inquiry” 449). I continue to be grateful for Berlant’s insistence on returning the term “optimism” to the critical field.

     

    3. For other references to congealment in Butler’s writing, see Gender Trouble, xii and 43, as well as Bodies that Matter, 244.

     

    4. “Spawn,” with its suggestion of mass hatchings of creatures, arguably resonates within the same implicit science-fictional register as “congealment.”

     

    5. Bersani’s account of a person’s hardwiring for destructiveness, “something as species-specific as the human aptitude for verbal language” (126-27), indulges a fantasy of primordiality that recalls and arguably is indebted to Foucault’s account of disciplinary subjectivity, even as the former’s insistence on a radical interiority starkly departs from the emphatically non-psychologizing dermal attentions of the latter. See Foucault, Discipline & Punish 153.

     

    6. “The centrality of redemptive and therapy cultures to the promise of love’s formalized satisfactions means that where love provides the dominant rhetoric and form of attachment, so a discussion of pedagogy must be. Popular discourses that merge scientific expertise with a putatively general desire for better techniques of the self–as we see in talk shows, self-help books, and twelve-step semipublics–provide maps for people to clutch in their hands so that they can revisit the unzoned affective domain of which love is the pleasant and thinkable version. In these contexts love–never fully secularized–is the church of optimism for the overwhelmed. The currency that pays the price of entrance is the loss of everything except optimism” (Berlant, “Love, a Queer Feeling” 441).

     

    7. See, for instance, The Freudian Body: Psychoanalysis and Art 38-40.

     

    8. For other queer-theoretical texts less thinkable without the preceding work of Butler or Bersani, see Tim Dean’s Beyond Sexuality; David L. Eng’s and David Kazanjian’s edited collection, Loss, for which Judith Butler writes an afterword; Diana Fuss’s Identification Papers; Ann Cvetkovich’s An Archive of Feelings: Trauma, Sexuality, and Lesbian Public Cultures; Teresa de Lauretis’s The Practice of Love: Lesbian Sexuality and Perverse Desire, whose first chapter takes as epigraph one of Bersani’s articulations on Freudian desire; Brett Farmer’s Spectacular Passions: Cinema, Fantasy, Gay Male Spectatorships; Didier Eribon’s Insult and the Making of the Gay Self; Esther Sánchez-Pardo’s Cultures of the Death Drive: Melanie Klein and Modernist Melancholia; Jeffrey T. Nealon’s Alterity Politics: Ethics and Performative Subjectivity; José Muñoz’s Disidentifications: Queers of Color and the Performance of Politics. The above list, neither alphabetical nor chronological, intends only to suggest the iceberg’s tip; the single essays written under the influence of Bersani or Butler are nearly countless. Butler and Bersani have proliferated and inspired a kind of critical mass, such that my essay positions itself not just in relation to the work of two scholars (or three, or four), but in relation to the veritable queer cottage-industry that these scholars have engendered.

     

    9. See, for instance, Judith Butler’s trenchant analysis of hate speech in Excitable Speech: A Politics of the Performative, and more recently her critique of post-9/11 politics in Precarious Life: The Powers of Mourning and Violence.

     

    10. Curious how both Loss and An Archive of Feelings seek to depathologize their respective melancholia and trauma, as though these books weren’t being published at a time when pathologization itself seemed critically so far afield; as though, if not post-Butler or Bersani, then post-Oprah, melancholia and trauma hadn’t themselves long-trafficked in nonpathological, celebrity-like circuits.

     

    11. Regarding these “countless other thinkers,” I think, for instance, of Michael Moon, Biddy Martin, Jane Gallop, Lauren Berlant, Henry Abelove, and of course, Eve Kosofsky Sedgwick, to whom this section returns.

     

    12. For a lucid critique of the hermeneutics of suspicion along Laplanchian lines, see Tim Dean’s recent “Art as Symptom: Zizek and the Ethics of Psychoanalytic Criticism.”

     

    13. Think, for instance, of Thomas Gray’s paradigmatic “Ode on a Distant Prospect of Eton College”:

     

    Yet, ah! why should they know their fate,
    Since sorrow never comes too late,
    And happiness too swiftly flies?
    Thought would destroy their paradise.
    No more;–where ignorance is bliss,
    ‘Tis folly to be wise.

     

    14. “Shame is the affect that mantles the threshold between introversion and extroversion, between absorption and theatricality, between performativity and–performativity” (Sedgwick, Touching Feeling 38).

     

    15. Whereas Sedgwick celebrates shame’s blossoming between otherwise ossified formulations of selves (for instance, between the Henry James of 1875 and the Henry James of 1907), Giorgio Agamben, in a recent essay titled “Shame, or On the Subject” notes, following Levinas, that “shame is grounded in our being’s incapacity to move away and break from itself” (Remnants 104-05). “In shame,” Agamben writes, “we are consigned to something from which we cannot in any way distance ourselves” (105). From this opposite beginning, and in the radically different (which is to say, most accurately, literal) context of the book’s titular Auschwitz, Agamben nonetheless reaches a conclusion that is nearly identical to Sedgwick’s. “It is now possible to clarify,” Agamben writes, “the sense in which shame is truly something like the hidden structure of all subjectivity and consciousness” (128). I juxtapose Sedgwick’s account of shame with Agamben’s as a way of illustrating the persuasiveness of shame, as a trope, beyond the essay’s immediate queer purlieu. If Sedgwick will eventually make a claim for shame that universalizes its relation to queers, Agamben goes one step further, extending his reading of shame within Primo Levi’s The Reawakening to pertain to everyone. I introduce Agamben to recall the fact that queer theory’s energies are not necessarily constitutively different from theories of people as such; and as often, are mutually informing.

     

    16. See Charles Darwin’s The Expression of the Emotions in Man and Animals and Mark Hansen’s New Philosophy for New Media.

     

    17. Laplanche situates his theorization of the enigmatic signifier in the context of the primal scene. Without speculating on any possible primal scene or scenes in the genesis of queer theory, I find heuristically valuable Laplanche’s account of an enigmatic signifier’s simultaneous transmittability and nonintelligibility: the absorption and circulation of a message’s form, irrespective of recognition of message’s content. Laplanche writes,

     

    The primal scene conveys messages. It is traumatising only because it proffers, indeed imposes its enigmas, which compromise the spectacle addressed to the child. I certainly have no wish to make an inventory of these messages, for there are, in my sense no objective enigmas: the only enigmas that exist are ones that are proffered, and that reduplicate in one way or another the relationship that the sender of the message has with his own unconscious. (170-71)

     

     

    In suggesting the circulation of something like melancholy from one theoretical text to another, I imagine Butler (or Bersani) not as “the sender[s] of the message,” but rather as themselves recipients of an enigma antecedent to their own work.

     

    18. The interminable gadflying of No Future itself constitutes a peculiar and peculiarly capacious generosity, insofar as it is near impossible not to feel something toward Edelman’s work. How not to be grateful for a book that solicits intense feeling from nearly anyone who reads it?

     

    I balk, for instance, at the possibility of a revamped queer ethics predicated on “the corrosive force of irony” (No Future 23), predicated on the slap-happy eschewal of The Child, as though there were only one ideological Child. As though there weren’t within cultural discourse (not just the specter, but) the tenable, exquisitely precocious, touched and touching figure of a Queer Child. “The cult of the Child,” Edelman writes, “permits no shrines to the queerness of boys and girls, since queerness . . . is understood as bringing children and childhood to an end” (19). Such claims seem so patently misguided and foreclosing that it’s difficult to know how to respond, beyond the obvious fact that there’s nothing queerer than childhood: c.f. Henry James’s Maisie, or JonBenet Ramsey, or “Ma Vie en Rose’s” Ludovic, or my own childhood home videos, which motivate in me a certain pathos not because childhood ends where queerness begins, but because my own queerness, as I bat my seahorse eyelashes or wander through leaf-piles, is so effusively, if confusedly, in full-gear. Were one to claim that Edelman’s hypostasizations of the Child seem to do more harm than good, Edelman, impeccably, might say, of course, more harm than good. In fact (of course), Edelman already says as much:

     

    The queerness of which I speak would deliberately sever us from ourselves, from the assurance, that is, of knowing ourselves and hence of knowing our “good.” Such queerness proposes, in place of the good, something I want to call “better,” though it promises, in more than one sense of the phrase, absolutely nothing. (5)

     

    I have written this essay for those wanting (“in more than one sense of the phrase”) something “better” than “nothing.”

     

    To be sure, I’m not the only scholar rankled by Edelman’s immodest proposals. In the introduction to Curiouser: On the Queerness of Children, Steven Bruhm and Natasha Hurley similarly question Edelman’s preemptive inscription of the Child into a predetermined ideological matrix: “What is the effect,” Bruhm and Hurley write, “of projecting the child into a heteronormative future? One effect is that we accept the teleology of the child . . . as heterosexually determined” (Curiouser, xiv). Curiouser‘s essays importantly challenge simplifying or evacuating narratives of childhood sexuality, rescuing children from hypostasized forms of innocence. My own project, on the other hand, seeks to rescue (not children, but) optimism from innocence. Thus, one way of distinguishing my ambitions from those of Bruhm and Hurley is that the latter engage Edelman on the level of No Future‘s subject (the child, or more precisely, the child-under-erasure), whereas I take Edelman’s subject as symptomatic of the book’s methodology, as such. Differently put, Bruhm and Hurley, along with Edelman, presume within a given cultural archive innocence’s epistemic force. If this innocence is linked to a sort of optimism (specifically, for these scholars, through children such as Ragged Dick, Heidi, Pollyanna, etc.), I’m interested in the ways that optimism, within an intellectual archive, hasn’t been hegemonically organizing, so much as a priori ineffectual and depleted.

     

    On a different register, Susan Fraiman interestingly challenges the foreclosure, in No Future, of a queer pregnant body. Fraiman writes at the close of her book Cool Men and the Second Sex,

     

    My interest here is not in the merits of campaigns for gay “normalization” and marriage rights but rather in Edelman’s suppression of procreative queerness even as he brings up lesbian and gay parenting. By tying this firmly and exclusively to adoption, Edelman keeps the category of queerness apart from the feminized, reproductive body, which is imagined as scarcely any closer or more familiar than China or Guatemala. (133)

     

     

    Fraiman’s interceding is timely (and not just because the pregnancy of Katie Holmes has brought home to all checkout-aisle tabloid-readers how utterly queer pregnancy itself can be)–albeit the queer unheimlichof pregnancy has been available for scrutiny, at very least, since Sigourney Weaver’s Ripley. Neither my interest nor Fraiman’s, however, is in a pregnancy that could assert its queerness only along these limited, science-fiction (or Scientological) lines. Rather, I admire Fraiman’s appraisal of Edelman for its vision of queer theory that could accommodate (and not merely chide) the complicated lexicons of maternal affect. Here, again, I would invoke Winnicott, whose own meticulous and insightful theorizations of maternity salubriously supplement those enabled by Fraiman’s work, or (psychoanalytically) the work of Melanie Klein.

     

    19. The argument (if not the polemical affect) of Edelman’s recent study implicitly suggests various moments in Bersani’s corpus, but more explicitly recalls an earlier proposition made by Peggy Phelan, in her 1995 essay, “Dying Man with a Movie Camera, Silverlake Life.” Phelan writes thus:

     

    Let’s suppose that lesbians and gay men in the academies and institutions of the contemporary United States have a particularly potent relation to grief. Exiled from the Law of the Social, many gay men and lesbians may have introjected the passionate hatred of mainstream homophobia and taken up an embattled, aggressive, and complex relation to the death drive. The aggressivity of this relation, the theory goes, makes it possible for us to survive our (first) deaths. While we wait for the next, we perform queer acts. (380)

     

    Such “queer acts,” folded back into Edelman’s No Future, would entail acting as though there were no future, executing actions directly (if not solely) motivated by the death drive. Phelan’s essay, meditating on the utterly harrowing documentary, “Silverlake Life,” is itself harrowing in the austere deference with which Phelan approaches her topic.

     

    20. There isn’t space in this essay to do justice to Edelman’s complicated and saponifying rhetoric of embodiment and figuration.

     

    21. This claustrophobia might account, in part, for the ellipses that conclude No Future‘s second epigraph, by Virginia Woolf. “Yes, I was thinking: we live without a future. That’s whats queer….” One could variously speculate how Woolf’s “queer” differs from Edelman’s, when Woolf continues, beyond Edelman’s ellipses: “That’s whats [sic] queer, with our noses pressed to a closed door” (355).

     

    22. “I hold, therefore, that, according to these principles, in order to act in accordance with the love of God, it is not sufficient to force ourselves to be patient; rather, we must truly be satisfied with everything that has come to us according to his will” (Leibniz, “Discourse on Metaphysics” 37-38). If optimism is difficult to cultivate, this is because a person can never know as much as God does. Leibniz’s conception of God, in this respect, is analogous to Freud’s conception of an unconscious. Both God and the unconscious delineate what a person at any given moment cannot know. Several years later after Leibniz’s writing, in response to Hobbes’s condemnations of humanity, Shaftesbury appositely describes an epistemological predicament which Leibnizian optimism would innoculate altogether, or which something like psychoanalysis might take as point of departure. “In an infinity of things, mutually relative, a mind which sees not infinitely can see nothing fully, and must therefore frequently see that as imperfect which in itself is really perfect” (The Moralists: A Philosophical Rhapsody, qtd. in Tsanoff 113).

     

    Works Cited

     

    • Agamben, Giorgio. Remnants of Auschwitz: The Witness and the Archive. Trans. Daniel Heller-Roazen. New York: Zone, 1999.
    • Berlant, Lauren. “Critical Inquiry, Affirmative Culture.” Critical Inquiry 30.2 (Winter 2004): 445-51.
    • —. “Love, a Queer Feeling.” Homosexuality & Psychoanalysis. Eds. Tim Dean and Christopher Lane. Chicago: U of Chicago P, 2001. 432-51.
    • —. “The Subject of True Feeling: Pain, Privacy, and Politics.” Feminist Consequences: Theory for the New Century. Ed. Elisabeth Bronfen and Misha Kavka. New York: Columbia UP, 2001. 126-60
    • Berlant, Lauren, and Michael Warner. “Sex in Public.” Critical Inquiry 24.2 (Winter 1998): 547-66.
    • Bersani, Leo. The Freudian Body: Psychoanalysis and Art. New York: Columbia UP, 1986.
    • —.”Is the Rectum a Grave?” October 43 (Winter 1987): 197-222.
    • Bersani, Leo, and Ulysse Dutoit. Forms of Being: Cinema, Aesthetics, Subjectivity. London: British Film Institute, 2004.
    • Bruhm, Steven, and Natasha Hurley, eds. Curiouser: On the Queerness of Children. Minneapolis: U of Minnesota P, 2004.
    • Butler, Judith. Bodies that Matter. New York: Routledge, 1993.
    • —. Excitable Speech: A Politics of the Performative. New York: Routledge, 1997.
    • —. Gender Trouble: Feminism and the Subversion of Identity. New York: Routledge, 1999.
    • —. Giving an Account of Oneself. New York: Fordham UP, 2005.
    • —. Precarious Life: The Powers of Mourning and Violence. New York: Verso, 2004.
    • —. The Psychic Life of Power. Stanford: Stanford UP, 1997.
    • Cvetkovich, Ann. An Archive of Feelings: Trauma, Sexuality, and Lesbian Public Cultures. Durham: Duke UP, 2003.
    • Darwin, Charles. The Expression of the Emotions in Man and Animals. Chicago: U of Chicago P, 1965.
    • Dean, Tim. “Art as Symptom: Zizek and the Ethics of Psychoanalytic Criticism.” Diacritics 32.2 (2002): 21-41.
    • —. Beyond Sexuality. Chicago: U of Chicago P, 2000.
    • Dean, Tim, and Christopher Lane. eds. Homosexuality and Psychoanalysis. Chicago: U of Chicago P, 2001.
    • de Lauretis, Teresa. The Practice of Love: Lesbian Sexuality and Perverse Desire. Bloomington: U of Indiana P, 1994.
    • Deleuze, Gilles. Essays Critical and Clinical. Trans. Daniel W. Smith and Michael A. Greco. London: Verso, 1998.
    • —. The Fold: Leibniz and the Baroque. Trans. Tom Conley. Minneapolis: U of Minnesota P, 1993.
    • Edelman, Lee. No Future: Queer Theory and the Death Drive. Durham: Duke UP, 2004.
    • Eng, David L., and David Kazanjian, eds. Loss: The Politics of Mourning. Berkeley: U of California P, 2003.
    • Eribon, Didier. Insult and the Making of the Gay Self. Trans. Michael Lucey. Durham: Duke UP, 2004.
    • Farmer, Brett. Spectacular Passions: Cinema, Fantasy, Gay Male Spectatorships. Durham: Duke UP, 2000.
    • Foucault, Michel. Discipline & Punish: The Birth of the Prison. Trans. Alan Sheridan. New York: Vintage, 1995.
    • Fraiman, Susan. Cool Men and the Second Sex. New York: Columbia UP, 2003.
    • Freud, Sigmund. The Ego and the Id. The Standard Edition of the Complete Psychological Works of Sigmund Freud. Ed. and trans. James Strachey. 24 vols. London: Hogarth, 1953-1974. 3-68.
    • Fuss, Diana. Identification Papers. New York: Routledge, 1995.
    • Hansen, Mark. New Philosophy for New Media. Cambridge: MIT P, 2004.
    • Laplanche, Jean. “Seduction, Persecution, Revelation.” Essays on Otherness. Ed. John Fletcher. London: Routledge, 1999.
    • Lear, Jonathan. Happiness, Death, and the Remainder of Life. Cambridge: Harvard UP, 2000.
    • Leibniz, G.W. “Discourse on Metaphysics.” Philosophical Essays. Ed. and trans. Roger Ariew and Daniel Garber. Indianapolis: Hackett, 1989. 35-68.
    • —. “Discourse on Metaphysics” and Other Essays. Trans. Roger Ariew and Daniel Garber. Indianapolis: Hackett, 1991.
    • —. Theodicy: Essays on the Goodness of God and the Freedom of Man and the Origin of Evil. Ed. Austin Farrer. Chicago: Open Court, 1998.
    • Muñoz, José. Disidentifications: Queers of Color and the Performance of Politics. Minneapolis: U of Minnesota P, 1999.
    • Nealon, Jeffrey T. Alterity Politics: Ethics and Performative Subjectivity. Durham: Duke UP, 1998.
    • Phelan, Peggy. “Dying Man with a Movie Camera. Silverlake Life: The View from Here.” GLQ 2.4 (1995): 379-98.
    • Sánchez-Pardo, Esther. Cultures of the Death Drive: Melanie Klein and Modernist Melancholia. Durham: Duke UP, 2003.
    • Scarry, Elaine. The Body in Pain: The Making and Unmaking of the World. New York: Oxford UP, 1985.
    • Sedgwick, Eve Kosofsky. Epistemology of the Closet. Berkeley: U of California P, 1990.
    • —. “Paranoid Reading and Reparative Reading, or, You’re So Paranoid, You Probably Think this Essay Is About You.” Touching Feeling: Affect, Pedagogy, Performativity. Durham: Duke U Pres, 2003. 123-51.
    • —. “Shame, Theatricality, and Queer Performativity: Henry James’s The Art of the Novel.” Touching Feeling: Affect, Pedagogy, Performativity. Durham: Duke UP, 2003. 35-65.
    • Tomkins, Silvan. Shame and its Sisters: A Silvan Tomkins Reader. Ed. Eve Kosofsky Sedgwick and Adam Frank. Durham: Duke UP, 1995.
    • Tsanoff, Radoslav Andrea. The Nature of Evil. New York: MacMillan, 1931.
    • Winnicott, D.W. “Adolescence: Struggling through the Doldrums.” The Family and Individual Development. London: Tavistock, 1965. 79-87.
    • —. “The Family Affected by Depressive Illness in One or Both Parents.” The Family and Individual Development. London: Tavistock, 1965. 50-60.
    • —. “Roots of Aggression.” Psycho-Analytic Explorations. Cambridge: Harvard UP, 1989.
    • —. The Use of an Object and Relating through Identification.” Playing and Reality. New York: Basic, 1971. 86-94.
    • Woolf, Virginia. The Diary of Virginia Woolf, v.5. London: Chatto and Windus/ Hogarth, 1984.